TWI277079B - Optical disk drive with digital focus and tracking servo system - Google Patents

Abstract

An optical disk drive with a digital servo system is presented. The digital servo system controls tracking or focus. A servo system according to the present invention includes an optical pick-up with detectors providing optical signals, an analog processor receiving the optical signals and providing a digital signal, and digital processors receiving the digital signal and providing control signal that controls the position of the optical pick-up unit. The digital processor executes an algorithm that calculates an error signal, provides amplification and biasing to the error signal, provides filtering for the error signal, and computes the control signal. The error signal can be the focus error signal or the tracking error signal.

Description

1277079 IX. Description of invention:

This patent application is related to the provisional application, the application number is 6〇 / 264351, the invention name is "disc servo system", and the inventor & plus Kadlec, Christopher J. Tumer, Hans B Wach, And (5) as R

Watt. This patent application claims the priority of this application, and the entire contents of the present specification are hereby incorporated by reference. BACKGROUND OF THE INVENTION 1. Field of the Invention This invention relates to an optical disk drive, and more particularly to correction of one of the servo systems of one of the optical disk drives above the multiple zones. [Prior Art] The demand for intensive data storage is increasing at an explosive rate. This need for ugly and ugly is mainly due to the growth of multimedia systems, which are widely used for fine text, video, and audio information. In addition, it is used as a portable, rough, and (4) secret, storage system for personal digital help (Α), mobile phones, e-books, and other departments. demand. The towel is read several times before (she 6. (10) data storage. The disc player' can be used for rough, movable, and portable effects - optical system (such as: for one write and one read) The optical factor of the design of the wipes is: ^ ^ ί ^ 丝 used in the silk tree, and used on the disc to control this = may also use the seed; different; Κ 使 收 收 大型 大型 大型 大型 277 277 277 277 277 277 277 277 277 277 277 277 277 277 277 277 277 277 277 277 277 277 277 277 277 277 277 277 277 277 277 277 277 277 277 277 277 277 277 277 277 277 277 277 277 : used to focus) to oppose this laser or other light source. ^ ϊΐί ΐί ϊί this ί 学元 i cattle, about the focus size 'in turn, '6 and 5 ten big · ♦, its towel, - light: #Material layer noodles are clearly separated. Subsequently, a typical optical path arrives at: 2 3 substrates (i is part of the other part of the disc): and i often teeth through this pre-emptive degree - the general distance, such as : Da Jing 6 cm or more 0 No reason why the opposite movement is provided between the optical components, this (although there may be In order to adapt to the opposite large or giant components, it may have a negative impact on the selection of the wire. These surface effects include the cost of optical calibration between large mold and maintenance components, which must be opposite to each other. And more power on the (four) rotating components to perform operations. Wei fresh step materials often include hand-held / or _ school adjustment procedures 'which may not be able to increase the floor - read the device (write device (wnter) Manufacturing costs, and increases the cost of design repairs and the like. * Many early optical discs and other optical storage systems provide a large-capacity item pick/write device that includes, for example, 12 turns (or Devices with larger diameter discs. However, with the development of optical storage technology, how to use the size of the t mesh to provide a viable and solid system, more and more attention is paid to the market. In general, an actual The read/write device must accommodate a variety of objects within its model factors, including media, media containers (if necessary), media rotation motors, power supplies, and/or petals. Hard processing, focusing, tracing or other servo chip electronics, as well as the transmission of laser or beam optics. Therefore, in order to take advantage of a relatively small model factor, an optical pickup is preferably capable of occupying only a small volume. In particular, the optical pickup preferably has a small size in the direction perpendicular to the surface of the rotating medium. In addition, 1277079 a smaller, denser optical pickup provides several electronic components. A specific problem, which is designed to control the position and focus of the optical pickup. In addition, although larger home systems are less concerned with power usage, portable personal systems should preferably be low power. Therefore, if you provide the same kind of work, you can save the optical secret and the power required by the electronic control system. For example, it is very important to use an optical full lens (〇 ptically 〇verfilu iens). [Disclosed] [CD player] According to another feature of one of the features of the present invention, a device, a system, and a system for controlling an optical disk system: system: focusing and revealing the system of the optical disk system Including: - rotating motor, optical media, on the other hand, one of the optical media optical access list = 5 bracket: a read, write channel 'its combination to provide control materials, the end of the money can read the assets 'Knife and a writable part. This pre-principle and contains readable data, such as: sound, = any other two on the disc = Si:: can write to this; disc example: two can ί 1277079 with the same operating parameters. (4) The == taking unit may have a light source, a reflective skirt, a lens, and a guide line directed to the optical medium. The device and the power feedback device may be included, and the driving device may include: a lightning system This is controlled by the controller. , + and ♦ focal transmission I circuit This is a combination of various feeding service servo circuits. Including: - * Servo loop and a focus root, the present invention, - the control - the optical unit position of the square calculator - on the --transfer arm - the silk pick-up unit in the side of the device to receive the digital signal - error Signal; an offset number 吴 ΐ pressure rif number; digital amplification of this bias error signal == 2 ϊϋΛ gift big money phase - pre-domain wave signal to form a driving wave signal related to a digital control signal to 1 This transmission suits the hand # '猎啸 The position of this optical pickup unit. This is the difference ^ number can be used to mark the error signal or a convergence error. = difference signal system - the seek error signal, the control signal is used to control the position of the seeker (i.e., in the plane parallel to the surface of an optical medium). If the error signal is a focus error signal, the control is used to control the focus position of the optical pickup unit (i.e., the height above the optical medium). In some embodiments, the digital filtering may include: a low frequency integrating device in the household, in the embodiment, the digital filtering may include: a phase first device. In some embodiments, the digital filtering may include: a trap 2^1277079 with a scoop ϊί* in a part of the shot, a sampled new touch wave device can also be used; 3 two orders and two again, 'this digital feeding service The system can include loop gain amplification. The search for 九九性 can also be included. In a focused shoulder system: + is responsible for listening to "TES} to the focus error signal (FES) by subtracting this tracking error signal (FES) from the focus of the CTES). Light 4 = death: a ship system of f can also be converted, for example, from this optical signal to a voltage signal, in order to process the signal received by the self-detecting device in the early capture; The second-order voltage signal curbs the amplified voltage signals, and samples and filters the digital voltage signals of the temple to form the digital signals. Root, one of the feeding systems of the present invention, can be followed by: The #_ device receives the signal and classifies the processor, and receives the digital signal and generates an optical capture device that is placed on the digital processor device component. When the digit is located, it can include a digital signal processor and perform a performance In some embodiments, the detecting devices may respectively include: a 1 cow and two office readings. - a f, an error signal, for example, the sum of the signals of the external components and the center S Signal Z = one search error The signal may be caused by 2 signal differences between the two external components. The device may be any user device or may cause the digital book to be hunted, set to be erected, the phone is cleaved, or may be subjected to any other optical drive including 1277079 = In its own right, the device may include: video broadcasting [digital focusing and tracking servo system] partial, explicit-characteristic-characteristics] The present invention discloses a digital digital system-digital system And the search function. This disc ϊί motor's surface is placed - optical media, the opposite is biased, the photon is taken early, the position of the optical pickup unit is controlled, and the rotary motor is controlled. The arm, and the system. The control system can include: - reading / writing through k I 禺 s & for control signals to a servo system. The media can be a relatively small size of the disc, which has In addition, the CD can have a pre-master second reading: = pre-===: write, data. This can be written = such as: use 33 == a few horses to include user information ( example Machine or a user; * can be written in this' == 1 Singles example), or this light

In the domain, the tir/i age system is in a different area of the domain. The optical capturing unit can have a single-tone, only A detection device of the school. These detection devices can be edited and edited: in this case, Wei Wei, and the optical optics above this optical media control == ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ These feeding loops may include . A combination of feeding circuits.匕········································································································ The number of turns is larger than the error signal to form a release-. r L amplifies the signal related to one of the pre-wave signals to form the drive = training the arm, private (four) the wire is fresh, and the if is a tracking error Signal or - focus error signal. If position (f: the focus position of the optical operation unit parallel to the surface of an optical medium (ie, ·························································· In the device, the 'digital wave chopping wave can include: a phase leading filter i. 爯 施 ? 'This digital filter, the wave can include: a notch filter is installed in the powder to implement the money, a sampling integrity test filter The device can also be true i, two, and. Furthermore, the digital servo system can include: loop gain amplification. In the middle, the logarithm j nonlinear function can also be included. In a focus servo system (TES) focus error The signals (FES) are combined with each other to make a mistake. The signal (FES) is subtracted from the ratio of the tracking error number (TES) to include it. According to one of the tasks, the servo system can also convert the optical signal from 13 1277079 yuan to a voltage signal for processing a signal received by the self-detecting device; providing - offsetting to the signal; digitizing the amplifying signal; and sampling and filtering the digital signal Forming the number of the neck number. ^ 'Generate the number 彳-h,:: clothing, -δ J^ from this, receive the signal and ίίίϊ1 than the processing 11, and receive the digital signal and generate - two; ^ ^ Control the position of the sina unit - digital processing H. In part ii, including: optical detection device components. This digit is: 訧 difference =, signal - error signal:: = = part ^ 信号 signal. In this case, the components of the embodiment include: - a center obtained. A seek 23; ^ and the difference between the signals of the center element are obtained, and the two external components can be obtained. The signal difference is revealed by the invention in [Close Focus Algorithm] A system for shutting down an optical disc. This control system can be used to control the signal of the system to a servo system. Item/write communication, coupling to provide control of the optical medium can be a phase material , exists on the surface of this disc. Then ^^ CD' has a readable reader, this disc can have a pre-master 14 1427779 two to divide: pre-four control = any on the optical disc [2 = = If you use a pen, write a person to include user information (such as a disc player or an example towel), or the light pre-Am such as: reflectivity, and the agreement between the writable portion of the disc In the data storage and location, the light source, reflection device, lens, and the position of the optical operation unit above the optical media can also be used in the different areas of the New Zealand silk: control = learning and uncovering unit Tracking and focusing drive assembly loops are all kinds of early movements to the second position; the side (4) seems to learn this first 撷f knife heart case Yin, these conditions are: when 15 1277079 focus error ^ signal Located at a critical point below the focus error signal (FES). The first position and the second position may be any separation position of the optical pickup unit opposite to the learning medium. In some embodiments, the first position and the first position are the end positions of the optical pickup unit toward or adjacent to the optical medium. In some embodiments, the _th position and the second position are sufficiently separated to have an in-focus position therebetween. - In some embodiments, the optical pickup unit moves to this mode in a smooth manner. In some embodiments, the present invention provides a control operation for a sinusoidal waveform in which one end of the control workload results in the optical pickup unit 3=, the position 'and the other end of the control volume. This causes the optical operation to be located at the current position. In some embodiments, the bias control 1 is related to the focus error summation to provide a multi-residue signal to a low-pass integral, and the recorded ship is amplified and tested for focus error. No. f. In the case of the material, the integral system is disabled - the delay period is instantaneously decayed. In some embodiments, the present invention provides a step-by-step delay to allow for the decay of the step-by-step transient current after the integration of the "pure" and the "before". In some embodiments, the method =7, the late ship-focus error signal (FES) takes ^ #, s :;;, 决 唬 5 唬 (FES) minus this focus error fS) 疋 No, Yahe Whether or not 妓 has a value higher than the --threshold value can be utilized in the optical pickup unit using the -G system. In some embodiments, the flat control = one end of the workload (four) the reverse end of the unit 16 of the unit 1 1277079 The hand-held focus system may include: placed in a transmission / account, & Guangfu Taking the unit, the optical capturing unit includes: a wind number measuring ί ̄ ̄ ̄ ̄ ̄ ̄ ̄ ̄ ̄ ̄ ̄ ̄ ̄ ̄ ̄ ̄ ̄ ̄ ̄ ̄ ̄ ̄ ̄ ̄ ̄ ̄ ̄ ̄ ̄ ̄ ̄ ̄ ̄ ̄ ̄ ̄ ̄ ̄ ̄ ̄ , straw to receive such optical signals and to provide amplification, - digital binary screaming for signals related to such optical signals; at least dream. t" for f, hunting to digitalize these optical signals related to such signals ίProcessor 'by receiving these digital signals and calculating this focus is at least - the processor is executing the code to extract from it, providing - focusing control workload to this optical operation, , f position, When this focus control signal is adjusted, this sum is monitored and the signal exceeds the -threshold number*, where the sum signal exceeds - ίΐϊΐ the bias control amount, and the focus error is provided. & control workload related to the sum of the signals - focus control [forming control workload] according to the invention - characteristics - the invention - the invention - the invention - the method of positioning an optical operation in the optical system . In some implementation examples, 贞 兀 兀 兀 兀 兀 兀 机械 机械 机械 机械 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 此 此 此 此 此 此 此 此 此 此 此 此 此 此 此 此 此 此 此 此 此 此 此 此 此 此 此 此The drying of the medium 4, the control of one of the optical pickup unit positions #: and controlling the rotating motor, the transmission arm, and one of the laser control systems may include: - read / write channel The surface is combined to provide a control signal to a servo system. The scholastic medium can be a relatively small-sized optical disc having a readable disc surface. Furthermore, the disc can have a pre-master knives writable portion This pre-master part is formed during the manufacture of this disc and is 1277079 ίί, such as: sound, video, text, or - content provider ^ 碟 disc can = may have optical differences, such as: reflectivity, and The optical disc, the main control part and the information between the writable parts of the optical disc ^ Ding Xuan, therefore, according to the present invention, the control system is not in the vehicle, and may have different operational parameters. The second lion can have a light source, a reflecting device, a lens, and a device that will be directed to the optical medium. These devices can be included and f ΐ Γΐ Γΐ Γΐ Γΐ Γΐ ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; · Measure i This drive is mechanically mounted on the arm of the transmission. Searching for the lateral movement of the optical media surface on the surface of the optical media I learning the upper control optical pickup unit position frame material binding paste mobile loading. The ΐί 秘 々侃 々侃 々侃 ί ί ί ί ί ί ί ί ί ί ί ί ί ί ί ί ί ί ί ί ί ί ί ί ί ί ί ί ί ί ί ί ί ί ί ί ί ί ί ί ί ί ί ί ί ί The method of feeding the towel is to place the θ component at this current position ί ί smooth control work to move the component from the current position to the one-shot position: and apply this to control the workload. In some embodiments, the feeding system can be - ritual, shoulder-shoulder, light, and the position of the item and the position of the item are along the focal position. The focus direction is orthogonal to the direction of the optical media surface. Part of the real 18 1277079 learning media surface parallel - plane S3 to this pain direction is located with this optical sine wave tmf amount of axis shape - half cycle positive Ψ end of the system is located in this current control work scene, Β里如c; The target controls the amount of call. This situation controls the workload, when i = = ίίϊ^ΐ7?, the system can minimize the total number of mechanical devices. --Ιίϊί^ 2 and the offer is sent to this pass and the answer = f#^^ba Affmt will move this element to this point. [Close Tracking Algorithm] According to another aspect of the present invention, the present invention is a closed search in the Jielin-digital tracking servo system: ut: Rotating motor, its surface is placed - control system. This control system can be used to control the money to the ship system. (4) to take / write people to transport, face s this optical media can be a fairly small size ^ - ^ exist On the surface of this disc. Furthermore, the disc can be pre-arranged, and the sub-system is included in the light. ^^ ζ 取 枓 枓 枓 耸 耸 耸 耸 耸 耸 耸 耸 耸 耸 耸 耸 耸 耸 耸 耸 耸 耸 耸 耸 耸 耸 耸 耸 耸 耸 耸 耸 耸 耸 耸 耸 耸 耸 耸 耸It can be written by this CD player, so that it can be written by the writer = 19 1277079. User notes, interactive status (in the case of video games, the disc player or other information that the user may write to the disc). - because there may be optical differences 'eg, reflectivity, and the data storage and addressing between the master portion of the optical disc and the writable portion of the optical disc, 疋, therefore, a control system according to the present invention It may also have different operating parameters in different areas of the disc. = Xue Na early yuan can be financial - light source, anti-county, lens, and will be the device of the ship. These devices may include a power feedback Detective, and a data detection device for reading from the ship. The optical capturing unit can be mechanically mounted on the transmission:

The system includes: on the optical ship surface control moving-oriented: the track transmission device, and the control wire above the wire ship _ unit position = 1⁄2 transmission device. These seek and focus transmissions of the optical capture unit are controlled by this controller. π , 々 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; Spoon cup root ίίΓ A method of closing the search in the tracking servo system

ϊ: Crossover rate' This rate of intersection is indicative of this optical 掏 = the speed of the opposite media. Subsequently, the rate of this crossover can be compared to the value of ^^^. When the orbital crossover rate is less than this critical value, a different system can be enabled to close the tracking-feeding circuit. The seek servo loop system according to the present invention may include: Generation 2, = optical side device providing an optical signal, the optical = early 兀 术 3 is on the surface of a transmission arm, and the optical 撷Take the unit's output signal: enter a processor you X Wei and this bit of the domain of the digital 20 1277079 quite for a control 彳 § * 5 tiger to a drive dream, #, u transmission arm. These processes cry, gamma, and this control signal and control this rate, the orbital crossover rate "called the second algorithm to determine - the speed of the crossover body, the recording channel, in - optical media The crossover speed is based on this critical number _, ° ° Fu = and in this rail closed a search servo loop. The work is given by this brother servo system to close, it has two external optical components and The middle system can calculate the error signal by obtaining the two external parts. The difference between the other parts of the method is also delayed at the scheduled time. Focus detection] iiif, medium 'this optical age unit includes ··

The present invention discloses a method of determining whether or not the pick-up unit is located in an optical medium, and is in an aligned position. The optical disc drive system includes: a rotary switch The surface is placed with an optical medium, and in contrast to the position of the optical warp-optical optical pickup unit, the arm is placed, and the rotary motor, the actuator arm, and the laser-control system are The system can include: - reading, writing channels, and providing control signals to a servo system.

The optical ship can be a relatively small-sized vehicle that has a readable memory and is present on the surface of the optical disc. Furthermore, the optical disc can have a pre-master control unit and a writable portion. This pre-master portion is formed at the time of manufacture of the disc and includes = readable material such as sound, video, text, or any other material that a content provider may wish to include on the disc. This writable portion is left blank and can be written by the disc player to contain user information (eg, user notes, interactive status (in the case of video games), or the disc player or user may write Enter other information on this disc). Since the optical difference may be, for example, the reflectivity, and the main control portion of the optical disc and the writable portion of the optical disc, therefore, the control system according to one of the present invention is in the light Medium 'may also have different operating parameters. Different areas of the optical pickup unit may have a light source, a reverse line, and a line detecting device for the optical medium. These 贞x2 and will be the success rate and since then. The optical pickup unit can be mechanically _ _ Ά 衣 衣 县 县 : Π Π 控制 控制 控制 控制 控制 控制 控制 控制 控制 控制 控制 控制 控制 控制 控制 控制 控制 控制 控制 控制 控制 控制 控制 控制 控制 控制 控制 控制 控制 控制 控制 控制 控制 控制 控制 控制 控制 控制 控制The circuit of this kind of miscellaneous miscellaneous operation of various servo feeding circuit sets t includes a brother's vocabulary circuit and a focus value = this method , τ τ, the present invention will be - sum signal and - critical, only in This sum signal continues to be at this critical value Τ 达 达 达 、 、 、 、 、 、 、 、 、 、 、 、 、 、 、 、 、 、 、 、 、 、 、 、 、 、 、 、 、 、 、 、 、 、 、 、 、 、 、 、 、 、 、 And the different types of I to the media (for example: writable person or pre-master) to carry out the necessary touches, according to one of the highlights of the feeding system "then, may include: - optical operation early π ' erection Positioning on the arm, and the wire drawing unit 22 1277079 is placed over an optical medium; at least - i ffi, the signal of the ship's dopant, and generating a \ t / k 唬, and a driving device , coupled with * 士 ^ ^ These at least - analogy "soft" In order to calculate the acceptance of the sum of the Sihe: Temple domain - the sum signal; determine whether this, the heart and the nickname are below a critical value; if the object says that the remainder is in the boundary to open the strip [error signal integrity Sex test

According to another aspect of the present invention, the present invention discloses a method of retrieving a complete-digital system. The CD-ROM system is packaged with a t-first pick, a control of the position of the optical pickup unit, and control of the rotary motor, the device arm of the county, and the laser system. The control system can include a read/write channel that is coupled to a common control signal to a servo system.

= The school ship can be a fairly small size disc with readable material on the surface of the disc. Furthermore, the optical disc can have a pre-master portion and a writable portion. This pre-master portion is formed at the time of manufacture of the disc and includes readable material such as sound, video, and text, any other material that the provider may wish to include on the disc. This writable part is left blank and can be used to write people with this machine to include user information (eg user notes, interactive status (in the case of video games), 'or this disc player or user) Other information that may be written to this disc). Therefore, a control system according to the present invention is here, as there may be optical differences, such as reflectance, and the data storage and addressing agreement between the pre-master portion of the optical disc and the writable portion of the optical disc. Different operating parameters may also be present in different areas of the disc. The optical pickup unit can have a light source, a reflecting device, a lens, and a 23 277 〇 79 == position to the optical media. These devices can include the data detection of the media access data: the sub-sigma can be mechanically mounted on the arm of the actuator. The surface of the optical media is controlled to move laterally. One of the top of the media controls the position of the optical pickup unit to control the controller. This is a combination of the various feeding and feeding circuits of the characteristics of the CD player. The loop and a focus of this sampling integrity test replace a = 3, wave error f# when a defect condition is detected. In some embodiments, the defect is received by the self-defective device - Defect signal. In part of the real condition, the defect condition is included in the error signal in the signal. The peak value can be integrated by the value of the value; ^匕 determines the measurement, and the integral exceeds the critical value The value indicates this: the condition detection defect, if the measurement between the two Qing is in the partial real _, the two cycles can be the low-pass it wave error money-based fine-money filter device to add the error signal. Money can be miscellaneous The signal is guided. In part of the implementation of the financial, the scale is recorded as a pure person into a signal, the first signal is summed with a bias signal to obtain a signal, and the second signal is amplified to obtain the error signal. In the Ministry: In the 'this "Wu 仏 系 is a brother track error signal. Subsequently, the control of this optical master can continue to sample this complete (four) m output of this optical capture unit includes: one or more detection The device, wherein 24 ! 277 〇 79 micro-position respectively comprises: - a central component and two elevation components. 'The self-sufficient sum of the signals from the external components and the difference between the acquisitions is obtained. A search error signal In the example, the number can be obtained by:::=ΐ. In the implementation of the ship, the implementation of the case towel, the film is controlled by the touch--the sum signal is #光1^在^分实_巾, this sum The letter can be called 」, ίΐ2, the sum of the optical signals. - Defects indicate the time at which a high pass 2^^^ exceeds the critical value. In some embodiments, when the = field is continuously sampled and becomes too fast, so that it is impossible to physically read ====fine 総-critical value, the present invention is based on the date of the present day. m — optical pickup unit; at least together with the optical operation unit receiving the digital optical signal, here is a control signal; and a driving skirt, turning to control according to this control 宗 'Zong it empty! The location of this optical pick-up unit. The at least one processor is configured to replace the ΐί 二ΐ to generate an error signal, a detection-defect exists, and a low-wave version such as a lining number, when _ to this [reverse nonlinear compensation] and right According to another feature of the invention, the invention discloses a ship system in which the two forces are linearly compensated for the optical disk drive #. The CD player system includes: · a heart ^ its surface system - optical ship, contrary to the optical media I:, the rotating motor, the transmission arm, and this: the injection and control system can Including a · read / write channel, lightly combined to improve the production system "遽 to a servo system. Material,; body can be a relatively small size of the disc, which has a readable ... exists on this disc Further, the optical disc may have a pre-master control unit 25 1277079 H, including any other information on the disc. This writable person 'recognizes the maker information (for example, in the case of a disc player or an example) Or this light = also = will; in the different areas of the handle

i The ship reads (4)^,:!= and on this optical medium 4:==; the various feeding and focusing transmissions of the optical tucking unit are prepared.

1!^ =::===3⁄4 26 1277079 This search error signal, or the focus of the focus in the focus to include: - county capture unit; - number, and mention ^ ^ to t from 1 ^ Learn to extract the unit (4) The information of the measuring device and the Yuelu production taste and the drive I set, I horse combined with the root two shift = two error signals, provide

One of the outputs is hunted to make the control signal substantially linear to an error signal A (second-order ΐΓ ΐΓ , , and * this output signal is calculated). The invention is another feature of the invention, which is characterized in that the second-stage compensation system includes a rotating motor, the surface of which is a light-emitting unit, and the arm of the transmission device is controlled. This n and the control of the rotating motor, including a green and the aircraft control system. This control system can be used overnight to provide control signals to the servo system. Oblique, the media can be a relatively small size disc with readability

= the surface of this disc. Moreover, the optical disc may have a pre-master portion. The listening main control portion is formed at the time of manufacture of the optical disc, and may be, for example, a sound, a video, a text, or a content provider wishing to be included in Other information on this silk. The writable person is partially protected and can be written by the disc player to include user information (such as user notes, interactive status (in the case of video games), or the disc player or user may write Enter other information on this disc). Therefore, according to one of the present invention, the control system is here because there may be optical differences, such as: reflectivity, and the data storage and addressing agreement between the pre-master portion of the optical disc and the writable portion of the optical disc. Different areas of the disc 27 1277079 _ may also have different operating parameters. The optical capture unit can have a light source, a counter, a lens, and a detection device that directs light to the optical medium. The turning side device may include a laser power return, a detecting device, and a data detecting device for reading data from the optical medium. The optical capturing unit can be mechanically mounted on the arm of the transmission. ^The transmission arm system includes: in this optical media surface control, one of the movements of the tracking drive, and the position of the wire on the wire, and the position of the element. These miscellaneous and focus transmissions of this wire picking unit are hunted for this control | § control. The servo system includes various servo circuits for controlling the operation of the optical disk drive. For example, the rotary motor, the optical pickup unit, and the control device are crying. For example, such ship loops may include: a combination of a seek channel and a servo loop. According to the present invention, a method of controlling the position of an optical pickup unit includes calculating an error signal from an optical signal received from the optical pickup unit, and shifting and amplifying the error money. Furthermore, the scale error money is chopped, and the - control is performed - the calculation is performed in this (four) wave record. This is the case of the Tiger. These devices include: at least one second-order inspection device. The wave device may include, for example, a low frequency integrating device, a phase leading g wave device, a notch filter t setting, and a sampling integrity filtering device. In addition, other types of filtering devices can also be applied. A servo system according to the present invention comprises: an optical pickup unit; a device for receiving signals from the detecting device in the optical tucking unit, and providing digital health; at least processing || _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ The at least one processor line is an algorithm for calculating the error signal, the offset ί, the difference 仏 to form an offset signal, and amplifying the error signal to form an amplified signal, filtering and amplifying the signal Correlating one of the pre-filtered signals to form a filter 28 1277079 "ί 吕号, whereby the filtered signal calculates a set of bits that adjust the optical touch unit;], and according to the control signal, using at least one second-order filtering device The filtering device includes: [Searching for Sliding Detection] " System, levy 'this day's day · Exposure - kind of tracking servo system: transmitting pure arm, and one of the laser control system signals i-servo- Read/write channel, consumable to provide control pre-in this tree touch = may wish to include the i on the new disc, which word ^ this internal capacity, the donor f blank and can be married to this light mixed λ:, borrowed ' The disc player or user may write other information about this disc). ) Fly this nine because it can have optical differences, for example: the reflectivity is also reflected in the different areas of the disc. Such detection devices may include Rayleigh. The data detection and light extraction unit can be mechanically mounted on the arm of the wire. The search for the arm is included in the optical media. One of the surface control lateral movements, and one of the optical pickups, controls one of the optical pick-up unit positions 29 1277079. These seek and convergence drives of the optical capture unit are controlled by the controller. ..., the servo system includes: various servos that control the operation of the features of the optical disk. For example, the rotary motor, the optical pickup unit, and the control cry. For example, the servo loops may include a combination of a tracking servo loop and a servo loop. According to the present invention, the method of '------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ If the ship's money is this critical value ^ = over - the most common miscellaneous touch, the Ma Fa _ indication - the tracking value can be set to a sufficiently high value, borrowing this brigade t-sliding t-open the search loop. In some embodiments, this critical number can be set to a lower value and is in the -tracking slip = empowerment - anti-slip algorithm. The anti-slip algorithm can cause the stalking scaly error signal to be opposite to the control signal (ie, the optical can utilize a stable slope. In some embodiments, according to the wave system) to perform with a first-order low-pass filtering device The "tracking servo system" of the present invention may then include: a processor that is lightly coupled to receive a "digital signal from the optical pickup unit of the optical pickup unit; less than one crying. This at least one The processor is performing a scene...% flat and 伹 digital signals are used to calculate a tracking W motion detection method, so that the value is used, the _low lag device is used for the gift, and the wave is searched for , the filtered signal and the - heart =, '曰 count exceeds - the maximum value; = number: ^ H to - count, and here six plus eight An two brother track slip condition. β knife shell, this tracking slip The detection algorithm can indicate - the 30th 1277079 movement, the anti-slip algorithm; and - the second tracking system; the non-lure reward condition. The eve-if i invention is another feature - the invention is revealed - Kind of in-disc machine. The system has a front town control loop. The optical disc system is a two-dimensional 'the surface is placed — the optical medium, and the optical unit is opposite to the optical unit, and one of the optical pickup unit positions is controlled. (4) The rotary motor, the transmission arm, and the 1^ 匕The system can include: a read/write channel 'face-to-edge VII, control 唬 to a servo system. = The learning medium can be a relatively small size disc, which has a readable memory. The disc surface. Furthermore, the disc can have - pre-master 3;: ί 死! Γ. This pre-master part is shaped like this on the disc, such as: sound, video, text, or - content provider For example, the user is smashed to include user information (such as the Hiji machine Hii% (in the case of the video game), or the other information that the light lychee or the user may write to the disc). Can have a silk difference, such as the anti-group, and this disc is determined to be divided into the ft-disc of this rewritable part of the material storage and address P will also be in the different areas of the car

L Μ 于 于 于 钻 钻 钻 钻 钻 钻 钻 钻 钻 钻 钻 钻 钻 钻 钻 钻 钻 钻 钻 钻 钻 钻 钻 钻 钻 钻 钻 钻 钻 钻 钻 钻 钻 钻 钻 · · · · · · · · · · · Position - the focal drive. The tracking and focus transmission H 31 J277079 of the optical class is controlled by the controller. This is a new system including the special features of this machine. This optical pickup unit: and this controller. The servo=== loop can include: - tracking servo loop and a focus of the week ==== control a control signal, and detect this control signal in the middle of the field, such as μ listed above, hunted in anticipation of these cycles . The earthworms cycle changes, and then, from this control back == this t control Xinxian (four) along the - general direction, in this case, this control signal is controlled along the "focus U * Bei Zhicheng one:: Zhou; The variable ir is mixed by this control? Lu. ^ = tiger / compound this control signal and c 〇 s (wt) to form a cosine signal square complex sinusoidal signal to form - accumulate sinusoidal signal; accumulate sine ^ to open π spear, ΐ The signal is formed to form a cumulative cosine signal; the integral is accumulated, the number of cycles is two =: the rotation of the frequency body ": the second number reaches a predetermined number of cycles, by which m is constructed or the cumulative cosine signal is used. The feeding system can include: • a signal, and a digital (four) self, sub#| taking the signal of the detection device in the early detection, the processing is crying, coupled to receive the digits according to the control letter i: The device 'turns to the optical operation unit to receive the = 乂 十 十 十 十 控制 控制 控制 控制 控制 控制 控制 控制 控制 控制 控制 控制 控制 控制 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 The control signal 'borrows' "忒 [multiple track search] ϊίϊί another feature, The invention discloses a track-feeding season and a control-spinning ride, a shifting arm, and a dress system. The control system may include: a read/H system signal to the m system. (4) fetch/write It is known that the combination of the two media can be - equivalent, size: and = ί disc surface. Moreover, the disc can have - pre-, the i-control part is formed during the manufacture of the disc and includes τ, Take the shell; μ, block the sound, video, text, or — any other material contained on this disc. (4) If the eclipse is, (4) the disc, write 'to include user information (example, monument Machine cutting, interactive state (in the case of video games), or other information on the disc stack or the user may write to the disc. (4) ^ may have optical differences, such as · reflectivity, and Data storage and addressing between the control portion of the optical disc and the writable portion of the optical disc: Thus, in accordance with one aspect of the present invention, the control system may have different operational parameters in different areas of the optical disc. The optical capturing unit can have a light source and a reverse The detecting device, the lens, and the detecting device that will guide the optical medium. The detecting device may include: a lightning-rate feedback detecting device, and a data detecting device for reading data from the optical medium. The optical pickup unit may be mechanically mounted on the arm of the transmission device. #动衣置系 includes: controlling the lateral movement of the optical track on the optical media surface, and controlling the optical capture above the optical medium Unit position 33 1277079 Focusing and arranging. This arrangement of the optical axis taking unit is controlled by the controller. Sub-track and ♦,,,, and transmission clothing The feeding system includes: controlling the characteristics of the optical disc drive Combination of servo circuits. Included - Wei Wei and a focus According to the present invention, a multi-track search method overcomes the zero crossing in the track-rank difference signal and counts the zero-crossing by the form = 』 A speed, calculate the parameter of the parameter, so that the speed ^ followed & test, the position of the wire capture unit above the media. In the section #实&example, the steam setting groove (pn) flle) is calculated to start the light i = early from the start position, and the optical pickup unit is stopped at the head position 1 =. In the lion's example, this speed is set to an acceleration period, an i-line period, and a deceleration period. The heart is included in the reference speed and the difference between the speeds of the signal is full. It includes: summing up the difference signal and the control signal generated in the feedback loop. When the count exceeds a target count, a search completion indication is set. In some embodiments, 2 search = sax is not set when the count exceeds the target count and when the seek error VIII has an appropriate slope. Port-type servo system may include: - an optical pickup unit; extension ', ^ two 彳 ^ ^ receiving the 3 ^ for the detection device from the optical lion unit; at least one processor, lightly combined Receiving these digits = 'This processing benefit calculates a control signal; and a driving device that engages the person with ====(4). The "execution, t method" of the i theory is to calculate a tracking error signal 34 1277079 from the digital signal, and the zero point in the seek error signal crosses a to form a count; Counting the number of calculations, one of the time positions; thus the time period is calculated as zero, and the difference signal between the speeds; and the reference speed can be adjusted to follow the reference speed. This speed (multiple obscurity search with enhanced servo function), another feature of the work, the invention is disclosed in the "in the - disc player - multi-track search ^ control service department 5 seek time" - Tracking justice - the gain system is used to more actively turn off the tracking. Weeks - months, the identification of this f-disc machine includes: - rotating motor, its surface is placed - the separation system. This control system can Including: a word / fetch / write overnight, coupled to provide a control signal to a servo system., oblique, ΐ 学 learning media can be a relatively small size of the disc, which has a readable j, exists on the surface of the disc Furthermore, this disc can have one, Qiu. This pre- The main control part is in the form of CD-ROM manufacturing, including readable data, such as · · sound, rhyme * labor white and can _ this (four) machine writer, _ contains user information 'example, 2 user notes, interaction Status (in the video_example): The disc player or other information that the user may write to the disc.) - Pre-trace trt will have optical differences, such as: reflectivity, and the disc and the disc. The data storage and addressing between the writable parts = 疋 'so the 'control system according to the invention' in this disc' may also have different operational parameters. ^ This optical pickup unit may have a light source, reflection Devices, lenses, and devices that drop 35 χ 277 〇 79. These detection devices may include: thunder, set; and read optical data from the optical media.取 取 取 取 取 取 取 取 取 取 取 取 取 取 取 取 取 取 取 取 取 取 取 取 取 取 取 取 取 取 取 取 取 取 取 取 取 取 取 取 取 取 取 取 取 取 取 取 取 取 取 取Rotating motor, this optical picking unit And the controller. The servo circuit group 1 channel can include: a search for a service word loop and a focus on the - ί recording search _ fine _: detecting a calculation speed, calculating the reference speed and the shirt; Speed ΐΐ signal, so that this speed can follow the position of this parameter == 巧 optical operation unit. In part of the real = 22 t early = self-start position, and stop the optical capture unit in a target position ' During the search period, 'adjust this search--the ship's secret shots include: - the light paste unit; ^ lighter than the processing benefit to receive the light from the optical capture unit, for the digital signal 'at least one processor' light In order to receive these digits, the processor calculates a control signal; and a driver device, = enters to control the position of the unit according to the control number. The control unit 36 1277079 5 'execute - Multiple Orbital Search Algorithm, and in the period of full-gain-up to a predetermined number of cycles, by [multiple obscurity search with acceleration clamps] sweet features 'this invention is disclosed with a - acceleration clip ί 亓 = Drop out of the media, on the contrary The optical position of the operating unit of the strip - the transmission arm to: control Control "and a packet transmission ί ^ 1 = frr Ray system. This to a servo system. Beacon/injection, coupled to provide control signals = The learning medium can be a relatively small size disc with readable resources and this surface. Furthermore, the optical disc can have a pre-master control unit L readable = = = empty =, included on the disc:: two == ^ ^ ^ such as ^ make (four) the disc ^ write 'by borrowing user information ( In the case of an example of a disc drive or a user, or according to the invention, the control system may have different operating parameters in different areas of the disc. The drop-out unit can have two light sources, a reflecting device, a lens, and a device for directing light to the wire medium. The side devices may include and = devices, and data detected from the optical media. i is pre-fetched. The device may be mechanically mounted on the transmission device. The arm device includes: optical media. The surface controls the lateral movement - the Cogwheel transmission, and one of the focusing actuators at the position of the optical age unit 37 1277079 above the line. This optical capture unit is controlled by this (four) control. b “Executive and #焦传动装” This servo system includes: control the CD player circuit, for example: this rotating motor, this well: the various servos of the object can include: a search feeding circuit and a focus ~ root According to the invention, the multi-executive search method includes: detecting the number of crossovers at the zero crossing of the shot, counting the number of zero crossings to form, and thereby counting the count-reference speed, determining the zero-point-time-week ten Time calculation - speed, calculate this reference speed and the speed between

* Speed, and the application of this control signal to a dating, the recording m touches the position of the wire picking unit above the wire. In the partial complement, 'this reference speed avoids the speed setting y 〇 〇 ie ie , , , , , , , ’ ’ ’ 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 In some embodiments, the speed setting (pmfile) includes: an acceleration period, a coasting period, and a deceleration period.

In some embodiments, the reference signal and the difference signal between the speeds are corrupted by the control number, which includes summing the difference signal with a plurality of previously generated control signals in a feedback loop. When the count exceeds a target count, the present invention can set a search completion indication. A servo system according to the present invention may comprise: an optical pickup unit; an analog processor coupled to receive an "ia number from the detection device of the optical pickup unit; and k for a digit § §; at least a processor that receives the digital signals, the processor calculates a control signal, and a driving device coupled to control the position of the optical pickup unit based on the control signal. These processors execute an algorithm by which a tracking error signal is calculated from the equal-digit signals, and the zero crossing in the tracking error signal is detected, and the number of counting zero crossings is 38 1277079. From this, the counting calculation—reference speed, determining the time period between consecutive and six times, calculating a speed from this time period, calculating this = 2? ”, - control signal: borrow: make ί. The CD player system includes a = bit _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ First, the media can pick up a relatively small size disc with a readable surface. Furthermore, the disc can have i first = separable = system ί ΓΓ ί 且 且 且 且 且 且 且 且 且 且 任何 任何 任何 任何 任何 任何 任何 任何 任何 任何 任何 任何 任何 任何 任何 任何 任何 任何 任何 任何 任何 任何 任何 任何 任何 任何 任何 任何 任何 任何 ; ; ; ; ; Or this light pre-tz? will have optical differences' such as: reflectivity, and the data storage and address of this co-authored part of this CD-like itnii disc, also not in the different areas of the butterfly ^ The optical capturing unit can have a light source, a reflecting device, a lens, and a detecting device of the work medium. These devices may include: lightning. The data of the readable and readable data is detected. The arm of the transmission device is equipped with the second arm =:= moved over the manual arm. 39 1277079 The upper part of the body controls the position of the optical pickup unit. Waiting for the tracking and focusing drive to force the road. This is a combination of various servo servo circuits for the characteristic operation of the machine. 1_ service loop and a focusing system ϊ ϊ 侦测 在一 在一 在一 在一 在一 在一 在一 在一 在一 在一 在一 在一 在一 在一 在一 在一 在一 在一 在一 在一 在一 在一 在一 在一 在一 在一 在一 在一 在一 在一 在一 在一 在一 在一 在一 在一 在一 在一 在一 在一 在一 在一 在一 在一 在一 在一 在一Cross the signal to change state. In the period of time, ί ΐ ΐ ΐ ΐ , , , , , , , , , , 二 二 二 二 二 二 二 二 二 二 二 二 二 二 二 二 二 二 二 二 二 二 二 二 二 二 二 二 二= bit finder 4 method, ^ track error signal in the first point of a brother's decision signal; detect here to find the number; thus the count calculation speed is ^ cycle; thus the time period calculation - speed account ·, ^ί , ^ ^ Father one time this reference speed w and application to make this speed can follow the whole; ί学, above the position of the optical unit ί 裳 '' coupling to adjust the processing ί, since 1 = · · _ take the section; - analogy and provide digital signal connection; the signal of the detection device, the processor is calculated - (4) = TO, 5 to give birth to this bit signal, the control signal 'by control' ^ 此 ΐ撷 this ^ 277079 When the error signal zero crossings, the point crossing signal, by which 3 crossover, and providing a zero [with track zero crossing (4) ^ - feature 'this feature (four) exposes - in the CD player, this has a track zero Crossover cycle integrity test. Body =: Learning Pack 4: # and this one of each shot control system. This / write channel, Saki 1

Material: (4) can read the capital and one can enter ίκ t and then 'this disc can have a pre-master control machine 其 其 it = up; ϊ wltT' (^ΐί^Λ^ industry or user may Write other information about this disc). Due to possible optical differences, for example: '

Ξί Mainly can be written into the Ministry of Finance. It is also purely in different areas of this vehicle. Light Jd: Reflector, lens, and will, 4, ^ Detective / shell. The temple side device may include a lightning device; η; an optical media read data data detector ‘ 41 1277079 one of the focus transmissions. This optical pickup unit is controlled by this controller. Temple track and focus drive, this servo system includes ································································· Bao Wei: two; early, and this controller. A combination of servo loops. Corridor servo loop and a focus according to the present invention, a decision to change

,: The method of determining the integrity in the -period is the second orbital crossing period in the second period; the decision is made in the second-cycle. The first-yuan two error I - the first time; determine this search for the second 执 执 block block signal zero crossing and set this position to divide the actual 丄 this second cycle is the first touch below. In the case of the knives, 'when this second tracking period is divided into two, the period is twice the range of the first-existing crossing period, and the fb points are applied every C period; ^ is different from this second Track crossing cycle. In the department, the integrity of the system determines this integrity. For example, in the second part:1, although the second search period is located in the quarter--this time ΖίΓΓ outside the range of the first track crossing period, the first execution 3 cycle system is substantially different This second ruling is overtime. A multi-channel search method of the present invention may include: calculating a seek error signal from a digital optical signal from an Et unit; counting zero: the number of fish ^ to form a count; Reference speed; determine the time-to-time between points; the time period determines the integrity; the deduction, l'f period ▲ calculation - speed; calculate the reference speed and the speed-difference signal between the speeds; The control signal is such that the speed can follow the reference speed and the control signal is applied to a transmission coupled to adjust the position of the light object take it above a light 42 1277079. Compared with the system system, including: - optical Na unit; - class number, and provide a number of ^ Lu. / 丨 from the light review unit to detect the signal in the unit, this processor is combined to receive these digits According to this control signal, ^=$#|==set=row; ir, set at - the first indication - integrity shot - the second ruling crossover, and the second track "'right right brother" This crossover period is generally different from this [bias-feedforward] system, and the feature 'Benfa County exposes a kind of digital servo system^ which is opposite to the optical medium-optical single rotation; Move = set arm 'and control this system can include, 13 Ray one control system. This control feeding system. (4) take / write people, combined to provide control signals to - smart media can be a fairly small size: And Si; disc surface. Moreover, the disc can have - ί first = 舄 1 ^. This pre-master part is formed in this system and the H item is taken from a poor material such as: sound, video, text, or - Content Provider = Any other information on this CD. This can be written to the part of the Guardian Xiang CD. User information (such as the use of the user, the interactive state (in the case of video games), or other information that the CD player or user may write to the CD). 〆 Because there may be optical differences, for example ················································································ It has different operating parameters. Light; light source, reflecting device, lens, and power-receiving device. These devices can include: lightning. This optical capture can be used to read data from optical media. It is said that the arm of the transmission arm is mechanically mounted on the arm of the training. Searching, value ^ This optical media surface (4) is laterally moved. This #二二疋甲琛体讃取: Ϊ́ΐ ίΐ ^ Γ is the machine view green one of the drive ΐ ΐ ΐ ΐ ΐ ΐ ΐ 控制 控制 控制 控制 控制 控制 控制 控制 控制 控制 控制 控制 控制 控制 控制 控制 控制 控制 控制 控制 控制 控制 控制 控制 控制 控制 控制 控制 控制 控制 控制 控制 控制 控制 控制 控制 控制··Control the characteristics of each operation of this CD player In the case of two types of feeding clothes, the rotating motor, the optical capturing unit, and the controller are included. For example, the feeding circuit can include a tracking feeding circuit and a gathering. A combination of servo loops. The bias feedforward control system according to the present invention receives a control signal from a digital feeding system, detects a low frequency component of the control signal, and applies a signal associated with the low frequency component to The future control signal, by which the adjustment control signal is formed, enables the low frequency component to be removed from the future control signal. In some embodiments, the low pass filter, wave device, for example, may be a second order filter device, It has a cutoff frequency of about 200 Hz. In some embodiments, the filtered control signal from the low pass filtering device is further filtered in a second order low pass filtering device during a multiple track seek operation. In some embodiments, the second order low pass filtering device can have a cutoff frequency of about 20 Hz. In some embodiments, the bias feed forward applies a signal associated with the low frequency component by applying a bias value. The bias value can be incremented or decremented by a set value based on the low frequency component, for example, 1. In some embodiments, this bias value is allowed to vary slowly, for example, every 2 ms. A slow response in this bias feed forward can result in greater stability in this servo system. A servo system according to the present invention comprises: an optical pickup unit; a type of 44 1277079, and provides a digital j to the optical pickup unit from the middle age, the control signal, and a drive The device, lightly coupled with the root system to perform an algorithm 'day! ^ from; take the position of the car. The processors are connected to the control signal, and the signal control signal associated with the low frequency component is removed from the I'm into a money, so that the low frequency component can be gathered from the [single track). Dew-species in the CD-ROM machine system includes: - 'It has a single beating. The optical disc is an optical medium, which is -iii, and an optical medium is placed on the surface thereof. On the contrary, the movement is used to extract the early position, control the position of the optical pickup unit, and transmit and control the rotation. Motor, this transmission arm, and this thunder & The control system can include: f-transfer to provide control signals to the servo system. Into the transport ^ Learning media can be a relatively small size of the disc, which has a readable light county. Furthermore, the optical disc may have a pre-master control unit. The county's main control section is formed at the time of manufacture and is poor, such as: sound, video, text, or - content provider. Any other material contained on this disc. This writable part is guaranteed and can be written by this CD player, including user information ' (eg user notes, interactive status (in the case of video games), disc player or user may write Other information on this disc). The box may have an optical difference 'for example: reflectivity, and data storage and addressing between the T-presence portion of the optical disc and the writable portion of the optical disc, therefore, according to one of the present invention The control system may also have different operating parameters in different areas of the disc. The optical capturing unit can have a light source, a reflecting device, a lens, and a 45 1277079 radiated power feedback detection = 贞: then the garment is placed. These measuring devices may include: a lightning strike. The optical protection device and the optical media read data are detected by the transmission device; the arm d is mechanically mounted on the transmission arm. The system of arranging and focusing the drive of the optical pickup unit; ^ brother · this side of the motor, this optical capture === his material metaphor: - paste riding road = Jiao Kuo. if In'-execution-single-executive scale operation method is to apply the service system H signal is constant, will force a force ^ : ^ 2 total to 2 Jing control signal to - first - time display, delay IS : speed (four) The signal is summed up to the turn control signal ^ off signal, and then 'released to be on this new way =, this second time week _ can be via - tracking error ^ number = 丨 hunting to point: - optical capture The unit 'its position is controlled according to this ^ pro-Her? Tiger, the parent has a one-half track. ΐ ΐ ΐ 此 此 此 此 此 此 此 此 此 加速 加速 加速 加速 加速 加速 加速 加速 加速 加速 加速 加速 加速 加速 加速 加速 加速 加速 加速 加速 加速 加速 加速 加速 加速 加速 加速 加速 加速 加速 加速 加速 加速 加速 加速 加速 加速 加速 加速 加速 加速 加速 加速 加速 加速The one-two focus control signal is maintained in a sample and hold circuit during the operation of the low-pass filter, the wave device, the filter, the wave, and the single-track runout. In the sub-embodiment, one of the phases in this tracking servo system is processed during this early-obscured-beat algorithm. Immediately thereafter, the system is initialized to this appropriate state, so as to improve the search in the search for === state 46 1277079. This focus control workload can be before the single-execution-output signal is secreted. From the low-pass filter device? The Ming-Bai system includes: - an optical operation unit, which receives a letter 2 from the optical pickup unit (4) measuring device, 2 _ bit 4 苎, at least one processor, lightly coupled to receive the digital signal In the 'Ϊ system 算 calculation - control signal; and - drive device, lightly combined with ^ ί (4) this light depends on ^ (four). These processors iCZ' are faulty to maintain control from one of the tracking servo systems. The control is on the optical media surface - the -i is ίί, the - acceleration control signal is added. At this point, the control letter closes the tracking on the secret of the first [unformatted reading] flat track. Face-, the invention is disclosed - the kind of - in the disc player table, the first t table is dedicated to one of the silk media 3, the butterfly-like control system ί言号 to a feeding system. Write all-night, get together to donate, save small: the dish 'there is a readable 丄 = points: into and.,." escrow this singer I! 撷 撷 撷 之一 之一 传动 传动 传动 传动 传动 : : : : : : : : : ?; and this lightning signal to a servo system. Drink/write overnight, coupled to provide control may wish to be included on the disc, or - content provider left blank and can be written using this disc === 1277079 For example, user notes, interactive status (in the case of video games, the disc player or other information that the user may write to this disc). — As there may be optical differences' such as: anti-drunk, and this disc The data storage and address of the rewritable portion of the optical disc of the present invention may also have different operational parameters in different regions of the optical disc. The optical capturing unit can have a light source, a reflecting device, a transparent clock, and a device for guiding the optical medium to the spleen line. The #_ device can be used to read the data from the optical medium. The first son can be mechanically erected in ϋΐί Residual: The kingboard watch secret controls the position of the wire grabbing unit above the optical medium; the finder and focus of the optical capturing unit _ loop i/fi, including: controlling the optical disk drive Various servo cases of characteristic operation sink the rotating motor, the optical capturing unit, and the guard. The detection is performed by a low-pass chopping-tracking control signal, and the non-upper-direct current (DC) level, And the indication is; the big order = direct current (DC) level is located at the ship's level. 屮 = According to one of the inventions, the servo system includes ··, the system is used to control the position of the unit. This: the controller level is on the tracking control signal, detected in a summer/guest (dc) level, and indicates this unformatted condition, 48 1277079 = DC (DC) system is located at this threshold The uppermost number is the maximum number of cycles. [Anti-slip algorithm] 4 According to another feature of the present invention, the present invention discloses an anti-slip algorithm in a tracking servo system.

Hi single i table id. Learning from the media, on the other hand, one of the optical media relies on the location of the unit to transmit the arm to the signal to the mine system.舄人岐, combined to provide control, H small size of silk, its shot can be read capital again 'this disc can have - pre-master control part is formed in the manufacture For example, sound, video, text, any other material that you want to include on this disc. This can be written in the Department of Human Eight] :==== Machine ^ 'By including the user i message (such as a disc player or user; can be written in this example), or this light can also be light It has a wire, a reflecting device, a lens, and a device that will be used for this. Turn + and read from the wire: All of this is mechanically erected on the arm of the drive. - ϊ ί ί ί ί ί ί ί ί ί 控制 控制 控制 控制 ί ί ί ί ί ί ί ί ί 控制 控制 控制 控制 控制 控制 控制 控制 控制 控制 控制 控制 控制 控制 控制 控制 控制 控制 控制 控制 控制 控制Various servos of the loop & For example, these servo loops H #, unit, and this controller. A combination of servo loops. The 匕栝·一哥 rail servo loop and a focus system in the algorithm f are allowed to avoid this slip. In part of the actual ^ _ _ closed, by the direction signal, which indicates that a light-reverse sliding algorithm is receiving-direction. This appropriate slope, then, can be 2:^:5. The media of the media. In the example, this anti-slip algorithm is here to find a part of the actual. In the partial implementation of the shot, the workload of this tracking control work is constant. Private work read this search control process according to f system includes: - optical _ unit; - analogy and provide a digital record; at least 撷 270 towel device signal, = signal, optical tender, ϋ allow a search The servo system algorithm is turned off during the period when the -sense is found - the appropriate slope. In = i r and this laser - control (four) system. This control (10) can be packaged only/written overnight, coupled to provide control signals to a servo system. 50 1277079 with: = pre-sound control = any other data on this disc. This writable part of the warranty is as follows: the drive writes 'by including user information (such as a disc player or other example of the user may write to the disc), or because of the possibility of optical discs The write-to-part ratio == medium, the optical pickup unit may have a light source, a reflection device, a βϊΞίί, a body device in different regions of the handle. Such detection devices may include: Ray This transmission ΐΐ ϊΙ ϊΙ Γ 是 is placed on the rehearsal arm. In the optical media surface control of the lateral movement of one of the optical media above the control of the optical pickup unit position of the department of the department, the operation of the transmission circuit, for example, these ships can return Including a combination of the right feeding circuit. Included in a brother's feeding circuit and a kind of focus = _ one of the optical media in the detection of a defect in the total clear - high-pass filter m skin this ship's total letter i is more than one ^ 3 3: defects, if this戦之7^学撷 撷 数 侦测 侦测 侦测 侦测 侦测 侦测 侦测 侦测 侦测 51 51 51 51 51 51 51 51 51 51 51 51 51 51 51 51 51 51 51 51 51 51 51 51 51 51 51 51 51 51 51 51 51 51 51 , f, the obvious difference between the changes is: - optical extraction unit '· - class number, and provide ί bit; ^ receive ^ from the optical access unit Yin side device signal 'this processor is calculated ° 俨 俨 理 及 及 及 及 及 及 及 及 及 及 及 及 及 及 及 及 ί ί ί ί ί ί ί ί ί ί ί ί ί ί ί ί ί ί ί ί ί ί ί ί ί ί ί ί ί ί ί ί ί ί Qualcomm tear wave ίί il, by which to generate - chop sum signal, and indication: - 夬 right this filter sum signal system exceeds a critical value. [direction sensing device] 寻 ί ί ί ί — 特征 特征 特征 特征 特征 ί ί ί ί ί ί ί One of the optical disc drives, one of the hands, f is in the direction of the sensing. The disc drive system is the package body - the second table ^ placing an optical medium , ^ Contrary thereto the optical medium 70 be thoroughly captured early, controlling the position of this yarn extraction unit - this transmission device and control the rotation of the motor, the transfer arm training set, and this one laser

The Si control system can include: - read/write human channel, for example, for control "to a servo system. 3 learning ship can be - phase # small size optical disc, which has a readable memory, exists here The disc surface. Furthermore, the disc may have a pre-master: a strict T write portion. This pre-master portion is formed during the manufacture of the disc and reads data; such as: sound, video, text, Or a content provider ^ wants to include any other material on the silk. This writable part is marginal and can be used to write the user information (eg, user notes, interactive status ( In the case of video games), or other information that the CD player or user may write to the CD.) ' 52 1277079 Pre-adhesive, for example: reflectivity, and this order of the disc may also have a different month. Secret light in different areas of the disc; light source, reflector, lens, and #media detection 褽 f. These detection devices can be packaged: · set. This set ^ from this silk ship to read the data detection Measure Yuanzhi's such tracking and focusing transmission and installation of various kinds of -45,,. + _ pay 0 against this special learning to take early, and this control to cry. 嗔 嗔: -__ road and two-focus optical optical cap The ray-collecting unit is less than one in the morning - the optical signal of the detecting device; from at least one gamma. 12, the optical signals form a directional sum signal; from the first - "Li i ί 1" The optical signal of the side component forms a signal; the second high-pass wave device filters 2 to scream b tiger's hunting to form a new search error signal; the indication - the third button if the wave sum signal and the filter, wave The search signal is an opposite sign; the direction, if the filter sum signal and the filter seek error signal are in the embodiment, the optical capture unit comprises: at least one detection device, having a first side component and a second side component. The one-direction sum signal system 53 1277079 Γ Γ is calculated by summing the optical money from the first side element and the optical signal from the second side element. If the optical pickup unit is ’ 则, then the direction summation money can be calculated by summing the optical signals from the first side element and the second age piece. This f(4) letter ship can be calculated by the difference between the optical elements from the first element and the second element. In the case of -, when the defect is detected, the sum signal in this direction and the signal signal of the brother are maintained as constants. Additionally, in some embodiments, the direction of indication is reversed above the particular ship's surface of the optical ship surface (i.e., the first direction is switched using this second direction).

A servo system according to the present invention comprises: an optical capturing unit; an analog processor coupled to receive a signal from the detecting device of the optical capturing unit, and a health symbol; at least - a surface, The receiving of the digits 4 iIf processor calculates a control signal; and a driving device coupled to control the position of the optical capturing unit according to the control signal. The at least one system performs a different method to indicate that the optical capturing unit laterally spans one of the moving directions of a light sheep medium. [write abandonment]

According to another feature of the present invention, the present invention is capable of generating an input 2 signal in a - and a poly-machine, and discarding a write operation of the optical disc. The optical disc drive system includes: a rotary motor having an optical medium on its surface, an optical pickup unit opposite to the optical medium, a position of the optical pickup unit, a transfer arm, and a control of the rotary motor. Second, the transmission, the arm, and one of the laser control systems. The control system can include a .5 gastric access/write channel' coupling to provide control signals to a servo system. The optical medium can be a relatively small size optical disc having readable memory on the surface of the optical disc. Furthermore, the optical disc can have a pre-master y knife and a writable portion. This pre-master portion is formed at the time of manufacture of the disc and 54 1277079 includes readable material such as: sound, video, text, or content = any other material desired to be included on the disc. This writable companion can use this CD player to write people, including user information such as user notes, interactive status (in the case of video games), disc players or other information that users may write to this disc. As a result of the possible optical differences, such as the reflectivity, and the data storage and addressing between the $main control portion and the writable portion of the optical disc, 疋 'Therefore, the control (four) system according to the present invention In this case, it may also have different operating parameters. a The optical capturing unit may have a light source, a reflecting device, and a detecting device for guiding the optical medium to the optical medium. The detecting device may include laser power back. , detecting, setting, and data detecting device for reading data from the optical medium. The optical capturing unit may be mechanically mounted on the transmission device: the transmission arm system includes: the optical media table _ The birch is moved to one of the transmission devices, and the focus transmission device is positioned above the optical ship. The search unit of the optical pickup unit is controlled by the controller. The inch of the emblem...the clothing of the clothing, including the control of the characteristics of the operating device of the various feeding circuit 'for example: the rotating motor, the optical capturing unit, and the controller. For example, Such ship loops may include: - a combination of a seek and a servo loop - a method according to the invention - the method of writing a person abandoning g includes an exclusive-^ signal; determining whether the error signal exceeds a critical value; Refers to no-write abandonment state' 胄 This error signal exceeds this critical value. This error user can be = yes - search error signal or - focus error signal. In part implementation ^ two write ^ abandon algorithm is simultaneously monitored The seek error signal and the focus error, in some embodiments, determine whether the error signal exceeds the critical number ΐϊίΐ: low pass filter, wave error signal, and the * wave error signal and the critical value In some embodiments, this write-abandon algorithm can lose 55 1277079 at ίίΐίίφ μ - the defect signal indicates - the existence of the defect ^ t writes the abandonment of the g can be indicated Ϊ 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 The device 'follows this laser to control the laser according to the signal of the laser signal; the unit line-algorithm is used to execute-write the processing of the system (from the main control and the master to the writable person boundary crossing detection) Device] The invention of the invention is disclosed in the present invention. The optical disk drive system is an optical media device, and the optical media is the opposite. π=Rotating motor, this arsenal arm, and this = the system of production. This control system can include: one to provide control of the money to the ship system. Write the narration to 2 is a relatively small size disc It has a readable surface and a ίΐί surface. ί ' This disc can have - the pre-master 5 can be -2- heart knives. This pre-master portion is formed at the time of manufacture of the disc and is, for example, sound, video, text, or any other material on the disc. This writable part of the warranty is written by the CD player to include user information (example 56 1277079 such as: user notes, interactive status (in the case of video games), or the disc player or user may write Enter other information on this disc). Since there may be optical differences, such as: reflectivity, and the data storage and addressing agreement between the pre-master portion of the optical disc and the writable portion of the optical disc, a control system according to the present invention is on the optical disc. 'Different areas' may also have different operational parameters. The optical operation unit can have a light source, a reflecting device, a lens, and a detecting device for directing light to the optical medium. The detecting means may include a laser power feedback detecting device and a data detecting device for reading data from the optical medium. The optical capturing unit can be mechanically mounted on the arm of the transmission. The actuator arm includes: one of the steerable transmissions that controls the lateral movement of the optical media surface, and one of the focus transmissions that controls the position of the optical pickup unit above the optical medium. These seek and sound transmission devices of the optical pickup unit are controlled by the controller. ... ^ This servo system includes various servos that control the characteristic operation of the optical disk. For example, the rotary motor, the optical pickup unit, and the control cry. In accordance with the present invention, a method of detecting a boundary crossing between optical media types in an optical disk drive includes allowing a value between four differential signals to change a critical value. Two: Value - Multi-executive search operation is performed. At or when 57 1277079 (ie, period k and period k+2, where k is an arbitrary integer). In some embodiments, the peak-to-peak value can be compared in any two cycles. In some embodiments, the critical value is about one quarter of the value between the peak and the value of the first period. This critical value, however, can also be set to be higher or lower. If it is set too high, the disc player may miss the border intersection ^. Conversely, if it is set too low, the disc player may be wrong to say that the Wu side is bordered. In the real world, the default value is the default value applied to a light body when the person is inserted into the CD player. Next, an average critical value = to apply. This average critical value can be calculated by summing the peak-to-peak value of the error signal at the boundary crossing. In some embodiments, when a boundary intersection = parameter substitution is detected to suit the new media type number bias, a focus error signal gain, a seek..., a f乜 difference signal gain, a focus loop (4) , and the deviation of the deviation and the wrong parameters of a brother.峪, 皿, 皿, 哥 环 loop gain, and a string of sounds according to the present invention, the optical disk drive system includes a processor, which is adapted to receive the optical signal from the optical 罝 first 70 ' i ratio and provide a digital signal , at least - detecting the signal of the device, at least - the processor is calculated to receive the digital signal, f according to the control signal, by which the control is coupled to execute the algorithm by the processor, IV ' Take the location of the early morning. In the at least one optical disc, the optical medium, the tube, and the optical pickup unit move through the value, which is the peak value and the derivative value of the digital error signal, and the value between the peak and the peak is two and two And indicate that this boundary is crossed, [automatic media type detection: t variable - critical value. According to another aspect of the present invention, the optical media unit is located above, and the optical pickup unit is located above. 58 1277079 The optical disc drive system comprises: a rotary motor having an optical medium on its surface, an optical operation unit opposite to an optical medium, a transmission arm that controls the position of the optical access unit 70, and a control arm Rotating motor, this transmission arm, and ^ laser-control system. The control system can include a read/write port that is coupled to provide a control signal to a servo system. "The media can be - a relatively small size disc, which has a readable resource. The pre-master part is in this disc manufacturing. m includes inferior materials, such as: sound, video, text 7 can be included in this car. Any other (4). This writable part is far from blank and can be written by the CD player to include user information (eg user notes, interactive status (in the case of video games) or Users may write other information on this disc.) / Due to possible optical differences, such as: reflectivity, and the data storage and addressing of the 3 main control sections of the disc and the writable part of the disc,因此 ' Therefore, _ different aspects of the optical disc of the present invention may also have different operational parameters. The 操 ϋ learning unit may have a light source, a reflecting device, a lens, and a wire to the optical Media_devices. These devices may include power back & detection & and data detection from the optical media. The optical pickup unit may be mechanically mounted on the transmission On the arm. = The special-purpose I-arm system includes: one of the optical movements on the surface of the optical medium to control the lateral movement, and the above-mentioned tracking and focus transmission of the position of the silk element. The servo system includes a variety of servo 1 roads that control the operation of the optical disk drive: the motor, the wire unit, and the controller. For example, the servo circuit may include: A combination of servo servo loops. 59 1277079 According to the invention, a % canister 4i r^h includes: the loading of the optical disk drive is suitable for the number of turns; since the optical disk drive - the optical touch of the media Unit hiding - media; poor signal 'where' - tracking feeding system is 2;; ίϊτ === ϊ二啸崎 value to determine the peak and peak number ';,, 3 =. = "The error signal can be loaded as follows: 2;; The predetermined peak value of the search error signal that can be written to the media 盥 the peak gate is low'. This media class is misjudged by (four). ^Tongtong or too a The sensible-car system includes: - an optical touch unit; - an analogy 'light 5 to receive signals from the optical pickup side; at least one processor, combined with: two, - driving calculation - control signal; - Drive mf, according to the control signal 'to whistle the heart of this optical unit. The second line - algorithm' is used to load this CD-ROM is suitable for - optical ^ class fi operating parameters, calculate this search surplus number A peak type Γ,, "recording, if the decent system decided to this second media class [read head loading] 1277079 silk another feature, this 揭 reveals that - the silk starts a light fie. The optical disc drive system includes: a rotary motor, a watch, a light to the medium, an optical pickup unit on the opposite side of the optical medium, a transmission arm, a transfer arm, and an arm. And one of the laser control systems. The control system system is coupled to provide a control signal to a servo 枓==? can be a phase-small-sized optical disc having a readable disk surface. Furthermore, the optical disc may have a pre-master control unit 1 , and the pre-ball portion is formed at the time of the light creation and includes a squeezing material such as: sound, video, and the vehicle is enough for him. 'By including user information (such as the use of the word machine to smash the evil (in the case of video games), or other information on the disc or the user can break into the disc). The game has optical differences For example, ··························································································· It can have an eyebrow and a detection device to the optical medium. This optical pickup unit can read the information of the poor material by the tr_i_ loading the transmission device and the h tracking drive. a device, and a focus transmission device in which the optical medium is controlled to sneak a movement. The side ft, the capture unit position is set by the controller to control the finder and the focus drive circuit The various servos pay 1 to reverse the learning of the first reading, and the controller. 61 1277079 Including: - Wei value loop and - Focus on the optical disc light learning method of the method of transmission: Rotation in this star in her star ίί limb, ^ for a brother to control the signal, by which - optics === control, the number to this The optical pickup unit = one of the seeks is located on the surface of the optical medium having the obedience - the area = the system. This end position can be set at this end position for this optical 3 domain system. The bar code area is set at the end position, and the optical operation is opened at the end. The __ element moves away from the tracking error, and one of the limits is obtained. According to this rotation, the sampling error unit is located in an orbit based on the Uj domain, which is obtained by the specific system (such as Sf). Close the search. The processor, "with ί: ί from the disc = take ' and provide a number of missing Ρ丨, first to capture the signal of the detection device in the early 、, this at least _ ^ ^ _ combined to receive this The equal-digit signal, according to this control ^,. The different 4 control signals; and - the drive device, - combined with the root processor system ^; At least one method is to rotate a optical medium 62 1277079 body in the optical disc drive to provide a tracking control signal, which is one of the control signals, at the end position, and closes the focus system. Adjusting the seek control signal to move the optical operation unit away from the end position until a seek error signal suitable for a region of the optical media surface having the track is disposed, and on one of the optical media tracks Close the 'one brother rail feeding system. [Sliding Notch Filtering Device] According to another feature of the present invention, the present invention is a sliding trapping ship device in a multi-exercise search deduction. The n-set can reduce the optical crosstalk effect by the tracking error signal (TES) (FES). This CD player system includes:

二ΐίίιΐ ^Surface placement—optical media, contrary to the media of the dissident media, first draws early, controls this optics# single is placed—transmission and control of this rotating motor, this training arm, and this thunder One of the control signals for the control includes a --take/write channel' face-to-face to extract--a small-sized optical disc having a readable surface. Moreover, the light is shot by the money - the pre-master control unit includes a readable unit, and the Hi control unit is formed at the time of manufacture of the optical disc.

Inch cloth such as 耷 、, video, text, or a meat 裎徂 Hi Hi Hi Hi Hi Hi Hi Hi Hi Hi Hi Hi Hi Hi Hi Hi Hi Hi Hi Hi Hi This writable part is guaranteed to be liii = disc ^ write 'by including user information (example pre-reflection ' and this disc, it may also have & different areas of light - light source, reflector, a lens, and a device for testing the media first. These devices may include · Ray 63 1277079 J work, feedback side device, (4) the wire ship read ·, the optical unit can be shaped frequency transfer device Hand County includes: controlling the position of the optical pickup unit above the optical ship surface control m media. ^=The such tracking and focus transmission of the wire_unit is replaced by the device. The various servos of the characteristics of the optical disc drive = the combination of the servo loop and the servo loop. The singularity of the control circuit and the focus control f 2 search operation provide a focused optical signal; In the middle of the wave filter device, the focus error is extended, and the number 'uses one of the traps and the frequency from the multi-executive search to find the center of the system, so as to form a filter. During the process, the filter and wave error signals are $重重道寻操: Real: At least - the processor is calculating - arbitrage;:; ^ = receiving these digital signals, according to which the control signal, to control the 'lights since the 5 - optical acquisition of single state calculus Method: by receiving: ten different - focus error signal, using - tiger ^ to find the optical signal number 'where the notch chopping device is right-handed to chop the focus error signal - the reference speed is related - Rate 64 1277079 during the heavy orbit search operation, thereby calculating the chopping error signal [Digital Signal Processor (DSP) Architecture] According to another feature of the present invention, the present invention transmits one of the processor_up, the threat-planting machine ί “ "#| take early & (d) the optical pickup unit position of the drive arm, and control the rotary motor to write a control system. The control system can include: a pull / write pass, coupling To provide a control signal to a servo system. ' oblique, ίίί Wei can be - a relatively small size surface, which has a readable memory on the surface of the disc. Furthermore, the disc can be adjacent to the $-writable portion. This pre-master part is in this light === = I hope to include any other corpse on this disc, so as to include the use of her. The disc player may make optical differences, such as: reflectivity, and this disc, the main part And the data storage and addressing of the writable portion of the optical disc is also according to the present invention - the control system also has different operational parameters in different regions of the optical disc. The capture unit may have two The light source, the reflective device, the lens, and the device to the optical media. These * are mounted on the arm of the exercise arm. The search is on the surface of one of the optical media. Following the position of the silk touch unit t telephoto drive n the scale of the silk age unit and the collection of 65 1277079 is controlled by this controller. Adding this service system includes: various servo motors that control the characteristic operation of the handle machine. The optical browning unit, and the two ship phases include: "Miscellaneous Weighing and Focusing" - Digital Signal Processing in Accordance with the Invention In the architecture of the 3 series, when receiving the -inductive device interrupt signal, the service is a plurality of two if I: ΐ part of the example, the sensing | set interrupt signal indicates: these ί bits can be provided . In some real face towels, this digital signal = rationally serves these multiple feeding functions in sequence. In the partial ^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^ In some real scarves, turn a few shirts to calculate ί, including: two focus feeding algorithm. In some embodiments, this digital signal processing benefit is suitable for this algorithm--the error loop is fine. In some embodiments, it is also possible to serve Kf single-executive hopping. Η 似 μ μ , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , According to this _ money, by (4) the optical training unit includes: - a digital signal processor, in order to connect to the - digital letter ί 之 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Serve this multiple servo algorithm. Like 1" 服肩# [Multi-Zone Correction] According to another feature of the present invention, the present invention is calibrated over a plurality of regions of -, a digital focus of a disc player, and a tracking feeding system 66 1277079 = ^ The optical disk drive system comprises: a rotary motor, the surface of which is placed two; the body, opposite to the optical medium, the optical pickup unit it, the control of the light, the transmission arm, and the control of the rotary motor, 2 And this laser - control system. This control (4) system can be written into the channel 'to engage the control signal to a servo system. It is expected to have a 7-inch disc that has a readable surface. Furthermore, the disc can have a pre-master. Partially, the pre-master portion is formed at the time of manufacture of the optical disc and

ΪΪ3ΪΪΓ, (4) Sound, video, text, or - content: Those who stay on * any other information on the CD. This can be written in part by a two-disc machine to contain user information (such as a disc player or user; r can be written in this example), or this light may have optical differences, such as: reflectivity In the different regions of the butterfly, the optical capturing unit may have a light source and a detecting device for reflecting the agricultural light to the optical medium. These detections 'spoons★

And the self-learning media read (4) ^= 尔 襄, and control the optical focus transmission above the optical media. This arrangement of the optical capture unit is controlled by this controller. Pin and t-focus drive installed this servo system includes ··Control this CD player special ^ wire said · money to motor, silk and tender can include: a track-feeding service tour two hearts 67 1277079, according to ^ A multi-regional correction system may include: placing the optical secret if the current region is above the optical medium iiiu depends on the τ__ domain, if not all regions are in the embodiment, the correction algorithm The system may include the following ", 3 dimeric error signal offset correction, - focus error signal gain 2, shout signal offset correction, - seek error signal gain correction, reverse non-secret correction, - thief wave device correction, - loop Gain, or adjustment - any other correction of the operational parameters of the optical medium. And in the four divisions, in some of these multiple regions, the number of operations = equal to the number of regions that can be passed through the optical medium. 1 = Ming 4 - the optical system includes · · - optical acquisition unit; - analog f ff" signal, · at least - processor, combined with less - processing II system calculation - control signal; and - drive device, Turn ^, according to this control number, borrow reading This means the yarn capturing position. The at least one line: algorithm, 11 峨 domain - the suspicion unit is in the first step of the plural complex field above the operating parameters, the current region is in the first learning media on these multiple areas -, #管,,t The operational parameters in this current region are optimized, and the next region is another household in these multiple regions; several regional systems have been corrected. And scare the temple complex number [tracking error money (TES) to green error money (FES) string track and art ίί' the invention is disclosed - kind of - machine search = (FES) crosstalk correction. The optical disc drive system includes: - a differential surface on which an optical medium is placed, and instead of the optical medium - a light is taken 68 1277079, the unit is placed - the arm is taught, and the motor is controlled. The actuator arm, and one of the lasers, includes a read/write channel coupled to provide a control signal to the optical disk, which has a readable disk surface. Furthermore, the disc may have - a pre-master, which is formed at the time of manufacture of the disc and such as: sound, video, text, or - the content provider leaves any other material on the disc. This writable part is ΓΛ ί ί ί # , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , ,疋Because there may be optical differences, such as: reflectivity, and the data storage and addressing between the main part of the iiit, the light in different areas of the pepper can have a light source, a reflective device, and a lens. And a gamma device that will be directed to this optical medium. Such gambling can include ······························································································· Taking the unit position and the focus and focus transmission of the unit, the system includes: a plurality of servo slings for controlling the operation of the optical disc: the rotating motor, the spinning unit, and the Control the cry. === Shipback _ includes: - _ service loop and a focus on this seek error (TES) to focus error signal (FES) crosstalk school 69 1277079 隹 ^ choice - crosstalk increase surplus 'it can make this search The error signal has the lowest effect on this poly ϋτΓίΓι, thereby setting an optimal crosstalk gain. One wave two to two e) can be used to set each crosstalk gain in the crosstalk gain. During this Bode calculation, the tracking loop is measured by the #2==focus error signal system. This adjusts the focus error string: ί The frequency factor component is then determined. This lowest frequency certificate, Ik, is set to the best crosstalk gain. The ratio of households to Γ; 之 做, system includes: - optical capture unit; a class of 嗲% light & From the optical pickup unit, the device is connected to the receiver to receive the same number: :J;f ° Λ 5 One of the brothers' signals is disturbed and the best crosstalk is set. This is the secret of the Pod (five) de) component of the crosstalk to add a slave ^ ^ [corrective storage method] parameters to place an optical media, phase; 5 you stop ii, 疋 ^ motor, the surface of this optical operation unit position An optical pickup unit, a control unit, the transmission arm, and the firing device, and the control of the rotating horse to include: - reading/writing a human channel, the control system can be The coupling σ is used to control the signal to a servo system. The optical medium can be a phase material and exist in The surface of the disc. ^ Ί = = disc, which has readability including readable special materials, such as the formation of the light and may wish to be included in this optical monument, text, or - content provider to He Wei = miscellaneous This is a part of the warranty 1277079 left blank and can use this CD player to write people, # to contain user information (such as · user notes, interactive status (in the case of video games), or the player or user Other information that may be written to this disc.) Because of the optical difference in age, for example: reflectivity, and the $main part of the disc and the disc can be written by the person: #料储和 addressing,疋Therefore, the control system according to the present invention may have different operational parameters in the difference of the optical disc. The optical unit may have two light sources, an anti-difficulty, a lens, and a device for making media. The device can include: the lightning is mechanically erected on the arm of the transmission device. Body _J This optical nano single = set the system to combine the gamma servo circuit. Including the lyrics and a focus - Kind of maintenance - The operation parameter f of the disc player is used to form the correction parameter, and the operation parameters are stored; the part of the reference is implemented, and the scale correction parameter is implemented. In the embodiment of the present invention, the correction date and the sub-storage are obtained on the present day. One of the differences between the stored parameters is greater than the correction parameters and storage and storage of ti. In some embodiments, if the corrected singularity system does not have to be greater than the -threshold value, one of the maximum number of storage points is utilized. The difference is stored. In some embodiments, each - such === 71 ^ 77079 is taken from the ground. The flash zt is stored in the parameters of the fast root itt too itt7br media placed in the CD player. Invented - scale; · /: ah rectified use. Analog processor, coupled to receive HfUr light f acquisition unit; number one, and provide digits for acquisition. Stone t take early 7 ° _ device positive parameters; ^ί鳞==The operation parameters of this butterfly are used to form the calibration [correction notch filter device]. The notch filter system for the shot placement system is equipped with: - a rotary motor whose surface is made of this light. Media-Optical #| take unit, control ί bag, and this decoration - control System. The control system can include a .1 fetch/write channel' turn to provide a control signal to the servo system. The optical media can be a relatively small size optical disc with a readable and ϋ surface. Furthermore, the optical disc can have two pre-master portions. The fine master portion is formed at the time of manufacture of the disc and ΐί:: ϊ 料 material such as: sound, video, text, or - any other material that the content provider primarily includes on the disc. This writable part is guaranteed and can be written by the disc player to include user information (eg, user notes, interactive status, (in the case of a video game), or the disc player or user) Other information that may be written to this disc). Since there may be optical differences, such as: reflectivity, and this disc, 72 1277079 = the information between the main control part and the writable part of the disc may also be due to the system's failure in the disc. This light is followed by ^: ^; and; #功,回回_装置, and from this optical ship read (four) of this capital is mechanically erected in this transmission difficult arm 'on 1 ϊΐϊϋ /, above the school ship The position of the optical pickup unit is set in the lake; the group of the various feeding and feeding circuits of the circuit is included. The method of correcting a notch filter device in a tracking ship circuit and a focusing system is green. • The starting number of the system is in response to a frequency response curve of a frequency range to find the peak-to-peak frequency response; - scatter and calculate this fresh response at each of the selected frequencies from ίΞί if wrong get. In some embodiments, the frequency 』==3ί signal is calculated as 'the system is combined to provide an input signal. ^ In addition, in some embodiments, the digital feed is disturbed to the trapping The device according to the present invention includes: - Optical Na unit; 73 1277079 than processing n 'to receive from this optical redundancy: number; at least - processor, • heart 2, etc. = ίί fi device The calculation - control signal, and - drive device, number, to control the position of the optical pickup unit. This obtains the rate curve of the digital ship system in the frequency range, and sets the notch filter device of the notch chopping device, and the signal is detected in the digital feeding system of the at least-frequency: Hunting in the [correction method] optical media, on the contrary, the optical media is used to supply control signals to a servo system. The school ship can be a small-sized unit that can exist on the surface of the vehicle. Furthermore, the lining may have an alkali-controlled fragrant portion, and the Ht control portion is any other (4) formed on the disc and produced on the disc. The writable part is secured and can be written by the disc to contain user information (instant, interactive state (in the video_example), or the optical stack or the user may write to the disc) Other information). (4) = can & will have optical differences, such as H, and the data storage and addressing between the main control portion of the optical disc and the writable portion of the optical disc. Therefore, the control system according to one of the present invention The different areas of this disc may also have different operating parameters. 1277079 This optical capture unit can and is directed to the optical media detection & This, etc., lens, and circuit, as a variety of servos, for example, these servo loops can be dry and versatile, and this controller. A combination of servo loops. ^^······································································································· In the part of the real: say Τ = Γ Qiao, (10) do miscellaneous; knife = =, the brewing control = ^ in the tear _ type (for example, arrogant. Eight per # system took place in a new optical media loaded this light Ϊί二ΐ 贯 In the example, during the power-enhancing period, at least one of the following parameters is based on the input gain of the device, the poly (four) and the number = Zhongyi, and the tracking error signal offset. Sub-implementation ί 'At least one of the following parameters can be used to check the goods, and focus on "two one focus sum threshold value, focus error signal two two Ming", two 3 offset, tracking error signal gain, and seek The error is ^ Tiger offset. In the case of the heart, in the error back 75 1277079 value, :::=3 2:, the device input increases 1, the focus of the sum of the critical number, the tracking error signal bias =, the track Error signal 増 loop gain, κ pain test Wei Wei, a focus number, and tracking error money ^ non-cell number reverse nonlinear ginseng system hair machine system includes: according to the present invention, a digital feeding device from this optical drawing list a processor coupled to receive - the processor calculates a control signal, and a driver At this point, the control signal is used to control the position of the optical pickup unit. According to the device, the first position of the device is one, the palace, the earth: the early position. The at least one processing starts with the correction of the number of hunting machines or during the repair. During the operation period, the operating parameters iSi are normalized during the normal operation of the optical disc. [Error signal inverse nonlinear correction] According to another feature of the present invention, the correction-reverse nonlinear functional system in the present system is A digital servo--a number=this=study, the arm of the body = take two: ^^ This system is designed. This control system can include: this mine = one control for the control signal to the - service system. / Write overnight, coupled to pick up, small size disc, which has a readable input part. This pre-master part = fetch data, such as: sound, blank space and can be written by this disc player Into the part of the insurance such as: user notes, interactive state (in video: package; 76 j277 〇 79 disc drive or other information that users may write to this disc). The optical pickup unit can have a light source rr ^ ° The strength of the sheep mouth test 1 set, and since this light The media read is mechanically mounted on the arm of the actuator by 5. The position of the optical pickup unit is controlled above the body to set up such a seek and focus loop of the optical operation unit. The various types of mines with characteristic operation γ 末 末 · 此 此 此 此 此 此 此 此 此 此 此 此 此 此 此 、 、 、 、 、 、 、 、 、 、 、 、 、 、 、 、 、 、 、 、 、 、 、 、 、 、 And a focus method according to the invention of the '-mine supply-wire machine _ number side (four) system includes: selecting a digital servo number offset/multiple by a set error signal offset value; determining the corresponding error signal offset To - error =, the response is generally linear, .. In addition, in some embodiments, the enhancement includes adjusting the error signal gain until the I loop gain of i. In some embodiments, the invention may also be a second difference gain, a second error signal offset, or a second number: servo loop loop gain' and stored in the lookup table. It is also possible to determine the Φ tone parameter and place it in the table. The wire 'follows' can be parameterized to correspond to the selected value of the error signal offset 1277079. For example, the look-up table finds the error signal gain, finds the L-difference signal gain, and the difference signal is Wei Wei ru. The focus error processor 包括 收 ^ ^ system includes: - optical capture unit; Analogously, at least two processors are combined to receive the digital signals. According to the control signals, the driving device is used to "make the root processor system a sneak peek." The at least one error signal is mismatched from the set offset value to select - focus =, and the gain of the focus error signal is stored in -g, t is incorrect, 5 is corrected, a seek error is offset, and a seek is obtained. Red will increase poverty, or find the gain of the loop, and store these results until the table is checked. [Correction of the error signal gain of the brother] Track: Signal ================================================== The combined material can be a small-sized vehicle with a readable portion 3 . This pre-mastering section is based on the fact that the optical disc manufacturing device can take a poor amount of material, such as: sound, video, text, or a content provided. Γ = (10) returning that is desired to be included on the disc. This writable person is part of the work, and can use this CD player to write people's information to contain user information (eg, user notes, interactive status (in the case of video games), or this light 78 1277079 The machine or user may write other information about this disc). The age will have optical differences, such as: reflectivity, and the data storage and addressing between the disc and the writable portion of the disc. Therefore, the control system according to the present invention is also included in the disc. May have different operating parameters. (4) The capturing unit may have a light source, a reflecting device, a lens, and a detecting device for directing the line ν to the optical medium. The detection devices may include: ♦ J power back, system 5, and data detection from the optical media. The optical capturing unit may be mechanically mounted on the drive arm

The device hand (4) includes: controlling the optical drive device in the optical media county, and controlling the optical pickup unit above the optical ship. This branch of the silk learning unit is controlled by this controller. No, the servo system includes: various servo circuits for controlling the characteristic operation of the optical disk drive, for example: the rotary motor, the optical operation unit, and the control cry. , 'The ship circuit can include: - a tracking servo loop and a combination of "servo loops. ...,

According to this one, the type------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- The peak-to-peak value of one of the signals is calculated by the peak value and the peak value-gain factor; the gain factor resets the gain of the track error signal; and determines whether the gain factor is approximately 丄. In some embodiments, the seek error signal gain can be initiated to a current, error signal; and in some embodiments, the impurity error signal can be initialized to a predetermined value. In the implementation of this part of the financial system, the system was settled and a focus servo system was set up to close. In some embodiments, the value between the peak and the peak is determined to include light, and the capturing unit lies over the tree on the track of the optical ship, and the tracking error is measured as the maximum and minimum values. In some embodiments, the optical capture unit 79 1277079 can be placed over a particular area or media type (e.g., pre-mastered or writable) on the optical media. The increase factor can be set to be proportional to (for example, equal to) a ratio between a reference value and the value between the peak and the peak. This reference value is then set to the predetermined peak-to-peak value of this tracking error signal (TES). In some embodiments, the gain factor is, for example, resetting the gain factor to the lower limit, if the gain factor is below the lower limit and resetting the upper limit of the gain factor domain, if the calculation is performed The booster is located at the upper limit f, thereby confirming that the gain factor is within a lower limit and an upper limit. In some embodiments, the lower limit is about 〇25 and the upper limit is about 4. Thus, the rail error signal gain, if any, can be reset to this tracking error signal. Furthermore, the gain of the seek error signal can also be determined as = 3 - a specific range (for example, between -128 and 127) and the gain of the error signal, and then the factor can be approximated to 1. I #直剡 曰 tr tr tr tr tr tr tr tr tr tr tr tr tr tr tr tr tr tr tr tr tr tr tr tr tr tr tr tr tr tr tr tr tr tr tr tr tr tr tr tr tr tr tr tr tr tr tr tr tr Receiving the digital S, the control signal, by means of the optical pickup unit, the system performs an algorithm to initiate a search; and the second tracking signal is turned on. A peak disk ♦ threshold value count - gain factor, root view increase ·? = Bu. In order to improve, and check to determine whether the gain factor is similar to [correction of the seek error signal offset], according to another feature of the present invention, the present invention comprises: - a rotary motor, the surface of which is attached - wire 1277079 ΐ ί The media-optical capture unit, the position of the optical pickup unit, the control unit, the control unit, the transmission arm, and the control system. The control system can include: - read/write access, coupled to provide control signals to a servo system. , the media can be a relatively small size of the disc, which has a readable memory. Furthermore, the disc can have a pre-master = 卩. This navigation master is formed during the manufacture of this disc and can draw poor materials such as sound, video, text, or a content containing any other material on the disc. This writable part of the Guardian Zhan Tian uses this CD player to write people, including user information (such as user face, interactive state (in the case of video games), or the disc money or user may write Other information on this disc). Ageing can have optical differences, such as: anti-drunk, and data storage and addressing between the writable parts of the disc. It may also have different operating parameters. Flying 赖 赖 70 70 can be called anti-missing, Wei, and the detection device will be to this optical media. The detecting device may include and the device; and the optical media read data is detected on the transmitting arm.寻寻传ί ΐΐ This optical media surface control is moving towards one of the 2ίϊίί= _ ship above the optical pickup unit position === optical tracking unit of these tracking and focus transmission circuit The characteristics of the rhyme operation can be included in: the feeding of the feeding circuit and a focus of the invention, the invention, the type of the optical disc machine, the search, the search, the 1271079, the search error signal The method of offset includes confirming that a focus servo system is turned off and adjusting the seek error signal offset to optimize the performance of the disc drive. Performance can be optimized for the best servo function (ie, the servo system is the most stable for this CD player) or for the best read function (ie, the read function of this CD player is the most efficient) Jiahua. In some embodiments, the present invention can achieve a tradeoff between optimization for optimal servo function and optimization of the best read function, for example, for optimal servo function. One of the averaging and optimization of the best read function. ^ In some embodiments for optimizing the optimal servo function, the tracking servo system can be turned on, thereby allowing the optical capturing unit to cross the track and measure the offset, and the value can be tracked thereby. The error signal is determined. The measured offset value is the average of the maximum and minimum values of the error signal in the j-knife λ. This brother's disease difference signal is offset, and then the number can be corrected by one of the measured offset values. This measurement offset value, then, can be re-thanked, blush

In some embodiments, this crossover frequency is about 1.8 bit.

Jc Γ ί, ϊ / 1 , people # »

/u卞神%早兀; a type of comparison unit in the detection device signal, combined to receive the digital signal, and a driving device, coupled to the processor, and provide a plurality of at least one sink system to calculate a control signal 82 1277079 === The performance of the New CD player = , according to the date of the hair - another feature, the hair == two =;, benefit of: = This optical media heart, its watch set - optical ship, contrary to , = f f This control system can include: - read / write pass, coupled & to provide control signals to a servo system. ..., material, small size disc, which has a readable score and ΐί ί disc table, this disc can have a pre-master 2 === system = optical Π?: into and any other on the disc data. ;== disc player or example), or this light (four) tr may have optical differences, such as · · reflectivity, and this disc, also in the different areas of the paste, the optical acquisition unit can have a light source, Reflecting device, lens, and detecting device for optical media. These devices may include: #署. Huo Cong set, and the data from this optical miscellaneous reading data detection wear ah Huang 1Li learning acquisition unit can be set on the machine to set up the arm on the arm:, clothing arm system including · · in this optical media The surface controls a lateral movement of the one-inch actuator and controls one of the focus actuators of the optical pickup unit position 83 1277079 above the optical medium. This optical capture unit is controlled by this (four) 。. As far as this is concerned, the focus drive assembly, the servo system includes: controlling the characteristics of the optical disc drive. The green label date β according to the present invention, a type of optical disc drive 蝥隹 iii - «, partial Shift control

The volume is centered: and when the focus shift control arm 提 隹 四 四 控制 控制 控制 控制 control workload, according to one of the monitoring 2 忒ΐϊΐ Λ Λ error signal gain. In some embodiments, the optical pickup unit is located farthest from the optical medium and the optical unit. In the =ί=! and the letter from the optical pickup unit to detect the light and the Bayer 3 focus sum threshold value can be used to oscillate the til focus position, monitor the sum signal, and set the poly- and 35-boundary values to One of the sum signals, one of the peaks, and then

= decided. For example, the optical pickup unit can be oscillated between the position closest to the optical medium and farthest from the optical medium to oscillate through the focus position. This focus control workload can be determined, for example, by providing a control effort equal to one of the summation threshold values. In some embodiments, the '^ focus error signal gain, which can be determined by providing a small sinusoidal control operation, is determined by one of the peak-to-peak values of one of the focus error signals of the standby control, which oscillates the optical The capture unit causes the sum signal to be near one of the points of this focus sum threshold. For example, the focus error signal gain can be set such that the peak-to-peak value is at a predetermined value. 84 1277079 According to one embodiment of the present invention, the optical gamma slave processor is engaged to receive from; the light 3 is taken from the unit: an analogy and provides a digital signal; at least - the signal of the medium-sized device, the at least the processor is calculated - Poly 2 to receive these digital signals, = value; = ^ iTrr, tf ^ light this fresh signal gain.

According to another feature of the present invention, the present invention is corrected in the Jiang Yansi-.== system, the seed side: a rotating motor 'the surface is placed - the optical medium, the opposite of the hard-to-mesh - the wire drawing unit, controls this One of the optical pickup unit positions + the arm, and the control of the rotary motor, the actuator arm, and

The optical medium can be a relatively small-sized optical disc having a readable memory and present on the surface of the optical disc. Furthermore, the disc can have a pre-master knife and a writable portion. This pre-master portion is formed at the time of manufacture of the disc and can read data such as sound, video, text, or any other material that a content provider can wish to include on the disc. The writable portion is left blank and can be written by the disc to contain user information (eg, user notes, interactive status (in the case of video games), or the disc player or user may write Other information on this disc). Since there may be optical differences, such as: reflectivity, and the pre-emption of the disc, the data storage and addressing protocol between the master portion and the writable portion of the disc' is therefore a control system according to the present invention. In different areas of the disc 85 ^ 277 〇 79, there may be different operations. The = optical_unit can have:: The first line leads to the #詈魏, and will be placed on this optical medium. This optical capture ^ can be used for the data side of the body data. This transmission shock material # Μ · Γ frequency * is set on this training arm.寻传传^壮罟芬/匕化丄 In this optical media surface control one of the lateral movements 晋3 workers and Jin == above the media control this optical capture unit position is tied by the wi system ί control take the early 70 The various servo circuits of the characteristic operation of the optical disc drive may include: a search service loop and a focus, according to the invention, a correction in the focus servo system of the optical disc drive, The method of the ### offset includes: turning off the focus servo with this focus error to the -first value, and by changing this poly ^ ί : offset 'by this disc player - the performance ship most Jiahua. In some implementations, the 'focusing system' is calculated from the debt measuring device in the optical capturing unit, and a focus error signal is calculated, and the focus error signal is offset by 丄, ",, rank difference k The control signal is calculated by the offset, and thus the offset focus error signal. In some embodiments, the performance feature comprises a servo function. In some embodiments, the performance feature comprises: a read function. In the [^ knife only case, the optimization of the feeding function includes: adjusting the focus, the difference signal offset, thereby maximizing the peak-to-peak value of one of the tracking error signals. In an embodiment, optimizing the read function includes: adjusting the focus difference signal offset to minimize data jitter when reading data from an optical medium. ' ' According to one of the optical discs of the present invention The mechanism comprises: an optical capturing unit; an analog processor coupled to receive signals from the detecting device in the optical capturing unit, 86 1277079 and providing a digital signal; at least one at least one processor-system calculation; already Receiving these digital signals, f such control signals, by means of driving = set, giving the root optical letter (3) positions - and sub-optimizing the performance of the edge-taking machine. Hunting to use this disc [correction of the critical value of the focus summation] - find two copies of the 'monthly system' - the type of drive on the - drive of the CD player, and control the rotary motor, this drive ί = Ray One control System. The control system can include: "fetch/write wanted", coupled to provide control signals to a servo system. The optical medium can be a relatively small-sized optical disc having a readable surface on the surface of the optical disc. Furthermore, the optical disc can have a pre-master 7 knife and a writable portion. This pre-master portion is formed at the time of manufacture of the disc and includes readable material such as sound, video, text, or any other material that the content provider may wish to include on the disc. The writable portion is left blank and can be written by the disc to contain user information (eg, user notes, interactive status (in the case of video games), or the disc player or user may write Other information on this disc). Since there may be optical differences, such as: reflectivity, and the data storage and addressing between the pre-master portion of the optical disc and the writable portion of the optical disc 87 1277079 = the object retrieval unit may have a light source, a reverse weave , body =iti learning, the _ device. Such detecting means may comprise: a device. This light is set and the self-study ship reads the material. The material is mounted on the arm of the transmission. Control the position of the optical touch unit above the media. Set up these search and focus drive circuits for this optical operation unit. For example, come to the controller. The word service loop ^ includes a search for the feeding circuit and a focus method. The method of determining the critical value of the focus sum is: and the critical value is one of the sum signals, the peak value of the optical value = the closest to this Between the touch fabric 9 _, this _ system can handle: the unit; an analogy and provide the signal of the detection device in the digital signal element, the at least the processor system, the calculation -it system to receive the digits Signal, combined to earn a lion chest, ^ 88 1277079 U number ί - by the department execution - algorithm, finely determine the sum of this focus [detection device input dark current offset correction] correction two input:: d' the invention It is disclosed that the rotary motor, the transmission arm, and the control system can be included in a disc drive to read the laser = a control system. This to a servo system. The stomach is taken/written, coupled to provide a control signal material, and a small-sized optical disc having a readable load including a pre-t2, the sub-system is formed at the time of manufacture of the optical disc, and the bedding is like a sound. Video, text, or a meat delivery office. This can be written in some sections such as the user's notes or other information that the user may write to the disc. Or because there may be optical differences, such as: reflectivity, and ΐί main: the data storage and addressing between the rewritable parts can also be purely in different areas of the disc = learning unit can A device that has a wire, an anti-missing, a lens, and a light to the optical medium. These devices can + transmit power feedback, set, and detect data from the optical media. The optical pickup unit can be mechanically mounted on the transmission through the 劈, ^ Γ Γ 装 装 四 四 四 四 四 四 四 四 在 光学 光学 光学 光学 光学 ° ° ° ° ° ° ° ° ° ° ° ° ° ° ° ° ° ° ° ° ° ° ° ° ° ° j This optical rhyme takes the single-focus drive. The search and focus drive of the optical pickup unit 89 1277079 is controlled by this controller. ==? Service loop can be Weng, service two = Jiao according to the invention '- kind of in-wire machine to correct the input parameters: set to turn off the laser power; this disc machine _ wire digging a port a, and sigh this Temple input wheat number offset, borrow

Ji set the value. In some embodiments, the predetermined = bit = ti from the example in the input signal in the input signal, the stalks from the stalker from the first son of the early detection of the two detection devices are looking for a pulse of a ^ 1 move _ Wai. In some embodiments, the - focus control signal can be (10) a digital input signal according to the invention '--correcting the square of the thermal drift _ f power; the time-averaged digital input has a second closed mine number, which has a two-it average number In the example of the invention, the thermal drift correction is analogous to the optical drive system according to the invention: - the optical pickup unit; - 1277079, the device is consuming to receive the device from the optical operation unit and , digital money, this _ department includes - input Wei gain and ^ ^ offset '· at least - processor' engages to receive these digital signals, this = 匕 - processor calculates control signals; and a drive The device, the light and the control signal 'to control the position of the optical pickup unit. This at least one g ^ is an execution-algorithm' to correct this input signal offset. The 浑 algorithm includes an instruction to set one of the lasers in the optical pickup unit and to perform a parameter offset 'by setting the digital signal system to a dare number H [detecting device input deviation light deviation In the case of shift correction, the present invention discloses a method for correcting the gain and offset of an input signal while the optical disk drive Li=ίϊί is in use. The two spirit department's its surface system is placed - optical media, ί丄i a control system. The control system can include: - read ΐ 舄 通 通 , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , Furthermore, this disc can have 4 first

:j can break into the section. The pre-master part is included in the disc, and any of the discs on the disc is white and can be written by the disc player to include the user. = ΐ ΐ ΐ 、, interactive state (in the case of video games), i, this disc or other information that the user may write to this disc). η $9 This optical pickup unit can have a light source, a reflecting device, a lens, and a detecting device for directing 91 1277079 light to the optical medium. Such

The power-receiving _ device, and from this optical media ‘take J.J. This transmission device includes: on this wire arm. Tracking * Fresh* Nine media surface control one of the lateral movements of the sub-track drive clothing, and the focus control device above the light (four) body. The position of the optical pickup unit is controlled by the controller. The combination of this temple and the focus drive and the circuit. Including: the pain circuit and a focus 俜 幢 正 正 ΐ ΐ 光学 光学 光学 光学 光学 光学 光学 光学 光学 光学 光学 光学 光学 光学 光学 光学 光学 光学 光学 光学 光学 光学 光学 光学 光学 光学 光学 光学 光学 光学 光学 光学 光学 光学 光学 光学 光学 光学 光学 光学 光学 光学 光学The ί radio power setting corrects the input signal offset; and the input power of the laser power of the storage bit is increased. These two power levels can, for example, be - read the power level quasi. In some embodiments, the input signals are incremented, beaten, and set to a predetermined scale, and finely corrected. These input signal gains are set in the section it ΐ ' so that these inputs k are sufficient to fill the dynamic range of the analog-to-digital converter. In the case of the file, these input signal offsets can be set by setting the lightning = power = the first power level, setting the input signal offset to 〇, receiving the digits 二, and setting the input signals. The offset is such that the digits of the input signal are passed to g for correction. Setting the input signal offsets can include: averaging the plurality of samples of the digital input signals; and setting the input signal offsets that are proportional to the flat 1 digit input 1 . A time delay can be performed before taking and averaging the digital input signals. In some embodiments, the number of such samples may be 256. 3, other numbers of samples may also be applied. 92 1277079 In the case of a partial real t ’ input signal, the C function can be determined, for example, for both the read power level and the write power level. According to the present invention, the optical disk drive system includes: - optical = unit system includes - laser; - analog processor unit gamma set signal, and mention bit signal, the two = for the system Input signal gain and input signal offset cry: ί :;; Unit t This ί control signal 'to control this optical Na = miscellaneous "decoration (10), ϋ ϊ ϊ 第 ^ 神 神 神 神 神 神 神 神 神 神 神 神 神 神Loop gain correction] - ϊϊϊ ϊΐ ϊΐ ϊΐ ϊΐ 概 概 概 概 概 概 概 概 概 概 概 概 概 概 概 概 概 概 概 概 概 概 概 概 概 概 此 此 此 此 此 此 此 此 此 此 此 此 此 此 此 此 此 此 此 此Contrary to the drop-out unit, control one of the positions of the optical unit, privately, and control the rotating motor, the arm of the transmission, and the system of the unit. The control system may include: Read/write overnight, coupled = to provide control signals to a servo system. #, small size optical disc, which has a readable meter, this vehicle can have - pre-master = two public parts. This pre-master part is here The disc is formed at the time of manufacture and is made of two things, such as: sound, video, text, or any other material that a content provider contains on the disc. This writable part of the warranty can be written by the disc to include use. Information (Example 93 1277079, interactive status (in the case of video games), or other information that may be written by the user or the user may be written on the disc). Due to possible optical differences, such as: The η of the optical disc, and the data storage and addressing between the writable portions of the optical disc, the control system of the present invention may not have different operating parameters on the optical disc. The optical unit can have a system, an anti-missing, a lens, and a line to the optical media. These detecting devices can include: information on the reading data of the optical device 4 and 3 optical media. ΐ 罝 罝 先 先 先 先 先 先 兀 兀 兀 兀 兀 兀 兀 兀 兀 兀 ϊΐ ϊΐ ϊΐ ϊΐ ϊΐ ϊΐ ϊΐ ϊΐ ϊΐ ϊΐ ϊΐ ϊΐ ϊΐ ϊΐ ϊΐ ϊΐ ϊΐ ϊΐ ϊΐ ϊΐ ϊΐ ϊΐ ϊΐ ϊΐ ϊΐ ϊΐ ϊΐ ϊΐ ϊΐ ϊΐ ϊΐ ϊΐ ϊΐ The learning unit selects: The positioning and focusing of the optical capturing unit are controlled by the controller. The service system includes: various services for controlling the characteristic operation of the optical disk drive; Na said: This rotating motor, this optical unit, and the fine road can be said: - find her sunny and - ^ according to the θ kind of calibration in a digital servo system - loop rehearsal 2 ; back; increase ^ method The system includes: receiving an optical domain from the optical disc, using the first loop gain to the digital servo system, and first 'the digital feeding system is based on the optical signals to calculate a control two applied to the frequency. - The positive disturbance to the digital value system 1 The tiger's life t This control (four) 'suppressed - the second control money; the fine = (four), the learning unit - position; calculate the sinusoidal interference rate - discrete Fourier transform 'By forming - interference discrete ^ fDFT) '· Calculating the strict control of the signal - discrete Fourier transform, by means, the number of Fourier transform (DFT); thereby disturbing the discrete Fourier ^ ^ and this letter _ _ _ _ _ _ Society - _f counts 94 1277079, benefits; and thus - This path gain and the measured loop gain between - iso ratio of the count of this loop gain. However, in this case, the digital feeding system is focused on the feeding system. In the knife and fine money, this number shop (four), find _ service _. The loop gain is measured, which is the overall gain of the loop. Here, the parent frequency is set, however, any measurement loop gain can be set. The luminosity system according to the present invention comprises: - an optical unit; ί 3 ίίί ΐ a signal from a device in the optical pickup unit, at least one control signal for processing the nose; and a driving device coupled Controlling the position of one of the optical pickup units according to the at least one control signal. At least the processor executes an algorithm to utilize the first back

乂^This sinusoidal interference of this parental frequency-discrete Fourier transform, J-Leaf (DFT), the way to calculate the gain of this control signal and this measurement is detailed. Further [Implementation] Track and ίί彳 earned the side of the time to send the pieces: "Seeking, Ming Minglu," 祠 系统 system correction" invention disclosure, "旌..., 5 糸 ''' invention disclosure, and, The system architecture, the invention is disclosed; each 95 1277079 parts are delivered on the same date and given to the same attorney, as disclosed in the present invention and referenced in the present disclosure. The invention of the tracking and focus servo system includes the invention of the United States, and the application numbers are: 09/950516, 09/950329, 09/950408, 09/950444, 09/950394, 09/950413, 09/950397, 09/950914, 09/950410, 09/950441, 09/950373, 09/950425, 09/950414, 09/950378, 09/950513, 09/950331, 09/950395, 09/950376, 09/950393, 09/ 950432, 09/950379, 09/950515, 09/95041, 09/950412, 09/950361, 09/950540, and 09/950519. The invention disclosed in the servo system correction includes the invention of the United States, and the application numbers are: 09/950398, 09/950396, 09/950360, 09/950372, 09 φ /950541, 09/950409, 09/950520, 09/ 950377, 09/950367, 09/950512, 09/950415, 09/950548, 09/950392, and 09/950514. The invention of this rotary motor servo system includes the disclosure of the U.S. Patent Application Serial Nos. 09/951,108, 09/951,869, 09/951,330, 09/951,930, 09/951,328, 09/951,325, and 09/951,475. The disclosure of this system architecture includes the disclosure of the United States, the application number of which is 09/951947, 09/951339, 09/951469, 09/951337, 09/951329, 09/951332, 09/951931, 09/951850 , 09/951333, 09/95133, 09/951156, 09/951340, and 09/

951940. W [Example of an optical disk drive] The first figure shows an embodiment of an optical disk drive 1 according to the present invention. The optical disc drive 100 of the first embodiment A includes a shaft motor 1〇1 on which an optical medium 102 is mounted. The optical disk drive 1 further includes an optical pickup unit (OPU) 103 that is mechanically controlled via a transmission arm 1〇4. The optical pickup unit (OPU) 103 includes a light source that is mechanically controlled via a laser drive unit 105. The optical operation unit (〇pu) 1〇3 further includes an optical detecting device that provides a signal of the controller 1〇6. The controller 1〇6 96 1277079 can control the orientation of the optical pickup unit (〇pu) 103 via the transmission arm 1〇4 by controlling the spindle motor 101 to control the rotational speed of the optical medium 1〇2. And controlling the optical power of the light source in the take-up unit (OPU) 1〇3 by controlling the laser driving device 1〇5. The controller 106 includes a read/write process 11A, a servo system 12A, and an interface 130. This read/write process 11 controls the reading of data from the optical medium 1 and the writing of data to the optical medium 102. This read/write process 1 passes through this interface 130 to output data to a host (not shown). The servo system 120 controls the speed of the spindle motor 101, the position of the optical pickup unit (〇pu) 1〇3, and the laser according to the signal from the read/write processing 11〇. . Furthermore, this chain of pure 丨 丨 转 转 i i i · · · · · · · · · 、 、 、 、 、 、 、 、 、 、 、 、 、 、 、 、 、 、 、 、 、 、 、 、 、 、 、 、 、 、 、 Reading or writing this optical medium 102 〇 y, the first figure B shows an example of this optical medium 1 〇 2 . ^ Including the pre-mastering portion 15 and any of the writable portions 151, for example, ' can be written at the time of manufacture, and the contents provided by the second provider are provided. For example, the media 102 can be used to provide information, text, or any other material that can be used by the optical media. This optical media is . For example, the user can write notes on the disc, accompanying the interaction (eg in a game or interactive book) = , child, L write right or other operational data to this point

It is applied to this disc player 100 for media. In some implementations, the optically fine-tunable portion is initiated at the (iv) Μ boundary in Figure B. In some embodiments, the outer diameter of the two may be 97 1277079, rather than its inner diameter. In some embodiments of the optical media 102, the invention may also include an unused external region 154.

An example of such an optical medium 102 is illustrated in U.S. Patent Application Serial No., the disclosure of which is hereby incorporated herein by reference in its entirety in its entirety in its entirety in This read/write person (4) processing UG system can operate in many non-disc formats. An example of a disc format is provided in the U.S. Patent Application "Group Master Control and Incorporable Media and Application in E-book Network Applications", the claim number is 09/527982, and is in Reference is made to the disclosure of the invention. Optical discs, other examples are provided in the U.S. patent φ, "Incorporated-Storage Device System Administration", application No. 09/539841, U.S. Patent Application "Discussion of Media Disc Format", Application No. 9/583448, US ^ ^ CD = storage / material structure and method", which case file ^ 42181, Wu Guo patent application "embedded data encryption device,, / / 542510, US patent application" read and write Into the trough system 傲效二^社, 〇9 is 4251 (), and the US patent application "use-embedded plus C two secret storage f device on the method, 'its application ^ 09 is 83452 'Asia Reference is made to the disclosure of the present invention, respectively. The public key of the disc and CD player, touched the Pod State of Bordeaux

==10= can be included in any host, for example, personal electronic 1 set. Examples of such a host that may include such a disc drive 100 are described in U.S. Patent Application Serial No. Removable Optical Storage Apparatus and System, Bean No. (8)/Offense 398, and incorporated herein by reference. In the parent 2: In the example, the t-disc 100 can have a relatively small external factor of 10.5 mm high, 50 mm wide, and 40 mm deep. Port · Figure 2A shows a transmission arm 1〇4 - implementation - - Optical pickup unit (view) 1 () 3 lining - end. Second picture ^ = moving device arm 1G4 system includes: - (4), its county revolving shaft 203 provides a rotating pivot. The transmission device 2〇1, which can be placed in a magnetic coil on a permanent magnet in a part of the embodiment 98 1277079, can provide a current, thereby providing a winding axis 2〇3 around the axis 2 A rotational movement. The transmission arm 104 further includes a flexible shaft 2〇4. The movement is substantially perpendicular to one of the optical pickup units (〇pu) 1〇3 that rotates about the rotation axis 203. It can be provided via the energizing transmission coil 2〇6. The transmission devices 206 and 201 may be acoustic coil motors. The first embodiment of the optical operation unit (Qpu) 103 and the optical pickup unit (〇PU) 1 are respectively shown in FIG. A light path diagram of 〇3. The optical pickup unit (opu) 103 of the second figure B includes a periscope 210' having reflective surfaces 211, 212, and 213. The periscope 210 is mounted on a transparent optical zone. The surface of the block 214 is placed on the surface of the side wall 21 and is mounted on a quadrature wave plate (QWP) 222 which is mounted on the surface of the periscope 210. The periscope 210 is then mounted on a reversal mirror. 226 and the side wall 231 'the frame $ is again on the surface of the pedestal 215. A laser 218 is mounted on the surface of a laser pedestal 217 and placed on the surface of the pedestal 215. The detecting device 225 And the 226 series is placed and mounted on the surface of the substrate 215. In some embodiments, a high frequency oscillating device (HFO) 219 can be placed beside the laser 218 on the surface of the pedestal 215 to provide the ray. The modulation of the output of the laser beam of 218. This laser 218 system produces The light beam 224 is reflected into the transparent block 214 via the inverted mirror 226. The light beam 224 is then reflected into the lens 223 by the mirrors 212 and 213 and to the optical medium 1 〇 2 (please refer to the first In Figure A), in some embodiments, the mirrors 212 and 213 can be polarization dependent and can be inverted to substantially reflect all of the polarized beams 224 from the laser 218. A flat panel (QWP) 222 rotates the polarity of the laser beam 224 such that a beam reflected from the optical medium 1 〇 2 can be polarized in one direction opposite the beam 224. This reflected beam 230 from this optical medium 102 is collected via this lens 223 and focused in this periscope 210. A portion of this reflected beam 230 (50% in the portion of the portion 99 1277079) is polarized to oppose the beam 224, passing through the reflective surface 213 and directed to the optical metrology device 226. Furthermore, a portion of the reflected beam 230 penetrates the reflective surface 212 and passes through the reflective surface 21; [to reflect to the detection device 225. Due to the difference in path distance between the locations of the detection devices 225 and 226, the detection device 226 is placed in front of the focus of the lens 223, and the detection device 225 is placed behind the focus of the lens 223. , as shown in the ray diagrams of the second graph C to the second graph F. In some embodiments, optical surface 212 is nearly 100% reflective for a first polar ray and nearly 100% conductive for its opposite polar ray. This optical surface 213 can be fabricated to have nearly 100% reflectivity for this first polar light line and about 50% conductivity for its opposite polarity light system. Immediately thereafter, the optical surface 211 can be fabricated to have nearly 100% reflectivity for the opposite polarity ray system. In this method, almost 100% of the beam is illuminated onto the optical medium 102, and 50°/. The collected reflected beam is incident on the detecting device 226, and 50% of the collected reflected beam is incident on the detecting device 225. A portion of this laser beam 224 from the laser 218 can be reflected by an annular reflecting device 252 that is placed in the periscope 210 on the surface of the optical block 214. The annular reflecting means 252 can be a holographic photographic reflecting means that writes the position of the light beam 224 through the optical block 214. The annular reflector 252 reflects a portion of the laser power back to one of the detectors 250 mounted on a portion of a laser block 227%. The detection device 250 provides a laser power signal that can be used in a servo system to control the power of the laser 218. Figure 2D shows an embodiment of such detection devices 225 and 226 that may be applied to some embodiments of the present invention. The detecting device 225 includes an array of optical detecting devices 231, 232, and 233 placed on the surface of a pedestal 215. Each of the individual detection devices, the detection devices 23, 232, and 233 are electrically coupled to provide immature detection device signals Ar, EE, and CR to a controller 106. The detecting device 226 also includes: an array of detecting devices, the detecting device 100 1277079 does not provide an immature gamma device signal service, fr, 235, 苴厶Sl丨妲 at the knives only in the case, central detection The measuring device 232 and the respectively providing the fork and the fork, are installed in the media, and the media is in the middle of the school. The detecting devices 225 and 226 are opposite to the base 215 iir; ^2ί ^ interference level The detected segments 232, and 233 and the segments 234, =: and 236 of the detecting device 226 are slightly misrepresented. Asymmetry may result in optical strings that are trusted by Xingfu, such as the focus error signal and the seek error signal.

^ *The focal condition may cause a small diameter beam 230 to illuminate the surface. The focusing procedure can be performed by detecting the difference between the sum of the signals AR and CR and the central signal in the side device 225 and the difference between the sum of the signals BR and DR and the central signal in the detection. The decision system can be monitored by measuring the symmetrical displacement of the surface beams 23 此 of the detection devices 225 and 226. A tracking monitoring system can be provided by monitoring the difference between the input and the CR in the detecting device 225 and the difference between the signals br and DR in the detecting device 226. An embodiment of the optical pickup unit (OPU) 103 is further described in U.S. Patent Application, Low Profile (pr〇file) Optical Reading

Taking the head π, the application number is 09/540657, and reference is made to the disclosure of the present invention. The second figure shows an effective ray diagram of the light beam 224, which is the laser 218 (second image). Travel to this optical media 1〇2 in the CD player (first image). This lens 223 focuses the light from the laser 218 onto the optical medium 102 and is located at a position X on the optical medium 1〇2. The distance between the lens 223 and the surface of the optical medium 102 is denoted by d. In some embodiments of the invention, the data is written in front of the optical media 102. In some embodiments, data sheets can be simultaneously written to both sides of the optical medium 102. Moreover, the optical medium 102 is comprised of a track that, in most embodiments, is formed for this light 101 1277079, the medium, and the spiral. The track is different in this optical media ship. For example, in this optical medium, the pre-written portion of the media is moved to the groove 262. For the purpose of explanation, 'in the invention, the -bead system is determined to be written on the plane 216, so that the ΐί:ΐ2,61 ° ^^ road system can also be applied to the writing groove 262. Information. In the pre-master portion 15 of the optical medium 102 (first image), the material is written as a concave portion or a convex portion, so that the reflected light beam 23 is significantly reduced.

Can change. Although the apparent reflectivity of the actual reflective scale of the bump on the other part of the disc changes, the apparent reflectivity changes because the "dark point is reflected by the self-bump and the light from the plane 261". This is caused by the phase difference in the vicinity of the bump. This phase difference is sufficient to cause destructive interference, and therefore, the collected light is reduced. In addition, at a bump, the learning medium 1G2 is reduced to light. The other factor - the factor includes: the extra scattering from the bumps - which also reduces the amount of light collected.

In the writable portion of the optical medium 102 (first image), a film of crystallization provides a mirrored surface. The amorphous lanthanide can be heated by using a relatively high power laser beam to crystallize and selectively enhance reflectivity (because the refractive index of the material has changed) and to adjust the optical medium 丨〇2 The phase characteristic of the writable material in the writing portion 151 is used to complete the writing operation. The second diagram F shows the reflection of the light beam 230 of the detection device arrays 225 and 226 of the optical media 1 to 2 to the optical pickup unit (OPU) 103. The reflected light beam 230 from the optical medium 102 is collected by the lens 223 and collected by the optical pickup unit (OPU) detecting means 225 and 226. The detection device 226 is placed in front of the focus of the lens 223, and the detection device 225 is placed behind the focus of the lens 223. As shown in the second figure, the light beam reflected by the optical medium 1 〇 2 is split at the surface 213 to be reflected to the respective detecting devices 225 and 226. The 102 1277079 detection devices 225 and 226 can then be applied to a differential mode to provide signals to a servo control for operating the transmissions 2〇1 and 2〇6 to maintain the optical pickup unit (OPU). ) 103 best search and focus position. The second figure G shows the light beams on the surfaces of the optical detecting devices 225 and 226 when d (the distance between the lens 223 and the surface of the optical medium 1 〇 2) is at an optimum focus position. The light intensity of the light beam 230 reflected by the optical medium 102 to the surfaces of the detecting devices 225 and 226 is evenly distributed on the detecting device 225.

Fragments 23 232, and 233 and segments 234, 235, and 236 of the detecting device 226. The second diagram shows the beam of light on the surfaces of these detection devices 225 and 226 as the distance d is lengthened. At this point, the beam system at the surface of the detecting device 226 becomes larger, and the beam system at which the surface of the t-225 is integrated becomes smaller. As shown in the second figure I, the opposite example can also be applied when the distance d is shortened. A focus signal is detected on one of the surfaces of the detecting device 225, and is then formed by summing the signals A and C and subtracting the signal E. In some embodiments, the resulting signal is normalized via the sum of signals A, c, and £. The second figure J shows the relationship between the quantity A + C - E as a function of the distance d ^ The second figure K shows the relationship of the corresponding quantity B + d - F is a function of the distance d. The difference between the two functions shown in the second figure J and the second figure K is shown in the second figure L. In the second diagram L, the focus can be located at the zero crossing of the curve which is a function of the difference between the inset of the second graph and the second graph K as a function of the focus distance d. In the previous discussion, the subscript was detected by the detection device signals A, C, E,

And omitted in F, to indicate that the above discussion is correct for analog or number versions of these signals. The second diagram shows the beam 230 on the surface of each of the 225 and 226 electrodes in an on-track condition. As shown in the second diagram e, the light from the laser 218 is incident on the surface of the optical medium 1 〇 2, which includes a track 260 having a surface 260 and a groove 261. The beam is sufficiently broad that the earning can be formed in the reflected beam towel, which is as fine as the second, on the surface of the detecting devices 225 and 226. As shown in the second figure jv [the interference pattern is formed into an intensity pattern, the majority of the intensity is determined by elements 232 and 235 (ie, the central component of the detecting devices 225 and 226 for the 103 1277079). The central, and thus the 260, formed constructive interference. The lower intensity light, i.e., where the destructive interference is formed, is directed to the external components 231, 233 of the detection device 225 and the external components 234, 236 of the detection component 226. If the beam 224 from this laser 218

Focusing on the edges of the tracks 260, the interference pattern is translated. The second figure N and the second figure show the interference pattern caused by the light at the edge of the road 260. Although the light intensity of the external elements 231, 233 and the external elements 234, 236 is the same when the beam is π-on, a seek signal can pass signals A, C and signals. The difference between B and D is formed. The second figure P shows a function of the normalized value a-c X when the beam 224 from the laser 218 moves over the surface of the optical medium 102. The system represents a function of the normalized value B-D system X. In each case, the invention produces a sinusoidal function when the zero crossing satisfies the on-track condition. The nature of the devices 225 and 226 is not the same, and since the relationship shown in the second figure q is outside the phase shown in the second figure P, an overall seek error signal can be calculated by taking the second graph P and The difference between the calculations shown in the second figure Q is formed as an indication of one of the search errors. The change in one of the complete periods of the second waveform indicates a complete track crossing. In other words, the zero crossing is used to indicate the plane 261 of the track 26 or the groove. The slope of the seek error (TES) crossing at zero can indicate that the system passes through a trench or a plane of the track 260. The implementation uses the detection devices 225 and 226 to form the tracking and focus block. The difference is the zero point of the optical media 1〇=the most, and the most in the focus error signal (4). These positions can be taken to write the human domain and the wire is moved and cast; 104 1277079 is y to select to allow The disc player 100 is capable of switching between the optimal feeding function and the function of the soil-poor material. This factor is further discussed based on the search error signal (TES) and the focus error signal (FES) algorithm. I can have severe crosstalk between the tracking error signal (TES) and the focus error signal (FES), as described in the previous second figure A to the second figure. Focus error signal (FES), such as Each of the detecting devices 225 and 226 is defined by a seek error signal (TES) when the optical pickup unit (OPU) 1〇3 passes over the surface track of the optical medium 1〇2. The intensity change is concentrated on external components (eg, external components of detection device 225) 231 and 233) The surface and the sum signal are independent of the observation of the black dot size, and as long as the black dot stays on the surface of the detecting device 225, the focus error signal (FES) can be defined to reduce or eliminate the sound. For side device 225, the focus error zero difference signal (FES) is defined as (A + CE) / (A + C + E). & 'in the string among these external components (elements 231 and 233) The phonological system has a large number of crosstalks, in which the crosstalk in the central component (element 232) is small and has opposite phases to the crosstalk in the external components, and then the crosstalk can be defined by a focus error. The signal (NFES) is reduced by subtracting the sum signal (SUM) from the focus error signal (FES), where the summed signal (SUM) is A + c + E. In some embodiments, the new focus error signal (NFES) may subtract the high pass sum signal HP (sum) for the focus error signal (FES), wherein the high pass sum signal HP (SUM) is a high pass filtered sum signal, A filter device is selected to reduce the gain of one of the crosstalk filters. In some embodiments, the new focus error signal (NFES) can be normalized using the sum signal (SUM) or using a low pass filtered sum signal. In the differential mode, that is, simultaneously using the debt measuring devices 225 and 226, the new focus error signal (nfes) having reduced crosstalk can be subjected to a focus error signal (FES) calculated by the detecting device 225 and via The difference between the focus error signals (FES) calculated by the detection device 226 is defined as previously described. The embodiment of the optical disc drive 100 (Fig. A) presents a number of challenges in controlling the conventional optical drive system 105 1277079 '. For example, a conventional optical disk drive system is made up of a moving light machine and a focusing lens on a track surface of a wire disc, borrowing a stage, moving the track, and moving through the opposite side of the wire - a focusing lens, To perform a two-stage focusing operation. The transmissions 1 and 206 of the transmission arm 1 提供 2 provide a single-stage operation, which is still in some embodiments, = 仃, and the same, as in the conventional optical disc with conventional optical media. Eight, the intelligent head drive system is much larger than some of the embodiments of the optical drive 100. The difference person includes: the transmission device of the transmission arm 102 is positioned, the second and second systems are operated in a rotating manner around the axis 2G0, and the front is in focus, and the shaft 2G4M-bending operation is performed. Furthermore, this axis ^ scale device ^

The 22$ department and the transfer will set the hand to save money. Correction, since then ^ 铋 兀 兀 (0pU) 103 received signals Ar, R, G, Dr, E 迸 = according to whether the optical pickup unit (GpU) 1G3 is placed in this optical = 102 - pre-master The control portion or one of the optical media 1 〇 2 can be written differently. Finally, these signal people, also, G, α, 艮 = can be different in one take operation and one write operation. ^ In general, the design is made up of a cumbersome and relatively large custom design. If the transmission arm is just introduced, the system can be "

'For example' problems related to structural resonance. Usually 'mechanical this size adjustment' is such that the resonant frequency can be increased as the size is reduced: the focus drive and the seek drive in the transmission arm 104 are in the arm of the transmission, if so, in the conventional design In other words, the it transmission and the seek drive train are more orthogonal and shameless. In addition, all of the optical system towels in this time may be coupled to each other in a large number between the optical pickup unit and the focus measurement. Therefore, this Weinu 12 () must = the width of the staff as strong as possible, the borrower is here to practice the mechanical resonance of the hand, and turn to the mechanical and optical to interact with each other. Moreover, due to the reduced bandwidth in the optical disc drive 100, the system ^ 106 1277079 learns media _ this aircraft blue and light different optical media / accurate, so it is complicated between different optical disc players.曰* 动 系 交 交 交 交 交 交 交 交 交 交 交 交 交 交 交 交 交 交 交 交 交 交 交 交 交 交 交 交 交 交 交 交 交 交 交 交 交 交 交 交 交 交 交 交 交 交 交The 100-removal's disc drive system is similar to the conventional one. In a class of limitations, however, this control system such as the =6 pack digital feeding system. A digital feeding system, which has a higher capacity to perform control of the system. 1: 70 positive servo loops in which the servo system 120 is coupled to the drive garment. 4, the optical pickup unit ( 〇PU) 103, this rotating motor dish, ^ this light 〒, when the body is 1〇2, it forms the place where the price is measured by the system. — The full touch of the Green Face is limited by the ability of the code, the memory storage for storing data and code, and the capabilities of the processor. The embodiment of the service system 12 can be operated in a more severe environment presented by the optical disk drive 1 and the optical disk drive 100 can also include an error recovery procedure. Embodiments of the optical disc drive 100 having a small external size can be applied to a portable device, and thus are subject to severe mechanical shocks and temperature changes, all of which may affect reliable retrieval of data from the optical media 102 ( For example, ··Music materials) or, in part of the real 107 1277079 system learning 1 joy. (4) Errors back to find the track of the angry sister (four) structure of the hair _ dew, and fiff · dew. Moreover, since the optical disk drive is just the same, it is a part of the embodiment of the feeding service system 120. The invention is disclosed in the disclosure of the invention of the rotary motor ship system, and the invention of the rotary motor ship system is disclosed in the disclosure of the present invention.

[Exemplary embodiment of a CD player controller]

The second diagram shows one of the embodiments of the controller 1 〇 6 according to the present invention. The optical signal is received by the optical pickup unit (〇pu) 1〇3 (please refer to the second figure B to the second figure D). As described in the foregoing FIG. 2B, the second figure c and the second figure D, some embodiments of the optical capturing unit (OTU) 1〇3 include a factory detecting device, wherein the detecting device 225 is Including detecting device arrays 231, =2, and 233 to provide device signals ~, Cr, and Er, respectively; and detecting clothing, 226 includes detecting arrays 234, 235, and 236 to provide respectively The device signals BR, DR, and FR are detected. Moreover, some embodiments of the optical pickup unit (0PU) 103 include: a laser power detecting device 250 that is configured to receive reflected light from an annular reflecting device 252 placed on the surface of the periscope 210, as before Said, and thus together, a laser power signal LPr. ^ ^ The detection device signal received by the optical pickup unit (0PU) 103 is a current signal. Therefore, the "from the optical pickup unit (OPU) 103, etc., is converted to a voltage signal in a pre-amplification device 31A. The pre-amplification device 310 includes an impedance transition amplifying device for converting a current signal to a voltage signal. Moreover, the preamplifier device 31 generates a high frequency (HF) signal based on the signals from the detecting device from the optical pickup unit (〇PU) 103. This high frequency (HF) signal can be applied to 108 1277079 as the data signal, and can be summed by analog signals from this optical pickup unit (〇pu) i〇3 (the signals Av, Bv, Cv in the third picture A) , Dv, Ev, and Fv) are formed. FIG. 3B is a block diagram showing an embodiment of the pre-amplification device 3i. The pre-amplification device 310 includes: an array of impedance filter amplifying devices, such as the amplifying devices 311, 312 in the third FIG. 313, 314, 315, 316, and 317. The amplifying means 311 receives the laser power signal LPR from the optical pickup unit (〇pu) 1〇3, and the amplifying means 312 to 317 receive the signal AR from the optical pickup unit (OPU) 103, respectively. To FR. In some embodiments, the respective signals AR to FR and the laser power signal lpr are current signals from the detection devices 225, 226, and 250 of the optical pickup unit (OPU) 103. These Lu amplification devices 311 to 317 output voltage signals Lpv, av, Bv, Cv, respectively.

Dv, Ev, and Fv. The gains of the respective amplifying devices 311 to 317, (7) to (7), can be set via the gain conversion 318. The gain conversion 318 can receive a write/read gain switch that indicates a read or a write condition and can adjust the gains 01 through 07 of the amplifying means 3HS317 accordingly. In some embodiments, the gain conversion 318 is a gain selection and a FWD sensing device that receives the respective gains G1 through G7. In some embodiments, the gains G1 & G2 are the same and the gains G3 to G6 are the same. In some embodiments, the gains (7) through (9) are approximately one-half of the gains G1 and G2. Since the laser power required for a write operation is much larger than the laser power of a read operation, the gains G1 to G7 can be set to a high level for a read operation and for a write operation. Set to a lower level. In some real k cases, the gain conversion 318 is based on the write/read gain switching setting, thereby outputting one of a plurality of (for example, two) preset gains of the respective gains G1 to G7. The summing device 319 receives the signals from the amplifying devices 31'2 to 93=, respectively, into the ¥, :^, <^, 〇¥%, and ? ¥, and output a differential high frequency (book) = number. In some embodiments, the differential high frequency (HF) signal is the sum of the analogities of the signals v Bv, Cv, Dv, Ev, & FV. The differential high frequency (Hp) 109 1277079 signal indicates all of the light returned by the optical medium (please refer to the first figure), and thus includes, in a reading, the actual read by the optical medium 102 data. In some embodiments, a pre-amplification device 308 can include: summing devices 331-336 that receive output signals from the amplification devices 312-317, respectively, and offset the amplification devices 312-317, respectively. The output values are reference voltages VREF6, VREF5, VREF4, VREF3, VREF2, and VREF1. In some embodiments, the reference voltages VREF1 through VRD4 are the same, and VREF5 is the same as VREF6. Immediately thereafter, the input signal of the differential summing device 319 is the output signal from the addresses 331 to 336 and the output signal from the amplifying means 311. As shown in FIG. 3A, the voltage signals φ LPV, Av, Bv, Cv, Dv, Ev, Fv from the preamplifier 310 and the high frequency (HF) signals from the preamplifier 31 are a control chip. 350 input signal. The control chip 350 can be a digital and analog signal processor chip that digitally performs operations on the input signals Av, Bv, Cv, Dv, Ev, Fv, HF, and LPV to control the actuator arm 104 ( The transmission of the first figure), the laser power of the laser 218 (second figure B), and the motor speed of the axial motor 101 (first figure). The control chip 350 can also operate on the high frequency (HF) signal to obtain read data and communicate data and instructions to a host (not shown). In some embodiments, the control chip 350 can be an ST microelectronic 34 - 00003-03. The laser power signal LPv is further transmitted to the laser servo system 105 along with a write/read command. , which indicates a read or a write operation. In some embodiments, the laser servo system 105 is an analog servo loop for controlling the power output of the laser 218 of the optical pickup unit (0PU) 103. In some embodiments, the laser power is It can also be included in a digital servo loop that is controlled by the control chip 35〇. The laser power of this laser 218 is for a write operation ^ high level ' and low for a read operation. The laser servo system 1〇5, then 'maintains the power of the laser 218, according to the control chip 35〇, the laser write 110 1277079, the low power of the input/read power control signal: analogy _ _ Technique (2) ^ Ray can also be a number of side service system, the control chip 350 is further coupled to a resource, 2, from this host and a program memory 33 (). This style: and Cheng Xi 1 = by f to perform control focus and seek function, laser power J horse, speed red ship function. The 纽 辟 | | 可以 可以 可以 可以 可以 可以 可以 可以 可以 可以 可以 可以 可以 可以 二 二 二 二 二 二 二 二 二 二 二 二 二 二 二 二 二 二 二 二 二 二 二 二 二 二 二 二 二 二 二 二 二 二 二 二In the embodiment

The system is used up and stopped when the data buffer memory 320 is full. The control chip 350 is capable of energizing the mechanical components of the optical disk drive 100. =^12() ' ·卩' The mechanical part 107 is assigned. In the case of the mouth P, the control chip 35 is a low power device capable of operating at a small current. Therefore, control focus and miscellaneous

The coil 206 and the control voltage are input to a power drive =,: the power drive 340 system outputs the required current, thereby achieving focus and tracking functions via the focus transmission 206 and the seek transmission 201. . In some embodiments, as previously described, the focus actuator 2〇6 and the tracking drive 2〇1 are sonar coil motors that are mounted on the surface of the actuator arm 1〇4, thereby enabling the tracking drive 201 The optical pickup unit (〇ρυ) 1〇3 can be moved over the obstruction of the optical medium 102, and the focus transmission arm 1〇4 flexes the transmission arm 104 to achieve the optical pickup unit (〇pu ) 1〇3 and the distance between optical media 1〇2. The driving device 340 can also supply current to drive the shaft motor 1〇1. The shaft motor 1〇1 provides sensing device data to a servo system, and can also be adapted to the optical pickup unit (OPU) 1 The search position of 〇3, so that the speed of the spindle motor 101 can be related to the obstinacy. In some embodiments, the data speed 111 1277079 ^ is controlled by the fine horse! Here the optical ratchet unit (〇ρυ) ι 〇3j The speed of this optical medium_2, in order to maintain the number of rides. Controlling one of the shafts and two JL feeding system is further described in the invention of the rotary motor feeding system. Furthermore, the power driving device 34〇 According to the control chip 35, the control-card_out motor and the flash line tube 37 can be used. The card ejecting motor 360 erects and disassembles the optical medium 1〇2 to the shaft motor. The lock solenoid 370 provides a fixed flash lock whereby the optical pickup unit (^OPU) 10^3 does not contact the optical medium 1〇2 during non-operating conditions.

The system 300 can include: a power monitoring device and a voltage rectifying device. This power monitoring device 3_ provides information relating to the transmission 350 power source. If there is a power interruption, the control chip 350' can be reset via the power monitoring device 38, for example. The voltage rectifying means 390 provides power to drive the laser 218, and the control wafer 350 and the preamplifier 310, based on an on/off indication from the control wafer 350. The spindle motor 10, such transmissions 2〇6 and 2 (H, the cassette ejection motor 360, and the latching solenoid 37) can directly apply power via the input voltage.

The fourth figure shows an embodiment of the control wafer 350 of this control system. The embodiment of control wafer 350 shown in FIG. 4 includes a microprocessor 432 and a digital # processor (DSP) 416. Since the digital signal processor (DSP) 416 operates faster than the microprocessor 432 but has a lower overall capability (eg, code and data storage space), in some embodiments, an instant digital servo system The algorithm can be executed by the digital signal processor (DSP) 416, while other control functions and correction algorithms can be executed by the microprocessor 432. The control structure of one of the embodiments of the control chip 350, and the interaction between the digital signal processor (DSP) 416 and the microprocessor 432 are further discussed in the disclosure of the system architecture. The control chip 350 is preamplified from the device 310 (refer to the third figure 112 1277079 to receive the voltage signals Av, Ev, Cv, Bv, Fv, Dv, certificate, and LPv. U Tiger Av, Ev, Cv, Bv, Fv And Dv are input to offset blocks 402-1 to 402-6, respectively. These offset blocks 402-1 to 402-6 are for each input signal.

Av ^Ev, Cv, Bv, Fv, and Dv provide a variable offset. The value of this offset is defined and can be set via one of the routines performed in the microprocessor 432 or the digital signal processor (DSP) 416, which is discussed further below. In some embodiments, the offset values can be set such that when the power of the laser 218 is turned off, the output signals from the respective offset blocks 402-1 to 402-6 can be 〇, that is, : An undercurrent correction. In some embodiments, the effect of light scattering in the ΪΪΪ extraction unit may also be subtracted in such offset blocks 402-1 through 402-6. The sSH loading digital if404 6 is enhanced by one of the microprocessors 432 or the digital k#, the processor (DSP) 416t performs one of the correction embodiments, and the variable IS is loaded with 410-1 to 4K ίΐ Set 'By the analog to digital converter error. - The movement __ is substantially completely, and the offset blocks 402-1 to 402-6 and these variable units Cv Bv, Fv and Dv are different. Re-media can be:: 舆 change (except that only the 贱 master and writable person can enter the step to cause different offsets and gain settings) The light on the surface of the device, the detection device changes to the measurement " 彳贝娜装置Drift, or may create part of the 113 1277079 3 (〇PU) 103, the output signal of the detection device is generated by the rational output # #u any other factor. Various correction and return devices can be operated in the microprocessor 432 and the digital signal processor 416 to respectively offset the blocks 402-1 to 402-6 and above the different regions of the optical media 2 The effective values of the respective offset and gain values of the enthalpy variable gain amplifying device 404-6 will be further explained below. "

Therefore, in some embodiments, the offset blocks 4〇2 to ―6 and the variable gain amplifying devices 404_ are offset and gain values can be used in the optical capturing unit. (1) When PU)1()3 is positioned to move over the optical medium 102, the processor 432 and the digital signal processor (Dsp) are π2, and the second is changed. In some embodiments, the microprocessor 432 And the digital processing state (DSP) 416 monitors the offset and gain values of the offset blocks 4〇2_1 to 402-6 and the variable gain amplifying devices 404-1 to 404-6. The optimum value for dynamically maintaining these offset and gain values is a function of the position of the optical operation unit (Qpu) 1〇3 above the optical medium 102. In some embodiments, these offset and gain values are set in a correction algorithm. In the case of the scalpel, the offset values of the 荨 offset blocks 402-1 to 4〇2-6 are determined so that the dynamic range of the individual input signals is centered on 〇. Moreover, the gains of the variable gain amplifying means 404 - U4 〇 4-6 are set to fill the dynamic range of the analog-to-digital converters 410-1 to 410-6, thereby reducing the i-disaster. In some embodiments, the gain of the variable gain amplifying means 4 〇 4 - 1 404 - 6 can be adjusted in the routine of error recovery, please refer to the invention of the ft? In some embodiments, the gains of the variable gain amplification devices 404-1 through 404-6 can be optimized via continuous performance monitoring, please refer to the invention disclosed in the servo system calibration. The output signals from the variable gain amplifying devices 4〇4 to 1404-6 are input to the anti-aliasing filter and wave devices 406-1 to 406-6, respectively. These anti-aliasing chopping devices 406-1 to 406-6 are low pass filtered | set to avoid the ore tooth 114 1277079 image. In some embodiments, the output signals from each of the anti-aliasing filtering devices 4-6 to 6 (6) are input to an analog digital converter. In other embodiments, a finite number of analog digital converters are utilized. In some embodiments, the output signals of the anti-aliasing filtering devices 406-1 to 406-3 are input to the evening working device 408-1, and from the anti-aliasing filtering devices 4〇6_4 to 4〇6 — The output signal of 6 is input to the multiplexer 4〇8-2. The high frequency (HF) nickname from the preamplifier 310 (please refer to FIG. 3A) can be input to the equalization device 418. The equalizer 418 is operative to equalize the high frequency (10) money by a function of the conversion function side to correct the systematic error in reading, processing and processing data from the optical medium 1〇2. In the portion I, the equalizing device 418 operates as a bandpass filtering device. The output signal from this = the garment set 418 is input to an amplifying device 42A. The output signal from the magnifying garment 420 can be input as one of the four inputs of the multiplexer 4〇8. The laser power signal LPV can be input to a multiplex device 436, where the FFT signal is multiplexed with other signals that may need to be digitized, and then the output signal of the multiplexer 436 is applied. The system can be entered as the fourth loser without Jf2. It will be apparent to those skilled in the art that the multiplexer 436 can be omitted if signaled. Recount: Han i crying skills: Although it is clear that the invention can be applied to any number of analogies ΐϊ ίίΓ can multiplex processing any number of signals, by analog analog to digital converter. The specific embodiment shown in the text only i converts i=b f Λ Λ 4 8 — 之 之 之 ί ί ί ί ί ί ί ί ί ί ί ί ί ί ί ί ί ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; Such ratios are more than digital conversions i (ADC = 8 - 1 to 478 - 4, and 縦 縦) 410''2 including temporary storage devices 478-5 to 478 1277079 - 8. Moreover, the multiplexers 406-1 and 408-2 and the analog-to-digital conversions (ADC) 410-1 and 410-2 are coupled to a clock to determine the multiplexer 408 from the multiplexer 408. The signal of 1 and 408-2 is currently digitizing 'and therefore' the digitization result of the temporary storage devices 478-1 to 478-4 should be stored. In some embodiments, the analog-to-digital converters 41, 1 and 410-2 may be, for example, a 1-bit converter that samples at a rate of about 26 MHz, and each sample is These are obtained by different inputs of one of the multiplex devices 4〇8-1 and 408-2 respectively. In some embodiments, the analog-to-digital converters (ADCs) 410-1 and 410-2 may be one of the other signals (eg, the laser power signal LPv or the output signal from the amplifying device 420). At a higher rate, the output signals from these anti-aliasing filtering devices 4〇6-1 to 4〇6-6_ are sampled. In some embodiments, for example, the analog to digital converters (ADCs) 410-1 and 410-2 can be sampled from one of the anti-aliasing filtering devices 4〇6 at an effective sampling rate of about 6.6 ΜΗζ. -1 to 406-6 each output signal. The end of the analog-to-digital conversion ^§410-1 and 410-2 digital signals, then become digital and equalized high frequency signals (HFd), digitalized laser power signals LPd, and digital detection Device signals Ad, Private, Cd, Bd, Fd, and Dd. The digital laser power signal LPd is input to the digital signal processor (DSP) 416 and can be applied to a digital servo loop to control the laser power and determine the gain and offset values of the different components. Alternatively, the digital signal processor (DSP) 416 or microprocessor 432 can monitor the digital laser power signal LPd to determine the error condition. σ This digital HF number (HFd) can be input to the focus completion device (F〇K) 41^, which outputs two signals to the digital signal processor (Dsp) 416 and the microprocessor 432' indicates whether or not the focus is Located within a useful range. These devices 225 and 226 are estimated to allow light to be dissipated on the side of the device when the optical pickup unit (〇pu) 1〇3 is severely out of focus. Therefore, the focus completion device (FOK) 412 determines whether the overall surface of the detection devices 225 and 226, 116 1277079, is higher than the indication-close focus condition, to complete the critical value. In the adjacent application, this function can also be implemented in software instead of hardware. γ 二焦完装置/FOK) The critical value of 4丨2 can be the result of a fixed-and-forward method. In some embodiments, the critical value of the JFOK 412 can be related to the media type of the optical media 102 for the optical 撷 (OPU) 103 above.

These digital homing signals Ad, Ed, Q, Bd, & and are input to the sampling filter 414-α 414-6. These sampling filtering devices = 1 to 414-6 are (four) wave devices, "down sampling to digital side devices are numbered Ad, Ed, Cd, Bd, Fd, and Dd to output signals Af, Ef, Cf, 仏, F : and Df, which are input to this digital signal processor (Dsp) 416. In the example, for example, the respective signals Af, Ef, Cf, Bf, Q, and 2 are effectively sampled by the analog converters 410-1 and 410-2 at 6.6. These sampling filters: 41-1 to 414-6 can then downsample the output signals Af, Ef, Cf, Bf, Ff, and Df to, for example, about 7 。. Embodiments of the equal sampling filtering devices 414-1 through 414-6 can downsample to any sampling rate', for example, from about 26 ΚΗζ to about 6.6 MHz.

The down-sampling effects in these sample filtering devices 414-1 through 414-6 include an average of several samples on each of the numbers Ad, Ed, Cd, Bd, Fd, and Dd. This averaging k provides a low-pass function and provides higher accuracy signals Af, Ef, Cf, Bf, Ff, and Df, which are successively captured by the digital signal processor (Dsp) and applied to further In the calculation. In some embodiments, this accuracy is effectively increased by the 10-bit output signal of the analog-to-digital converters (eight) 〇〇41〇一1 and 41〇一2 to 13 bits. Here, the data signal of the south frequency (HF) signal can be located at a high frequency (for example, several MHz), but the servo information is located at a frequency lower than this. In some embodiments, the transmission arm 1〇 4 mechanical transmissions 206 and 201 can be varied in the range of hundreds of Hz, which can lead to data in the tens of KHz range, rather than the number of optical data in the mhz range 117 1277079. Again, this transmission The mechanical resonance of the device arm 104 may be invented in the tens of KHz range. Therefore, the downsampling effectively filters out the high frequency portion of the spectrum, which is also an uninteresting part of the servo feedback system. Furthermore, a cleaner The more accurately assembled digital servo signals Af, Ef, Cf, Bf, Ff, and Df are obtained by averaging performed in the sample filtering devices 416-1 through 416-6, respectively. In some embodiments, this Equal sampling filter The sets 416-1 through 416-6 can be programmed with the microprocessor 432 or the digital signal processor (DSP) 416 to set the output frequency, filtering characteristics, and sampling rate. In particular, the optical medium 102 is here. One of the oscillating signal signals of about 125 kHz in the track of the surface of the writeable portion 151 is slightly modulated by one of the physical tracks in this area. This oscillating system can be passed through the sampling filtering means 414 - 1 to 414 The filtering steps provided in 6 are filtered out from these signals Af, Ef, Cf, Bf, Q, and Df. This transmission arm 1〇4 does not respond to the control workload in this frequency range. A steady frequency at 5 〇〇mhz laser power from the modulation device 219 (please refer to the second figure B), which is provided by the sampling filter device 1 2 3 4H-1 to -5 The filtering step is filtered and removed from the signals, Ef, Cf, Bf, Ff, and Df. For the purpose of feeding, only the lower frequency regions of such nicknames are important. Then, these signals A,

tfUf, Ff, and _ include only the sensor noise and actual interference, and can be followed by, for example, the operation of the actuator arm. Such interference may include: due to the physical change in the I 118 1 t in the master program, due to the impediment, it will not be perfectly placed. In addition, the optical media 102 may not be flat, and the optical media 102 may not be flat. Finding = = 3, servo system tracking laser power and shaft speed production 1 service 2, 4 follow these errors. Furthermore, the lion of the newspaper, one (10) ◊疋锝 度, can also be 5 enough to respond to the frequency range of the error to be found: "Spectrum response can make the tracking and focus environment if 匕 then the feeding system is located The physical abuse and the limit of the ring-worn component 1277079 or during the life of the optical disk drive 100 or the optical media 102, the resonant frequency characteristics and the axis motor 101, the optical media 102, and the transmission arm 104 are changed. Response characteristics. A servo system according to the present invention should be relatively insensitive to such changing conditions. "The digital output signals Ad, Ed, cd, Bd, Fd, and Dd are further input to a summing device 438. . The summing device 438 can be a collapsible refining device whereby the input-specific combinations Ad, Ed, ed,

Dd is enough to apply. The summing device 438 adds a selected set of signals, C, Bd, Fd, and Dd to form a digital version of the high frequency (Hp) signal. The output signal from the summing device 438 is multiplexed in a multiplexer 441 and a multiplexer 443 with a digital south frequency jg5 tiger (HPd) output from such a digital converter (adc) 1. A high frequency (hf) selection, the signal is input to each of the multiplex devices 441 and 443, thereby selecting the digital high, the signal (HFd) or the output device 438 output signal is selected as the temple 441 And the output signal of 443. The output signal of the multiplex device 输入I is input to an interference detecting device 440. The interference detecting device 44 detects the defect of the surface of the optical medium 102 by monitoring the digital high frequency signal (HF or the data signal represented by the output device 438), and warns the digital signal processing state. (DSP) 416 has a defect. A defect includes scratches or dust particles on one of the surfaces of the optical medium 102. The defect result is confirmed to be a sharp protrusion in the input signal. In some embodiments, the interference detection The device 44 can include a low pass filtering device. The interference signal of the interference detecting device 44 is low pass filtered, and the filtered signal is compared with an unfiltered input signal. A pre-set defect threshold signal is provided with a defect flag. The defect flag can be input to the digital signal processor (DSp) 416 or the microprocessor 432. The output signal from the multiplex device 443 is also input to A mirror detecting device 442. The mirror detecting device 442 provides a signal similar to the seek error signal (TES) but with a phase difference of 90 degrees. The digital signal processor (Dsp) 119 1277079 Mirror 々 signal ' can be combined with the motion of the digital signal processor to find the error signal (TES), determine the positive (four) search error signal (TES) system - sine Wave, whose indication is in the presence of - ^ i ^ - the beating of the beating. If a tracking system is trying to find the zero crossing of the Ϊ劈1, the thief will use this transmission to the side. Zhong Rong's signal lacking 01 system is received in a plus total device 444, which is used in the middle of the field V 〒 二再者' signal 仏 and the system received in a plus total device 446 L dream Dd. From this plus The total device 444 and the secret transmission = number are input to the summation attack 448, which obtains the difference between the two, and the λ force of one of the seek error signals (tes) of the output signal of the clamp detecting device The output signal of the device 448 is input to a bandpass chopper to be installed in the output signal system PushPullBP of the tribute filter device 450. 452. The signal is sent to the L-low-pass filter, and the wave device f is set to 454 ί ίίΐ\52 The output signal is input to the track-crossing detection device 4, and the total device 448 calculates the search error signal (TES). Γμ子; ^ single 7 ° (0 Ρυ) 103 through the surface of the optical media 102 to the detection device 454 output signal system track zero: again (,) seven 5 tiger, input to the digital signal processor (DSP) 416. This low-pass chopping error signal (TES) is (〇pu) m^Z2ft = column as the eye of the second picture! ^. A search error signal ϊί It/"1 crossover ° _, in the partial real towel, this obedience is more than the clothing set = 54 system can be as long as the tracking error signal (TES) crosses the zero point (which will generate two pulses for each crossover) Tao, she thanked, this ruling pays ^^ (TES) >, the male 迥田针手令点父, the time will produce a pulse. 120 1277079 This signal PushPullBP can be input to a wobble/pre-marked detector 428. In some embodiments, in the writable portion of the optical medium 〇2, in the track, the track system includes a predetermined swing of one of the different frequencies, which is caused by deliberate modulation of one of the track positions. . In some embodiments, the swing frequency of the 'PushPullBP' is within the range of 1 οοκΗζ (in some embodiments, 125 ΚΗζ) and is therefore operated as a low-pass filter device at 7 〇. The sample filtering means 414-1 to 414-6 are filtered by the signals Af, Ef, Cf, Bf, Ff, and D. The band-passing device can be set to pass the seek error signal (Ding Eg) at this frequency, so that the detecting device 428 can detect the wobble in the track.

The oscillating frequency from the detection device 428 is indicative of the rotational speed of the spindle motor 101. Furthermore, the axis speed from one of the spindle motors 101 itself is directly input to the processing processor 432 and the digital signal processing cry (DSP) 416. Furthermore, the signal from the gain 420 can be input to the slice ^ ^ 422, the digital phase locked loop (DPLL) 424, and the synchronous marker measuring device: a straw to provide a third indication of the speed of the spindle motor. The slicing apparatus 2 is based on the input-number reading from the equalizing means 418 and the amplifying means 42. The (4) device 424 indicates that the -threshold value = one of the high-level states of the input k-number, and one of the low-level states of the input signal below a threshold value. The digital phase-locked loop (DpLL) 426 is a digital phase lock circuit that is basically a shirt, pulse-to-readback signal, thereby enabling the present invention to detect the synchronization of the track. The sync mark detecting means 426, then, is a signal related to the position between the _step marks, thereby indicating that the axis is recognized by each of the speed indicators can be input to - 彡 reading 43G, the output thereof The microprocessor 432 is selected to indicate the rotational speed of the spindle motor 1〇1. The f* microprocessor 42 can select one of the multiplexer devices 430 to select which of the rotational speed measurements can be applied to a digital servo loop to control the rotational speed of the spindle motor 101. . 121 1277079 The microprocessor 432 and the digital signal processor (DSp) 416 are output control operations to the drive I set according to the first discussion signal from the transmission arm 1〇4 and the axial motor 101, In order to achieve the operation of this CD player. From this micro-processing is 432 - the control workload is output to a rotation control device 456 to provide a rotation control signal to the driving device 43 (refer to the third figure A), thereby controlling the axis driving device 1〇1 . The digital-feeding system on the microprocessor 2 or the ^-processor (DSP) 416 is further discussed in the disclosure of the rotary motor servo system. In some embodiments, as discussed further below, the micro-portion, 432-system output - coarse control workload to a sequence of interfaces 458. - in the case of a disc having a digital servo loop to control the laser power, j is derived from the microprocessor 432 or one of the digital signal processors (DSp) 416. The laser controls the digital analog converter to provide the laser signal to the laser servo system 1〇5 (see Figure A). a seek control signal, which in some embodiments is capable of controlling the workload, may be output by the microprocessor or the digital signal processor (DSP) 416 to a tracking digital analog converter 468. Hunting to provide a seek control signal to a power drive unit 34. A diagnostic number is converted to 466 and other diagnostic functions, such as the analog test bus 470, the digital test bus 472, and the diagnostic pulse width modulation (pwM), which are also included. Furthermore, a reference voltage generating means 462 can be included to provide a reference voltage to the number of ratio ratio converters 460, 464: 466, and 468. The microprocessor 432 and the digital signal processor (Dsp) 416 can communicate via = directly or via mail mailbox 434. In part implementation, the Digital Signal Processor (DSP) 416 operates from this microprocessor 432. The digital signal processor (DSp) 416, for example, is configured to perform the track and focus servo functions, and the microprocessor M2 provides information for monitoring and to a host computer or to a buffer memory 320. Transfer. Re-disc 122 1277079 This microprocessor 432 can provide error recovery and other functions. Embodiments of the control architecture are further discussed in the disclosure of the system architecture. The digital signal processor (DSP) 416, in some embodiments, processes only the seek and focus servo system, and the microprocessor 432 handles all of the higher order functions, including error recovery, user interface, The search and focus servo loop is turned off, the data transfer between the optical medium 102 and the buffer memory 320, and the data transfer, read and write operations, and operation correction between the buffer memory 320 and a host Function (including setting offset and gain values of the offset devices 402-1 to 402-6 and the amplifying devices 404-1 to 404-6 and such sampling filter devices 414-1 to 414-6 Operating parameters).

[Tracking and Focusing Servo Algorithm]

5A and 5B collectively show a block diagram of one of the embodiments of the seek, focus, and search calculus 500. The algorithm 500j shown in the fifth diagram a and the fifth diagram B can be, for example, a digital signal mainly processed in the fourth diagram as (DSP) 416. In some embodiments, the immediate seek and focus algorithm is implemented in a digital signal processor (DSP) 416, while other functions (including the positive and south-order arithmetic management) are performed on the micro-processing. 432. In some embodiments, the microprocessor 432 can also manage which algorithm is executed by the number processor (DSP) 416. The algorithm 500 includes a focus servo algorithm 501 and a seek algorithm 5〇2. Further algorithmic algorithms include a multi-execution search algorithm 557 and a single obedience beat algorithm 559. The focus servo algorithm 501, as shown in the fifth figure A and the fifth figure, includes: - the summing device 5 () 6, an offset summing device, the focus error ^ tiger (when fully closed) FES) gain device 5〇9, an inverse nonlinear correction algorithm 5n, a crossover summing device 513, a focus error signal (ρΈϋ integrity test device 515, low frequency integration device 516, a phase leading sound device) 5^, a notch filter, wave device 519, a focus-off summing device 521, and a feed-and-feed device 533 °. Similarly, the search feeding circuit 5〇2 is included when the king is closed. - Adding device (10), - Offset summing device 123 1277079 541, a seek error signal (TES) gain device 543, a tracking error (TES) inverse nonlinear correction algorithm 546, _ seek error signal (τΕ^ Sampling integrity test device 548, a low frequency filter device 549, a phase lead 550, notch filter devices 551 and 553, and a loopback 婵 女 女 再 再 此 此 此 此 此 此 此 此 此 此 此 此Detecting device biasing and detecting device gain correction 583. Accompanying this algorithm 500 The calibration procedure, and the like, will be further discussed below. As shown in block 503, the digitized and filtered signals Af, Ef, Cf, Bf, Ff, and D from the sample filtering means-6 are as shown in the fourth figure. For the purposes of discussion, these signals Af, Ef, Cf, Bf, Ff, and D are relabeled as A, E, C, B, F, and D, respectively, in the following diagram. Receive signals A, C, and E, and calculate a focus error signal (FES1) as: FES!= (a+CE) / (A+C+E) ^ As previously discussed in Figure II, J, signals A, C And the analogy of E. - Block 505 receives signals b, D, and F, and calculates a focus error signal (FES2) as · FES2 = (B + DF) / (B + D + F), as before The analogy of the signals A, C, and E discussed in Figure J. - The summing device 506 calculates the differential focus error signal (FES) as: fes = fes wide fes2 As discussed previously, the second figure L represents This focus error signal (FEs) is a function of the distance between the optical pickup unit (OPU) 103 and the optical medium 1 〇 2. As discussed previously, in some embodiments, further processing is possible. Performing such tracking error signal (TES) and focus error signal (FES), for example, to reduce crosstalk. + This focus error signal (FES) is input to an offset summing device 5〇7, which Adding a focus error signal (FES) offset from one of the offset corrections 508. The best position of the focus error signal (FES) curve (please refer to the second figure L), a servo system operates near this, in This may vary when applied to servo systems and when applied to 124 1277079 read or write operations. In other words, the optimal reading position may appear near one of the focus error signal (FES) curves, which is different from the optimum position for optimal servo operation. The focus error signal: Tiger (FES) offset correction 508, which inputs the peak-to-peak tracking error signal, (TES P - p) and a data jitter value, and outputs a focus error signal (FES) offset value. Further discussion is as follows.

The output signal from this offset summing device 507 is input to this focus error h (FES) gain device 5〇9. The gain of the focus error signal (FES) gain means 509 is used by the _ focus error signal (FES) gain correction algorithm 51 to determine the gain of the focus error signal (FES) gain means 5 〇 9 for this purpose, The output value of the 509 can be such that the focus actuator 2 〇 6 corresponds to a specific number of focus shifts. The correlation between the magnitude of the output signal from the gain device 5〇9 and the special stitching (10) of the optical pickup unit (qPU) 1G3 allows the setting of the critical value, which is used to determine the focus loop 5〇1 Yes, close enough to transfer information. The axis-step discussion is as follows. The focus error signal (FES) gain correction algorithm 51 can change the optical pickup order = (OPU) 103 and the distance between the optical media 1 and 2 and monitor the focus error signal.

The peak-to-peak value of =i^FES) is used to determine a suitable value for the gain of the focus error signal (FES) gain setting 509. In some embodiments, the gain of the focus error number (FES) gain device 5G9 may be fixed. Due to the correction gain of the focus error signal (FES) gain means 5 〇 9, the focus error signal output of the focus error signal (FES) gain means 509 can have a peak-to-peak value. From the focus of the amplified focus error signal (FES) from this focus: difference ( (FES) gain device 5〇9, the near-linear operating region. The focus servo algorithm 5〇1 is operated in this area, except that _ is sufficient to drive the focus out of the linear region between the optical discs and between the different optical media 102 f of the optical disc drive (two With the difference between any detection device and transmission response between the optical disc drives, /) right focus error from the focus error signal (FES) gain device 5〇9 125 1277079 'F (FES) round out can be normalized, Riding on the hairbee ^ This step allows the critical value to be struck on a particular vehicle or, in particular, 'set according to this amplified focus error signal: J ^Buyer Optical Media_2. In some embodiments, . Brother, this photon captures a single 〇 (〇PU) 1 〇 3 opposite to this optical media 1 〇 2 and the inter-peak motion system can correspond to a movement of about 1 〇 um. "Value, and, although the focus error signal (10) s) gain device lion 1 large focus error signal (FES) output system can be normalized to - shape, this class 1 take order 71 (0PU) 1G3 phase ^ * first The characteristic shift of the sub-media 102 'but this amplified focus error signal f can be nonlinear between these peaks. This focus error signal (Q) 1 non-linear device 511 is stored to remove this amplified focus error money ( f) the potential instability effect of the nonlinearity. In some embodiments, a correction 浑5j2 can be generated in relation to the slope of the focus error signal (FES), which is the value of the focus error signal (FES) offset. In the example, if a morning motion system occurs and the servo system is located at one of the different offset values of the focus error curve, the focus error signal (, σ) j nonlinear device 511 (4) assisting in quickly reacting to the vibration to restore the focus. In some embodiments, the focus error signal (FES) can be recorded, and the focus error signal is non-linearly set to 511 t of the focus error signal. (just by setting. In any case, The inverse t = the gain setting of the mounting 11 is based on this focus error signal (FES:) offset = set the operating point of the 'the mosquito's _5G1 in the rugged, error signal UES) curve. The output of the error signal (FES) inverse nonlinear device 511 is input to the "addition device 513. One of the predictions of the optical signal interaction with the scale error signal is here at the summing device 513 and thus the error signal (FES) Subtracted by this. The prediction correction is determined by the seek error signal batch) to the ♦ focus error # (FES) mutual-combination gain device 514. 126 1277079 to the poly-test signal (4)) In the case of the second knife, the system can determine the seek error signal (tes) to gather; η, the summation device 513 is generated by a tracking error signal (10)) u (fes) crosstalk gain correction algorithm 579 An insertion -1: (4) As discussed below, this correction algorithm 579 can be,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, The error signal (FES) is input to the summing device 513 to determine the use of this phase. Proportion of benefit device 514. A certain ratio of one of the rail error signals (TES) is subtracted from this sum 差 difference signal (FES). In some embodiments ί ratio (the gain indication of gain block 514) In the example, a search error signal (TES) to a focus error signal ΐ H string 曰 gain correction method 579 determines the gain block 514 of the increase ϋ匕 string θ gain correction algorithm 579 The discussion is as follows. In the second part, the gain of the benefit block 514 can be changed according to the type of ship currently having the light (QPU) 1 () 3 above, for example, a writable person or a pre-main path. The output signal from the crosstalk summing device 513 is input to a convergence error test device. The sharp peaks can occur in this focus error signal (FES), which includes: defects, dust, and mechanical shock in the dry media 102. This nickname occurs as a dramatic change in one of the typical focus error signals (FES) detected by the integrity test device 515. In some embodiments, such ^

I is at the level of 10 to 500 / / s. In many instances, obtaining a & focus error signal (FES) can indicate that one of the actuator arms 1 〇 4 is significantly slow, which is physically impossible. This response to this focus servo algorithm 5〇1 100 may be unfavorable in response to such an infrequent input, since the service algorithm 501 has a - response and then reverts to the amount of time that normal operation may take. Therefore, the integrity device 515 "tests" such a signal in J 127 1277079 = difference signal (FES) and removes this signal by filtering, thereby causing the focus servo algorithm 5〇1 to ignore it. Thus, the integrity testing device 515 inputs a defect signal, which may be a defect signal output by the interference detecting device 44 of the fourth figure. Basically, this integrity is received when a defect signal is received. The test device 515 generates a low pass filtered version of the focus error signal (FES) to replace the defective spread signal (FES). In some embodiments, a defect flag can be applied each time a defect occurs. Set, in order to enable the error recovery when experiencing too many defects that would cause the filtered focus error signal (FES). The focus servo algorithm may be caused by low-pass filtering focus error signal (FES) over a long period of time. Phase 501, boundary problem, which may affect the stability of the disc drive. In some embodiments, the sample integrity test device 515 may have a low pass filtered focus error signal at its input. FES), and subtracting the filtered focus error signal (FES) from the received input 焦 吴 吴 差 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 The filtered focus error signal (FES) is output by the integrity test device 515 instead of the input focus error signal (FES) and a defect flag setting or when a defect counting device is incremented. Too many defects can be communicated to an error recovery algorithm. Please refer to the invention of the system architecture. In some embodiments, the change in focus error signal (fes) between adjacent periods can be monitored. If this change, The measurement is based on the difference of the focus error signal (FES) of the current period and the previous period, and is greater than a critical value, and the low-pass filtered focus error signal (FES) is outputted by the integrity test system. Rather than when the focus error signal (FES) and a defect are set or when the defect counting device is incremented, in some embodiments, the focus error signal (FE phantom integrity test device 515) The focus can be disabled. The focus error signal (FES) sample integrity test device 515, in some embodiments, can occur during focus acquisition so that the focus servo algorithm 501 can better respond to transients. Current 128 Ϊ 277079 In some embodiments, this gather error signal (fes) sample integrity set 515 can be disabled during the multi-channel search algorithm 557 and in the single = beat algorithm 559_. The focus error (FES) sample integrity test device 515 can be disabled during the following __read or write conversion. From this focus error signal (FES) sample integrity device 515 The signal is input to the tracking error signal (TES) completion side device 517. = The focus error signal (FES) output of the 70 integrity measurement device 515 is one of the absolute low-pass filtering (for example, the second-order low-pass of 2 Hz) version (FES), which is a tracking error signal (top) When the critical value is completed, then - the tracking error signal, (F曰ES) cannot be trusted. In reality, if the focus error signal (fes) is offset by 1 from its optimal focus value, then the tracking error signal ((TES) method 502 · _ is good, it is not what you want. Conversely, the 4 focal system has been shifted, making this tracking no longer reliable. Under these conditions, the Ming system can be energized-error-recovery algorithm, please disclose the invention of the county structure. In some embodiments of the present invention, the low pass filtered focus error signal is strong (Hi is t to - search trap device 59G. This search notch filter is set to 590 system adjustments when performing a multiple track search operation, Filtering removes the signal at the crossover frequency. Even if the summing device 513 has a track error signal, the (TES) to focus error signal (FES) are coupled to each other, and all the seek error signals (TES) are It will be filtered out from this focus error signal (FES), especially during a multi-track search operation. Therefore, this wave 590 is shot in the _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ (FES) filtering removes more tracking error nicknames ( The TES) smart focus error signals (FES) are mutually coupled. When not energized, the notch filter device 590 does not perform the filtering step, and the output signal of the filtering device 59〇 matches the input signal of the filtering device 590. "Children', 129 1277079 The focus error signal (FES) output by the fe-wave filter device 590 can be input to the low-frequency integration device 516. This low-missing device provides the gain of the step-step at the low frequency of the opposite high frequency. Since the focus transmission 2〇6 should respond to the response, as previously described, the system occurs at a low frequency, and there is a large incentive in the focus feeding circuit 5〇j to increase the gain at the low frequency and increase the weight here. The feed response of the equal frequency. In order to further increase the low frequency, in some embodiments, the low frequency integration device 516 can be a -1 low frequency integration device. The integration device provides frequency, disturbance (such as: DC ( Additional error, rejection capability of DC) bias, external shock, and vibration. An example transfer function of this low frequency integration device 516 is shown in Figure 5. This low frequency integration device 516, for example, is a special spirit. Sensitive to frequencies less than about 100 Hz, thereby providing a response for frequencies less than 1 Hz. The output signal from the integrating device 516 is input to a phase leader 518. This phase leader 518 provides phase boundaries or damping to this point. a system whereby the stability and transient current response are improved. In some embodiments, for example, the phase leading device 518 can be sensitive to frequencies greater than about 5 kHz. Again in some embodiments of the invention The integrator 516 can be disabled during focus = to allow the focus servo system algorithm 5〇1 to respond better to transient current effects during a focus acquisition procedure. An example transfer function of one of the phase lead devices 516 is shown in the fifth figure. In some embodiments, the low frequency integrating means 516 and the phase leading compensation means 518 can be implemented using a second order filtering means instead of a first order filtering means. A second-order low-frequency integration device, compared to a first-order integration device, provides more accurate gain to provide better error rejection. In addition, a second-order phase leading compensation device provides an increased phase advance and phase boundary at this servo open loop bandwidth compared to a first-order phase leading compensation device. In addition, this second-order phase-lead compensation device results in less high-frequency amplification than a first-order phase-leading device with the same number of phase advances at the crossover. The output signal from the phase leading device 518 can be input to a notch 130 1277079 °. The notch device 519 is used to perform the focus feeding method 501, and will be able to be in the CD player. (For example, in arm 1〇4) the signal that arouses the frequency of the mechanical resonance plus two words: the notch wave device may include: any number; ^ device-like = the focus error signal output by the leading device 518 (fes) centering the °m wave device 519 is to be stunned, and the number of the ship's ship (10) 4 is over 遽 = ', in some embodiments of the transmission arm 104 occurs at 6KHz nearby. The wheeling signal from the notch filter device 519 is input to a 52-plus summing device 521 for further receiving a signal from a focus-closing device. The focus closure device 535 provides a servo control workload to the servo loop 501 during operation. In some embodiments, the focus closure 535 provides a focus-focusing signal summed with the output signal from g9. In some embodiments, this focus is operated by the focus actuator 20 (10) to move the optical pickup element (OPU) 103 away from the optical disc for the first time, and then the optical pickup (OPU) 103 is moved. Go back to the disc until a focus error signal is obtained (f, after which, the stagnation of the squad is constant. ##This focus is obtained at this bias, and the control is held constant, the ship algorithm 5 ^ The focus error signal (FES) measured by these values A, C, E, B, D, and F: and therefore the closed loop (which has a variation in the focus error signal, thereby being applied to the focus drive The focus control of the device 2〇6 produces a corresponding correction.) The output signal from the summing device 521 is then input to an augmentation device 522. The loop gain device 522 applies a gain, and the design is determined. In this embodiment, the open loop bandwidth is set to about 1 5K^zj ^ to represent the open loop frequency response of the overall servo loop (including ··Optical 撷ς 131 1277079 unit (OPU) I I set i 〇 4, signal processing device, and deductive method π )) _ This focus loop gain correction calculation ^ 522 is introduced. Basically, generated in the sine wave generating device 528 A positive input to the summing device 533, thereby obtaining one of the focus control modulations, and measuring the focus error signal (FES)-modulation. The resulting response from the addition (4) is via the discrete Fourier transform J IL. 527 and discrete Fourier transform * (DFT) device 525 with the gain, positive and wide method 526 to monitor, fine-tuning the loop county amplification device 部分 increase in the example, the transfer function in L5KHz should be the same Raw, set a ^ 1 · 5 sine wave function to add to the device 523 and increase

ίΪίί* method 526 sets the gain of the loop material 524, and the integral gain of the l5Khz component of the signal outputted by the total device 521 is equal to the gain of the component of the signal output from the summing device 523.

The output signal from the loop gain device 524 is input to a multiplex device 531 which is accompanied by a low pass filtered version and a signal from a sample and hold (S/Η) circuit 530 formed in the filter device 529. . During normal operation, the multiplex device 531 is set to output the output signal of the loop gain device 524. Although most of the optical crosstalk is removed from the control workload signal of the summing device 513, there is still enough crosstalk to allow the optical pickup unit (0PU) 103 to straddle the optical media 1〇2. In the case of the channel, one of the control workloads can be present in the output signal of the loop gain device 524. In some embodiments, the seek operation is performed at a relatively high rate to produce a track crossing signal of a few KHz levels. Thus, during a seek operation, a low pass filtered version of the output signal from the loop gain device 524 can be replaced by a signal from the loop gain device 524. In some embodiments, the output signal from a sample and hold (S/Η) circuit 530 can be replaced by a signal from the loop gain device 524 via the multiplexer - 531. When the optical capture unit (0PU) 103 passes through multiple tracks, the effect of changing the focus error signal (fes) can then avoid translation to the optical pickup unit (〇pu) 1〇3 132 1277079 a corresponding movement. The error ί#%^ is from the cross-border (that is, the tracking number is the result of the multi-tools and the f-holding (s/h) circuit output is 冼曰兀 出 翰 翰 翰 翰 翰 翰 翰 翰 翰 翰 猎 猎抻 丁 H H H (4) through the single-obstacle bounce operation to maintain the iti system, ^ this multiplexed skirt 531 output signal ^ ^ into the focus digital analog converter (DAC) 464 (to & to 5, Then, the power driver 340 is added to the power supply device 340 to apply the current to provide the focus. Here, the output signal from the multiplexer 531 is set to 533. ^ 532 - output money plus total. This secret Peng 532 is the input signal from the multiplexed clothing set 531, and try to predict the optical pickup unit (〇 pu opposite to the normal movement of the optical media 012. For example In this case, the movement occurs because the optical medium 102 is not flat and the two surfaces of the optical medium change in a normal manner as the optical medium 102 rotates. Needless to say, therefore, a focus error signal (FES) having the same harmonic signal as the rotational rate of the optical medium 102 The feedforward loop 532 provides this, wave, number to the summing device 533, so that the control workload can: have this constant harmonic harmonic 彳 ^. In some embodiments, the feedforward loop 532 Responding to the multi-harmonic of any such normal motion of the optical pickup unit (OPU) 103, so that the calculation of the focus error signal (FES) does not have any harmonics. The signal is eight to determine whether this focus is Upon completion, the sum of all of the detection device signals A, C, E, B, D, and F is calculated in a summing device 534, and the resulting sum is input to a focus completion block 536. This focus is completed in block 536. Comparing the overall total 133 1277079 and using a focus error signal (FES) gain correction algorithm 510 to generate a focus critical value, and if the sum is greater than the focus critical value, indicating a focus completion condition. The sum is less than the focus threshold value, and a focus on signal is generated by a focus completion block 536. In some embodiments, the focus completion block 536 is only where the sum signal is dropped. After the focus threshold number reaches a certain period of time, it can indicate that the focus condition is turned on. This step can prevent a defect condition (for example, a dust particle) from causing the servo algorithm 501 to be out of focus (ie, open).

The output signal from the summing device 534 is also input to a defect detecting device 591. The defect detection device 591 monitors a high pass filtered sum signal to identify the presence of a media defect. In some embodiments, if the high pass filtering plus total signal exceeds a critical value, then a defect is indicated. In some embodiments, the defect detecting device 591 can determine whether the cross-talk is the laser power from the summed signal from the summing device 534 (for example, from read to write or by Write to read or in the spiral of previously written data) changes as a media defect^ result. In some embodiments, if the defect is apparently present for a long period of time (in which case it may be different from a media defect), then the absence of 591 will be, "pause".

The μΪ part of the real blue towel 'this miscellaneous_device 591 is paved for defects by the change of the dog in the sum a. The laser power is one of the signal-splitting, which may be wrongly turned into: defect. In the = knife _, a laser 祠 service control (four) can highlight the change in the laser power of the defect device. Whenever the defect detection device 591 is informed that a change = 'this deficiency can be delayed - time job (for example, about,) t ^ 糟 , 许 许 , , 591 591 591 591 591 591 Low-pass ϊ ΐ ΐ ί 信号 信号 信号 信号 信号 信号 信号 信号 信号 信号 信号 信号 信号 信号 信号 信号 信号 信号 信号 信号 信号 信号 信号 信号 信号 信号 信号 信号 信号 信号 信号 信号 信号 信号 信号 信号 信号 591 591 591 In some real-times, the defect detecting device - which can be executed by the digital signal processor (DSp) 416, can monitor the 134 1277079 ^ this focal sum threshold value, which can be changed when the laser changes. State 432 changes. The defect detecting means 591 can then pass the change of the laser's power value via the change of the focus sum threshold value. In addition, this sum signal can be changed when the media type is crossed (e.g., by pre-mastering to writable or writable to pre-master). In some embodiments, a multiple search algorithm 557 is used to indicate when a border crossing occurs. In some embodiments, the multi-track search algorithm 557 can notify the defect side device 591 that the boundary crossing time does not occur, so that a boundary-error side does not occur. In some embodiments, the critical value of the defect (this, the value of the I? is compared to the sum of the sum of the defects) is (10) determined to be sufficient, and does not respond to the reflective changes associated with changes in the boundary of the media type. = However, if the critical value of this defect is set too high, it may be _ less defective. Η 二 2, set 595 can be reduced in the multi-executive search operation period _: 夕 曰 执 执 执 ( ( ( ( 至 控制器 控制器 控制器 控制器 控制器 557 557 557 557 557 557 557 557 557 557 557 557 The ship chopper device 595 can track the search reference speed of the multi-track search control to 57. For example, the maximum reference speed can be measured in 1 degree. This enemy filter device * batch changes its center frequency from 丨A HZ to version. This multi-track search function is one of the 557 search reference speeds.仗 502, in the example, the search servo algorithm » 〇 2: close the knowledge, the input detection device signals a, [, B, and ^, Qiao (TE!) to determine - tracking tracking Control 1 amount. In the positive ϋ ^ 62 to 40 rough search control workload (the system is - loop gain correction. «is:; detection of split signal A and C input to a block 538, which is based on the following 135 1277079 To calculate a seek error signal TESi : TESi = (AC) / (A + C) as described in the second stage. The detection device signal BAD is input to a block 539 'based on the next solution - find The rail error signal TES2 ·· TES2=(B—D) / (b+D) / is as described in the second figure p. The difference between these tracking error signals and the pass 2 is in a summing device 540. Calculate, by means of the shape (TES) input signal, as described in the second silent. This search error signal is stored in the optical pickup unit (〇pu) (10) locating motion (by the homing device) 2G1 control), for example, an analogy of the second enzyme to the third Γΐΐ Γΐΐ A A, c, E, B, D, and F. In the partial implementation = 1 1 further processing of the error signal (TES) It can then be executed, for example, to reduce crosstalk. The seek error signal (TES) from the summing device 540 is input to a f-set 54 where the search error is The number (TES) is associated with an offset number, which is determined by the offset error (tes) offset correction f. The output signal from the offset summing device is the input difference as the fifi The benefit device 543 is based on a search error ^ ^ 增 杈 544 544, which is used to correct the peak-to-peak value of the search error signal. As previously mentioned, this seek error signal (FES) is a sine wave as a tracking bit = number. As described below, the value of the tracking error signal (TES) offset can be determined as the center point of the maximum and minimum inter-cells for the TES. In addition, in the embodiment, the tracking error signal (TES) offset value is entered into the system: the read error signal of the lining reading (five) imaginary offset value is determined by the value, and It can be changed for different ones in the optical media 1〇2. In some embodiments, the seek error signal (TES) forward algorithm is set such that the seek error signal (TES) is output between the peak and peak of the seek error signal (TES). The value 136 1277079 is equal to a preset peak-to-peak value. This pre-peak to peak value is selected to provide the optimum dynamic range of the optical pickup unit (OPU) 103 tracking range. The information relating to the peak-to-peak value of the seek error signal (TES) as a function of position on the surface of the optical medium 102 can be determined in a Tracking Error # (TES) peak to peak device 545. In an open look-up situation, the tracking error signal (TES) varies across the range of motion of the optical pickup unit (〇PU) ^. The seek error signal (tes) peak-to-peak device 545, in some embodiments, records the highest and lowest values of the seek error signal (TES) as the peak-to-peak value. In some embodiments, the average of the highest and lowest values of the seek error signal (TES) is the peak-to-peak value. The peak-to-peak value is input to an offset correction algorithm 542 to calculate a center point, such as a gain correction 544 to calculate the adjustment required to adjust the peak-to-peak value to a preset value. The output tracking error signal (TES) is output to a seek error signal (TES) gain device 543. This tracking error signal (TES) gain means 543 can be corrected, in part, via the seek error signal (TES) offset correction algorithm 542. A correction algorithm, such as a track error to signal (TES) offset correction algorithm 542, further illustrates the following seek error of the output of the μ == signal (TES) gain device 543: 唬 (input to a seek error signal ( TES) inverse nonlinear stochastic rank difference signal (pass) reverse nonlinear device 546 system operation 'tracking error signal (TES) near linearization t (TES) offset device mosquito, as if the focus is reverse non-Ϊ ^ Set 511. - Correction algorithm 547 is used to calculate the tracking error for each search error signal (ΤΕϋ near position Lu error signal (10)) linear for the operating point from this fortunate nine 5 Wu poor # broken (TES) The reverse nonlinear device % 171 1277079 is input to a seek error signal (TES) sample integrity test set 548. This ff error signal (TES) sample integrity test device 548 operates the tracking error "唬 ( The manner of TES) is substantially the same as the focus error signal (FE§) sampling complete test device 515 operates the focus error signal (FES) as previously described. In some embodiments, this seek error signal (TES) death test Device 548 is enabled with an enable signal. When the TES sample integrity test device 548 is not yet enabled, the error signal (TES) integrity test device 548 is derived from this. The output signal is the same as the input signal of the seek error signal (TES) sample integrity test device 548. ° The input signal of the TES sampling integrity test device 548 and the focus error signal (FES) The input signal of the sample integrity testing device 515 and a defect signal generated by the defect detecting device are input to a write-abandon algorithm 537 for determining whether to abandon the write = in a write operation. If the focus error signal (FES) or the seek error signal (TES) display error signal (TES) or focus error signal (FES) is too large (ie, the seek error signal (TES) and the focus error signal (FES) One of the more than a critical limit), a write-abandoning device 537 aborts one of the write operations of the optical medium 102 by providing a discard write flag. However, if the tracking error signal (TES) or Focus error signal (FES) exceeds this critical limit and the defect detection device 591 indicates a defect, so the write operation does not have to be discarded. In some embodiments, the low pass filtered focus error signal (FES) and the tracking error signal The (TES) value is used to determine if the focus error signal (FES) or seek and error signal (TES) is too large. The low pass filtered focus error signal (FES) and tracking error signal (TES) values generally include focus. The direct current (DC) component of the error signal (FES) and the tracking error signal (TES). In the tracking error signal (TES) and the focus error signal (FES), the present invention allows a programmable number N (for example, two) to be greater than before the write-abandon device 537 discards a write operation. Limit continuous sampling, and indicate one of the defects. Give up writing 138 1277079 into the action system can listen to the laser 2丨8 high discrimination optical conscience treasure,

It can make the optical media 1〇2 write to the surface of the part of the force; Furthermore, damage to adjacent orbital data can be avoided as a result. Force 4 from s, this (, TES) sampling integrity test device output 549, and then input to the - phase leader 55 〇. These low-frequency integrated devices U and phase, the operating mode of the leading device 55G is similar to the focusing ship algorithm 5〇1 ΐίΐ=!' 516 and phase leading device 518. Again, in order to provide a better response to the tracking error, the low-level device and the phase leader can be second-order inspection. As discussed earlier, a -stage low-integral device, which provides more low-frequency gain and provides better error-prone. In addition, a second-order phase compensation device, she is in the -__ first supplement, and the value is turned on to increase her forward and phase boundaries. This second-order phase leads the device, and she leads the device in the -th order, and can also advance in the same number of phases at the crossover, resulting in less high frequency amplification. = The output signal from the phase leading device 550 is input to a notch chopper 551. The notch filter device 551 can use a notch correction 渖瞀 method, the m singer 551 ship can have enough in the autumn, the resonance system can be based on the nature (according to the transmission arm ^ = but 1 may be on different discs) The machine is roughly changed. The output signal from the notch filter = clothing ^ 5 51 can be input to the second - the second notch filter device = the overshoot and the known resonance. The notch chopper device 551 and this The trap/I set=3 system may have a plurality of notch filter devices respectively. In some embodiments, the output signal from the trap ship device 553 is coupled to a reverse rocket loop gain amplifying device 830. This reverse rocket circuit After the execution-recording search operation, the additional device is provided with an additional boost to the servo circuit of the brother, thereby more aggressively closing the 139 1277079 track on a target track. This reverse rocket loop gain amplifying device 83〇 The system is enabled by a multi-track search control system § 557. In a closed tracking mode, a switching device 556 is turned off and the output signal from the notch filter split 553 is input to a multiplex. Device. Again, at : Turning off the tracking mode ^, the multiplex device 558 provides the 至 仏 虎 虎 虎 虎 虎 虎 虎 虎 虎 虎 虎 虎 虎 虎 虎 虎 虎 虎 虎 虎 虎 虎 虎 虎 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 As discussed, this loop-up algorithm 562 is settled at a frequency response of the selected frequency as a block. To achieve this, a sine wave system is generated in a generating device 568 to add up to the singularity of the summing device 5 The control 2, the response of the gain correction algorithm 562 input signal is monitored. The gentry is provided to a gain calibration algorithm 56, 6 via discrete Fourier transform (DFT), which is accompanied by the summing device 563, via discrete Fourier =, (DF1 ^ 565 output signal. This gain calculation device 5, then, back, benefit device 564 gain, so that the open loop is increased enough in this ff. The loop gain correction algorithm 562 may be set differently than the one set by the focus loop gain correction algorithm 522. η = ΐ ΐ 556 is turned off by turning off the seek algorithm 555. Na unit When 1〇3 is below, this sine-sine wave is sinusoidal. The period of this sine wave is the orbital i-bit two t said 'tracking can be found in the search error signal (TES) 4 / and the number of people The positive slope of the second graph R) is closed near the zero crossing. There is a position of the zero crossing of the appropriate slope. Receiving the 'orbit zero crossing (TZC) gamma device in the f field 554 system love point ^^Tiger (TES) The squad is crossed by the TZC and the trafic parent (TZC) cycle. The instructions are passed through the Optical Detachment Unit (OPU) 140 1277079: the system can be used to calculate the zero point of the deeds to be too high. Frequency, the tracking algorithm is calculated on the right, and when the father is forced to ί, this _tracking trajectory is used to track the tracking method.

Period =

At a lower speed, the transients generated by the __ county 556, before and during the device 556, the low frequency integrating device 71 is energized by the enable signal of the off-track algorithm 555. For a Hi example, the output signal from the loop gain 564 is implemented in part, and the digital analog converter is searched for. The human-bit digital conversion ^. The seek relay 201, however, requires the optical pickup unit (oro) 103 to be moved from the inner diameter (π) of the optical ', -102 to the outer diameter (〇D) of the optical medium 1〇2. Because although the transmission arm 1〇4 must move the optical unit (〇pu) 1〇3, (ID) to the outer diameter (〇D), when the tracking system is turned off, the optical #1 of the present invention is taken The unit (°PU) is a small movement around the age of discovery. In the column, in some embodiments, when the seek is turned off, the optical pickup unit ^OHJ) 103 is moved within a range of about 7 nm around a center position. Moreover, in some embodiments, from one of the inner diameter (ID) to the outer diameter (0D), which is completely 141 1277079 ft, the present invention also needs to overcome one of the axial centers 203 of the erecting transmission arm 104. elastic force. In some embodiments of the invention, a second digital analog converter is used for control of a coarse transmission, and a measurement from the circuit can be used as a fine transmission control. = control 咐 signal, then, the wheel turns into the search; ^ (C) 468 (fourth picture). This tracking digital analog converter (DAC) can have any digit precision bit, but in some embodiments has an eight bit digital analog converter. In some embodiments, a coarse tracking control workload is generated via a bias control control 585. The coarse tracking control operation system generated by the bias feedforward control device may be a loop gain device. The low frequency component of the production of 564. This coarse control seeks the workload, and then the microprocessor 432, which can then transfer the coarse control workload ^ 458 to the power drive 34 (Fig. A In some embodiments with precision, one of the second digital analog converters in the power drive unit 34 receives the coarse = control effort from the microprocessor 432 via the sequence interface 458. The power drive unit 34 In the meantime, the analog rough control @system workload is summed with the analog control workload from the digital analog converter (DAC) 468 to provide the complete tracking control current to the seeker 2〇1. Therefore, The microprocessor 432 can determine the low frequency component of the seek control workload, whereby the digital signal processor (DSP) 416 (which performs the tracking servo deduction 502) determines to keep the optical pickup unit (〇pu) in place. The tracking drive 2〇1 can be biased when the desired seek control workload is on the track. In some embodiments, the output signal from the loop gain device 564 is input to an anti-slip algorithm 593. The anti-slip algorithm 593 receives a direction signal from a direction detection algorithm 592 and assigns a number 5 from a search slip detection device 142 1277079. This inverse sliding algorithm 593, when energized, is ' The light and the two (TES) * rate are stable and the unstable direction of the system is different, and the stable slope is different. Lift = body solid phase rate - positive slope search error signal (beveled from Hr () When ordering to the inner diameter (ID), it stabilizes the ramp to the slope and the error signal (TES) signal. =3 'follows' to avoid the seek control loop 5〇2 off at an unstable slope^, ― Step sliding to avoid attempting _in-unstable slope. During the period of Θ indication - unstable slope '- replace ^ generation of oil service algorithm view female income miscellaneous =

= disturb caused Wei Wei to slip through several orbits (that is, H is closed on a track. The I-Easy-bias control device 585 is found through a reverse sliding algorithm. - Pour-p疋-2_Pan 2_recording' is a low-frequency component only by the low-frequency component. Thus the low-Weibo device 569 is input, the symbol device is not _. In ^ ' 〇, or a υ to a track and hold circuit, including / force; ^ ^ 74 ^ feedback delay device 575. The input to the total device 574, from the clothing 574 of the transport letter ship last - received the illusion f:, device 575. This symbol device, Immediately, whether the slave is a value or the bias value of the rough control workload is reduced. The decision to increase or decrease the coarse control workload occurs only during the ridge 7 interruption period, and due to - The single-delivery decrement system performs ";;j work, and the coarse control device obtained by a bias forward control device 585 slowly changes (for example, every 2 ms is performed - increments). 143 1277079 In operation, the bias control device 585 is basically outputted by the ^ phase # = back, additional 564 output fine tracking control The workload is transferred to the fine tracking control workload - the fixed control work is described; after all, the system will be completely transferred to the output of the vacant device 585: the work of the fine tracking control and Q 1 mt 1 work 1 interaction is too fast, there may be stability pounds, / t, the present invention has incentives to enable the bias control device 585 can also respond to the loop gain device 564 output seek control The low frequency of the workload = the increment and decrement of the output of the coarse control workload output by the device 585 occurs during the recurring interruption time of the processing processor 432, which may be about 2 ms in some embodiments. In the f-off tracking mode, the coarse control of the output by the summing device 578 changes very slowly. However, during the seek operation, there is a need for a faster change (4) J1 measurement signal. Thus, during the seek operation, the output signal from the low pass filtering means 569 is further filtered via the low pass filtering means 571. In the summing means 574, a portion (indicated by the K multiplier in block 576) is added. The total to coarse control workload and the summing device 578' output are coarse control workload. Therefore, during the seek operation, the coarse control workload from the bias control device 585 can be changed very quickly. The filtering means 571 allows the frequency to be sufficiently low (e.g., less than about 2 Hz) to allow the search control workload to be enabled, and to increase the coarse control effort more quickly than the switching device 573 allows for incremental control, but The other interference does not affect the sufficiently low frequency of the coarse control workload output by the summing device 578. In addition, the output signal of the low-pass filter device 569 is input to a non-disc" 'It monitors very low frequency components. Since the very low frequency component of this tracking error # is amplified by the integrator 549 and the phase leading device 55, the substantially direct current (dc) component of the tracking error signal (TES) will have a large gain, and Therefore, it will become a large component of the loop gain device 564 144 1277079. This low frequency component is not filtered by the low pass and is input to the non-disc detection algorithm 572. If the drowning method is to provide a large direct current (DC) signal, the non-disc detection 妒 = the bucket unit (OPU) 103 is located at the optical medium 102, and provides an error message to the microprocessor 432. ,_take

^Partial real towel,-corrected feedforward (four) device 5?9 can also be packaged 5 2 feedforward control device 579 can determine that the loop gain device 5 is a household f to generate a regular change in the amount of control work, and Insert a corresponding harmonic operation 寻 to the seek control workload, whereby the expected optical capture unit (〇&0 103 j is to be moved. These harmonics, then, can be subtracted from the tracking error signal (TES) .

When the tracking algorithm 585 is turned off to close the seek, in some embodiments, the integrating device 549 and the sample integrity test device 548 can be disabled when the switching device 551 is first turned off. This step will increase the damping effect in the seek servo algorithm 5〇2 as a cost to reduce the low frequency gain. Once the switching device 556 is turned off, the closed-finding algorithm 555 can wait for a portion of the time so that the transient current effect is attenuated before the enabling integration device 549, and the sampling integrity test device is then enabled. 548. In other words, before the integrator 549 raises the low frequency component of the seek error ^ (TES), the servo loop algorithm 5〇2 and the actuator hand 104 have been placed near the predetermined seek position. The low pass filtered seek error signal (TES') from the sample integrity test device 548 can be input to the multi-track controller 557, the single-channel skip control device 559, and the seek slip detection device 561. . The multi-track search control ^ 557, in a multi-track search operation, supplies a control workload to a ^ tation 558 'which, when selected, enables the actuator arm iq^ to take the optical capture unit (OPU) 103 moves to the vicinity of one of the target tracks on the surface of the optical medium 1〇2. After the optical pickup unit (OPU) is at or near this target, 145 1277079 this close tracking algorithm 555 is then closed. Single-orbital beat & m target track or set 558. This multiplex device 558 / when it is work, work = signal to this multi-tool (〇 PU) 103 move - one way. In some of the optical pickup units „;; the large movement system can be operated by taking the single Ξ algorithm 557 and then can be operated ^ ^ ^ 555 off the Gossip 'optical acquisition single』 f 匕 target obedience. Sliding Na set 56! Department supervisor (four) two JJ;

& and only the 61 series of buckles open the conditions of the brothers, then follow. Moreover, the tracking slip detecting device 561 is capable of being transmitted to the microprocessor 432, so that the micro-switch η seeks to determine the position of the optical pickup unit (OPU) 103 and the search operation. The optical pickup unit (ορυ) 103 is moved to the 迢, and the 敎 敎 。 。. Please refer to the secret architecture to uncover the road.

The fifth figure E and the fifth figure F show an embodiment of the seek slip detecting device 561. As shown in Figures 5 and 5, the seek slip detector 561 receives a low, filtered tracking error signal (TES') from the seek error signal (TES) sample integrity test device 548. As shown in the fifth Figure 17, when the optical 撷, cell, (OPU) 103 moves past the way, the low pass filtered seek error signal (TES) represents a sinusoidal signal. The absolute value of this low pass filtered tracking error signal (TES,) is calculated in block 594. The output signal from this absolute value block 94 is then input to a low pass filtering device 595. In practice, the low pass filtering device 595 can be used as an integrating device. The output signal from the low pass filter 595 is input to a comparison block 598 where the output signal is compared to a reverse slip critical value. If the output signal 146 1277079 from the low-pass filter device 595 is over the threshold number of the maximum number of cycles, then the metering device 599 sets the anti-sliding flag to enable the inverse. Slide 渖 algorithm 593. The output signal from the low pass filter 595 is also input to a comparison block γ96. The comparison block 596 compares the output signal from the low pass filter means 595 with a slip critical value which is typically greater than the inverse slip critical value. The output signal from this comparison block 596 is input to a counting device 597. If the sliding critical value is more than a maximum number of cycles, the counting means 597 outputs a slip detection flag. This sliding detection flag can then be indicated by the search system.

An example of this direction inductive algorithm 592 is shown in the figure. The 7-direction inductive algorithm 592 determines the direction of the optical pickup unit (〇ρυ) 1〇3 radial through the surface of the optical pickup unit ((iv)). - summing device 5 〇 _ adding the optical signals from the external components of the detecting devices 225 and 226 (second figure D), elements 231, 2^3, 234, and 236' to form a sum of directions 1 ^ The side of the component wiper 'greater than or less than two is included in this scoring unit (0PU) 1G3. From this add-on device, the direction of Xiao He always includes · DC (DC) and AC (AC) components. In this direction, the direct current (DC) component of Lu Wei's wire indicates the laser intensity of the laser 218. The AC (AC) component of this direction = and = depends on the __ quadrature signal, which is divided by the tracking error signal (TE S) and its tracking error signal (TE S ) In the embodiment, for example, the sum signal of the direction is "in the inner diameter (f) of the optical medium 1 〇 2 (first Β)) to the outer diameter (〇D), and is in the optical medium 1 〇 2 The outer diameter (〇D) is 90 degrees after passing through the inner diameter. The ft rail error signal (TES), for example, from the summing device 54i miso, is input to the sampling and holding circuit 5003, the sum of this direction Letter to turn and lay electricity on G2. Silkworm mosquito media defects can cause wrong direction sum signal and tracking error letter 147 1277079 Dali,, and other sampling and holding (S/H) circuits 5〇〇2 and 5 The 〇〇3 system keeps the input signal of the Nantong filter device constant when there is a media trap (the signal is indicated by the defect gambling). The output of the sample and hold circuits 5002 and 5003 The occupation number is ☆ to 鬲, and the filtering devices are 5004 and 5005. The optical disc of the optical medium is a function of the optical disc angle. Variation, which may occur in the optical media 1 〇 2 rotation frequency U wave - can not turn the alternating current (AC) signal. These, wave, set 4 and 5G05 high-pass filter device cut-off frequency, then, can be fading; ^, a harmonic reflective fluctuation signal. The output f signal SumHp from the high-pass filter device 5〇〇4 is an AC signal, which indicates that the positive signal of the sum signal is squared 5006 according to whether the output signal SumHp is larger or smaller. Zero point, in order to convert the analog signal 8111111 into a digital logic signal ▲ SumHpD. The pass filter device 4 introduces a phase shift to the obtained digital logic signal SumHpD. The high pass filter device 5005 introduces the same phase, and moves to this point. A tracking error signal (TES) is formed to form a digital tracking error signal TESHpD 'which then has a matched phase shift. Similarly, a block 5007 compares the digital search error signal TESHpD with a zero point to thereby digitize the digital bit. The seek error signal TESHpD is converted to a logic signal. The logic blocks 5007, 5008, 5009, 5010, and 5011 collectively perform the following logic functions:

Direction1 = ( TESHpD AND SumHpD?) OR ( TESHpD1 AND SumHpD ) The polarity of this direction sensing device changes between the master and writable media. The reverse device 5012 is directed, reversed, and the switching device 5 〇 13 is based on the optical pickup unit (0PU) 103 being located above the master or writable medium, whereby the output of the reverse device 5012 is thereby The signal or a direction signal is output by Direction'. The sixth figure shows an embodiment of a closed tracking algorithm 555 (figure B). This closed tracking algorithm 555 closes the seek servo algorithm 5〇2 and thus obtains the tracking. In step 601, the algorithm 555 receives a command to close the track. This close tracking command may originate from microprocessor 432 or from other algorithms executed in digital 148 1277079 b processor (DSP) 416. Upon receiving this close track tracking command, the algorithm 555 proceeds to step 611. In μ, 1 step 611, the seek error signal (TES) gain is set according to the peak-to-peak value of the seek error signal (TES), and the tracking seek error nickname (TES) is added to the target. The slot is crossed or bumped to set. From step 611, the algorithm 555 proceeds to step 6〇2. In step 602, the algorithm 555 determines the orbital zero crossing (tzc) period to determine the crossover speed for indicating the optical pickup unit (〇pu) 103 and the optical medium 1〇2 surface track. The opposite speed. This orbital crossover speed is related to the ego crossover parameter orbital zero crossing (TZC) period, which may be determined via a Siam zero crossing (TZC) decoding device 554 or may be determined by a high pass filtered wave error signal. (TES') calculation. After the decision is made in step 602, the algorithm 555 determines whether a pause condition has been checked in step 603 by judging whether or not too much time has elapsed after receiving the close seek command in step 601. If too much time has elapsed, the $-microprocessor pause flag is set and the microprocessor 432 proceeds to an error recovery routine. Otherwise, this algorithm 555 proceeds to step 6〇4. Step 604 determines whether the search completion rate is too high to close the search. Step 604 can determine whether the orbital crossover rate is too high by comparing the track zero crossing (Tzc) period and an orbital closing threshold. If the critical value is not exceeded, the traffic crossing rate is too high, and the algorithm 555 φ is returned to step 602. If the orbital rate is low enough, then the algorithm proceeds to step 605. /'v In step 605, the close seek algorithm 555 turns off the switching device 556, thereby turning off the tracking servo loop. When the switching device 5 is turned off for the first time, the accumulated knife setting 549 and the integrity testing device 548 are disabled, thereby allowing a better tracking servo loop response when the transient current is attenuated. Once the switch ^556 is turned off, the algorithm 555 proceeds to step 6〇6, and in step 606, the algorithm 555 is delayed for a sufficient amount of time to cause the 149 1277079 transient from the switching device 556. The current effect is attenuated. Once a particular delay period has elapsed, the algorithm 555 proceeds to step 607 where the integrator 549 is enabled. The energization integrator 549 creates a new setting for transient current effects. Thus, once the integration device 549 is enabled, the algorithm 555 proceeds to step 608 to wait for another delay time. Once this second delay time has elapsed, the algorithm 555 proceeds to step 609 where the tracking error signal (TES) sample integrity testing device 548 is enabled. Once step 609 is completed, the algorithm proceeds to step 61 and may transfer a seek close flag to microprocessor 432 or digital signal processor (DSP) based on the source of the original close seek seek command. 416. In some embodiments of the present invention, the algorithm 555 is implemented as a combined workload between the microprocessor 432 and the digital signal (DSP) 416. For example, microprocessor 432 can command digital signal processor (DSP) 416 to turn off the loop in step 6.1. The digital signal processor (DSP) 416 receives the track zero crossing (TZC) period in step 602 and checks in step 604 whether the zero crossing (TZC) period is below a zero crossing ( TZC) Critical value. At the same time, microprocessor 432 begins a pause clock. If the digital signal processor (DSP) 432 does not turn off the switching device 556 during this pause period, then the microprocessor 432 proceeds to the error recovery routine. Once the switching device 556 is turned off, the digital signal processor (DSP) 416 will not proceed further in this algorithm until the microprocessor 432, in step 607, telling the digital signal processor to repair (DSP) 416 to assign It can be integrated with the device 549. This microprocessor 432 controls the opposite timing, and the digital signal processor (DSP) 416 is subordinate to the microprocessor 432 and only responds to commands from the microprocessor 432. Moreover, once the integration means 549 is enabled in step 607, the microprocessor 432 can then sue the digital nickname processor (DSP) 416 to enable the sample integrity test device 548. In some embodiments, the digital signal processor 419 will not change state if there is no command from the microprocessor 432. Figure 7A is a block diagram showing one of the embodiments of the focus closure algorithm 535, block 150 1277079. The focus closure algorithm 535 determines the amount of control effort on the batch volume via the summing device 52. In some embodiments, the summing device can be replaced by a switching device or a multiplexer circuit, which is used to close the algorithm 535 or to control one of the notch filtering devices 519. In some embodiments, the algorithm 535 begins with a control workload whereby the optical pickup unit (OPU) 1〇3 can be positioned at the optical medium 1〇2, ie, the silk age unit (〇 The distance between the PU and the optical manufacturing room is greater than the focusing distance. This algorithm 535 then produces a _ control closer to the optical media '= bit, a fine control of the jade volume is suitable for - the focus distance. Once this extraction unit (ORJ) 103 is close to the focus distance, this algorithm 5 counts the number of scales, and the poly (four) service loop is in step, and the slave-focus gets the flag. This can be set by the program in the microprocessor 432 or in the digital signal processor (Dsp) 416. In the 7G3 towel, this method 535 is judged to be placed, thereby starting a focus acquisition procedure. 〇L, sitting by the target shovel focus control workload one value range or through a ^ focus control workload one of the critical value comparison is completed. In some real = example of the movement / towel scales, the city calculation touch 5 The system must first pick up the early 兀 (〇PU) 1 〇 3 pushes away from the optical media 1 〇 2 〇 、 寅 寅 ΐ ΐ 传动 传动 传动 传动 传动 206 206 206 206 206 206 206 206 206 206 206 206 206 控制 聚焦 聚焦 聚焦 聚焦 聚焦 聚焦 聚焦The quantity 'by suitably moving this light 103 to an acceptable starting point. In addition, this control workload is to add a value to the optical pickup unit (_) 103 on the piOfiie _ 堇If it is calculated to obtain the starting position, the method 535 is generated, and in the training arm class, it may provoke the resonance of the 151 l277〇79 actuator, and the current is generated. Increase the amount of a needed after a1. In the case of the division, in the step In step 704, the algorithm 535], the maternal two positive _ initial focus control ♦ the amount of money set (profile) 'the ability to = smooth way to the optical capture unit (〇 PU) ceramics to get a start to measure An example of one of the focus control work id() is generated in step 704. Step 7〇4 generates a sine wave whose ωρ is at the current focus control workload (to indicate the optical pick-up unit j^u) 1〇3 Contrary to the current position of the optical medium 102), the opposite peak starts to control the workload. The focus control workload can be set at 521, and the control is performed. Applied to the focus actuator 2〇6. This placement component can be widely used in the focus or the search. In other words, the dropout (QPU) 1()3 needs to be put & The mechanical resonance is aroused, which may be due to a more sudden control of the workload =, the quotient 'silk optical pickup unit ((4)) 103 is already in the first transmission position, then the algorithm 535 proceeds to step 706. In addition, After the focus transmission is applied, this calculation is fine ^ step 706 'this performance The 535 system generates the optical operation unit _) to move through the ί, ΐ ί ί ί ί ί ί ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' The focus position wall takes control of the workload. However, again, if there is a mechanical resonance in the transmission hand (4) 4, then this algorithm 535 may require a partial time 152 1277079 in the embodiment of the 'step 706 system corresponding The control workload of a position near the optical medium 仞2 takes control of the amount of control. In the partial implementation of the shot, the optical medium 'this position may be the near position where the optical pickup unit (0PU) 103 can move. Such focus acquisition control workload is shown in Figure 7C. u Once the calculation of this focus turn control work 1: after setting the profile, = 707 will then be assigned the digital signal processor (DSp) 416 to administer

The sum of F and F, and the focus error signal CFES from the summing device 513, is used to determine the time to focus. In step 7〇8, according to the focus acquisition control workload setting calculated in step 706, the acquisition control is applied to the workload, and thus applied to the focus transmission. The device 2G6 is configured to physically move the optical pickup unit (QPU) 1〇3 through the 琅4 focus position. In step 710, the differential method 535 monitors the closing condition during which the focus acquisition control is applied to read the profile. If the close bar is not met then the algorithm 535 proceeds to step 7Π. In step 711, the algorithm 535 checks to see (4) the closest position. If at the step of the Kawasaki, optical 掏

If the 疋(0PU) 103 has not reached the closest position, then the algorithm phantom 5 proceeds to step 708, whereupon the focus is applied to obtain the control workload as the focus control workload. In some embodiments, step 710 is a sum signal that can be rotated by the summing device 534 to determine whether the optical pickup unit (0PU) 1〇3 is connected to the focus position. In this example, The sum signal is greater than the focus error. (FES) Gain Correction Algorithm 51 determines one of the focus sums and the critical number is wider. The optical capture unit (〇PU) 1〇3 is close to the focus position. ♦ When the focus position is close, the focus error signal (FES) will approach zero. Therefore, in some embodiments _, the closing condition of step 710 can be: · This signal and the signal 153 1277079 (FES) is less than A system is greater than a total bound value, or the focus error transmission focus error signal (FES) critical value. The mouth, first === middle 寅 algorithm 535 system judges that this closing condition is satisfied, then the method 535 is advanced to the step 712. In step 712, the focus circuit 516 is turned off by the integrator 516. This algorithm 535; the focus control workload is the bias control workload. In this example, + ' = 2 is maintained when the closing condition is met Obtaining focus control effort & Cloth beam at the eaves (Profile) of the focusing control and the closed state of work 'workload can be made lofty by the operator J ^ ^ ^ ^ held constant.

In step 71, the algorithm 535 is delayed to enable the transient current effect bank to turn on the Jt two-step delay in step 7 to enable the transient current to be energized in step 720. , the final k唬 (FES) sampling integrity test device 515 before attenuation. Once the closing condition of step 710 has not been reached, the algorithm 535 proceeds to the closest position checking step 711. If at the step? In 1!, the algorithm still determines that the optical pickup unit ((10)) 1G3 is located closest to one of the wires, and the algorithm 535 sets a focus error bit in step 713. In the partial implementation of the shot, it is most dependent on the physical distance of the unit (the distance 103 is the closest distance to the optical medium 1〇2. However, in some other embodiments, the closest position may also mean the most Close to the allowed position, which may be a predetermined value. After the focus is focused and the integration device 516 and the sample integrity test device 515 are turned off, the napkin can be set to collect the flag. In some embodiments, the steps are The 704 "Getting Started Location" can be recalibrated and hunted for future execution of algorithm 535 in step 723.

After the set-up error bit is set in step 713, the algorithm 535 can proceed to step 715. In step 715, the algorithm 535 determines a sinusoidal control workload proflle that can move the optical capture unit 154 1277079 (OPU) 103 from the optical media 102 to an unfocused position. As before, this sinusoidal _ work money can be determined by fitting the sine wave to suit the position between the position and the non-focus position. In step 717, the focus control 1 is applied to the poly X drive 206. In step 719, once the optical capture unit (〇pu) 1〇'3^ reaches this unfocused position, then this algorithm 535 fails at step 721 = bounces out. If the f-focus fails, then the functional error can be resumed as described in the invention disclosure of the system architecture. In some embodiments, this error, the reply routine can attempt to perform the focus-off algorithm 535 multiple times, or change the "best acquisition position" in step 704 of this algorithm 535, as shown in the seventh . ^ Figure 8 and Figure B show an embodiment of the multi-track search deduction method. The eighth age system represents a multi-track search algorithm 5^t55 real image and the first person diagram B represents a signal of a time function for performing a multi-track search function according to the present invention. Fig. B is a diagram showing that the algorithm 557 performs a multitrack search ϊ srriim), a paste workload, a focus error signal, and a focus control workload. During the time period 821, the convergence method 5〇1 and the search for the feeding algorithm are simultaneously performed, which includes an accelerated seek control workload 825, and a reduction control workload 827. Accelerated workload 825 and reduced ^ can include - cabin wire miscellaneous _ workload 826 "-27 also h ίϊ ί ϊ 信号 信号 TE , , , , , , , , 随 随 加速 加速 加速 四 四 四 四 四 四 四 四 四 四 四 四Sinusoidal changes. The sinusoidal variation During the acceleration period, this period is decremented, so that the speed of the track is the parental speed of the parent. In some embodiments, this search algorithm cuts the speed to a specific value. Furthermore, the acceleration/deceleration control workload is prevented from being tilted by the county to practice the training unit ^PU) 155 1277079 The actual acceleration condition of the optical medium 102 is opposite (such as using the variation period of the sine seek error signal (TES) to measure ), and then calculate. In the eighth diagram B, it is shown that one of the executions of the intersection speed curve generated by the search algorithm 557 indicates that one of the periods is fixed acceleration when the acceleration seek control workload 825 is applied, and When this deceleration tracking control workload 827 is applied, one of the cycles is fixedly decelerated. During cycle 823, this search algorithm 557 Wei Fan newly obtains one of the seek opening bars in the seek servo algorithm 502. In some embodiments, during the seek operation, the gather error 垆 (FES) control workload is selected as the low pass filter focus control workload output by the low & filter 529 in the multiplexer 531. In order to minimize the crosstalk between the search error signature (TES) and the focus error signal (FES). In the embodiment, multiplexer 531 selects the output signal from sample and hold circuit 530 during the seek operation. In some embodiments, the search for crosstalk notch filter 590 can be energized during a seek operation to reduce the effect of the sinusoidal tracking (TES) on the focus error signal (FES). Therefore, in operation, the search algorithm 557 in some embodiments adjusts the multiplexer 531 to receive the focus control workload from the self-wave device 529 and to energize the 35-wave chopper device 59. = Algorithm 557 also adjusts the work green 5 view to receive one of the algorithms 557 generated by the search control workload, thereby turning off the tracking servo algorithm 5〇2. This 557 then generates and applies a search for the search control workload, learning the acquisition unit (reward the speed of 1〇3, and move the optical capture unit 1〇3 to the surface of the optical ship to move the target. ^ (ORJ The speed of the 丨()3 is determined by the TES. Once the performance 57 completes the actual miscellaneous of the wire 103, the tracking is in the _# method 5) and the multiplex device 558 is re-mosquito In order to filter the device 553 via the switching device 5, (4) the amount of work. Furthermore, the signal transmitted from the loop gain theory is used as the focus control g 156 1277079. The eighth figure A shows a block diagram of one embodiment of the nose method 557. The tracking error signal (TES') output by the tracking error signal (TES) sampling integrity tester 548 is received by the ZERO detection device 8.1. This track zero crossing (TZC) detection device 801 determines the track crossing and, in some implementations, generates a pulse signal each time an orbital crossing occurs. In some embodiments of the present invention, the algorithm 557 can read the zero crossing (tzc) signal from the track ready device 454 (see the fourth figure). In some embodiments, the track zero crossing (TZC) detection device 801 receives a defect signal from the defect detection device 591. This defective signal is disabled. This zero crossing (TZC) detects the output of the device to avoid generating a pulse in the presence of a media defect. The traversing zero crossing (TZC) signal is input to a zero crossing (TZC) counting device 802 and a track zero crossing (TZC) cycle device 803. The TZC detection device 554 of the fifth figure B includes the TZC detection device 801 and the track zero crossing/(TZC) cycle device 8〇3. This fulcrum zero crossing (TZC) counting device 8〇2 counts the number of crossroads. The direction signal from direction detection algorithm 592 determines the direction in which the zero crossing (TZC) counting device 8〇2 counts. For example, if a direction reversal system may occur near the end of a search due to an external disturbance, then the counting device will increment rather than decrement. This will ensure that this search system is instructed. This track zero crossing (TZC) cycle device 803 is the time period between the crossings. The search completion detection algorithm 816 TZ point crossing (TZC) counting device 8〇2 passes the number of executions and completes. Therefore, this search completion algorithm 816 also refers to the number of executions. In addition, the search completes the detection algorithm 830. In; Ί f to the pre-fire signal, which can be applied to the reverse rocket gain device Ϊ 侦测 侦测 816 816 in the counting in the 4 knife realization example, the track zero crossing (Ding zc) counting device system 157 Ϊ 277079

A signal is received that indicates each complete rotation of the optical medium 102. During the search = period, the optical media 102 continues to rotate. These rotation systems may have an additive length error for the actual length of the sound, if the search servo only counts the orbital crossing in the zero crossing (TZC) counting device 802, and the track is The spiral is taken into consideration. The system can be applied based on the length of the search to predict the number of rotations of the disc. However, this method does not consider the change in search time caused by an external factor such as, for example, mechanical resonance. The ZERO point counting device 802, by incrementing the track zero point father (TZC) count on each rotation of the optical medium 1 〇 2, can avoid searching for long-term mistakes, - speed setting money (_ue) I-reference speed leaves are different. The speed profile (profile) calculated in the reference speed calculation means 805 can be optimized as shown in FIG. 8 to move the optical operation early το (0PU) 103 to a minimum amount of time. The target track does not provoke resonance and stops the optical pickup unit (0PU) 1〇3 or the target. - FB speed calculation device 8_ self-responsible zero point intersection cycle shock 803 receiving f: measured by the obstinating crossover, and calculated silk = 10 off the real, degree. Calculate the calculation of the load calculation === = the different device _ the actual speed difference gamma is calculated in the summing device, which outputs a speed error signal. In some embodiments,

The number is input to the symbol block 818, which is based on the half-track crossover speed from the FB speed calculation means 806 in the example from the direction i. In some embodiments, at higher speeds, the two listeners can be purely averaged. The sampling rate of this algorithm 557 is half-rate's, which can be quite low (for example, it is fine to obtain a low-frequency wide closed loop search feeding device when obsessing the crawl. This low-frequency search device is The key track of the search operation is susceptible to inertia and vibration interference during the capture phase. Therefore, how to achieve good speed rectification, 158 mi 〇Ί 9 ΐΐ is ίί ίίί, the gambling tree, is the one who relies on this If you want to change the reed _ nres) β in the orbital parent time), improve it by calculating the tracking error, and improve the cross-examination of the system. Measuring average, wealth 1 Correction, the tracking error of the tracking error k (TES) is not symmetrical, therefore, - balance

^ ίίΐΐΐ;; J

'The effect is in this special case, then the FB speed (face L) parameter is obtained by the following formula: FB

"(TES) /2, where, illusion = 仏 (excuse rate) and illusion = 纽 (half-way center slope). Usually, 仏 = -0.72K2b 速度 speed error from the total armor 807 is in step 8 Multiply the 〇9 by a normal addition to the total arranging 813. Again, the speed error is added to the summing device for the speed error measured during the pulsing period, multiplied by a constant K4 in step 812, and The output value of step 8〇9 is added to the summing device 813. The summing device 810 is used as an integrating device to integrate the speed error. The output value of the summing device 813 is input to a multiplex device. 814. The output signal from the multiplex j814 is input to a loop gain device 815, which is used to generate a two-finding $. The output of the loop gain device 815 is fortunately controlled by the controller. Controlling the workload profile, which moves the optical capture unit (〇PU) 1〇3 to the target obstruction by a controller. In some embodiments, the multiplex control device 814 outputs the tracking control operation. The quantity system can be a clamp acceleration operation generated by an acceleration clamp device 808 This force: the speed clamp device 808 monitors the acceleration of the optical pickup unit (OPU) 103 via the speed error determined by the summation device 807. And if the speed difference exceeds a maximum acceleration, this The acceleration clamp device 808 limits the workload of the seek control to the maximum acceleration value. 159 1277079 Example t, the tracking error signal (TES0 is also input to _ edge = 贞 / = set 817 ° - generally 4 tracks The search system can be in the optical media ί's writable part (5) and the pre-master (four) correct (10) crossover side

I). The operation of the directional direction sensing algorithm 592 and many operations include the TTU weight error signal (TES) gain, the tracking error signal (TES number (FES) gain, the focus error sub-f (FES) offset ^, and the string compensation The crosstalk compensation parameters of the detection device 579 are different depending on one of the optical mediums that can be written to the portion* or the knife. A boundary detection device 817 includes

J is the error average (TES) peak-average algorithm, which is based on the search. This boundary device 817_ is the value between the peak value and the peak value of the search period difference. In the start-search operation =557#, know what kind of media class g (that is, pre-master, groove, or writable person, bump) is left in the optical unit (() ρυ). Micro-Crying = System-wide method 557, Wei-transfer _ Jian-Yu (Dsp-416, whether this search operation will take the optical extraction unit (otu) ι〇^ to another type. If side-to-boundary If you cross, then the border can be monitored to determine the time of the border crossing.

Thus, the boundary detection device 817 is configured to identify the peak-to-peak peak amplitude (TESPP) of the tracking error signal (for example, 'is a multi-point peak average, variable, over-critical value (for example, a seek error signal) The peak crossover amplitude (TESPP) is 25%) to detect boundary crossings. TESPP change =| TESPP(K) -TESPP(K-2) In JL, K system indicates the number of measurements. If the ground is too high, the legal system of the border crossing may miss the border. Or if the critical value is set too low, the legal system may incorrectly detect the border crossing. In some embodiments, A predetermined threshold, the value of the 射-new insertion of the vehicle - (four) boundary crossing. When the side to this boundary, the peak value of the peak error signal and peak value (take 160 ± 277 〇 79 Ξ j This threshold value averaging can be used to drive the critical amplitude toward the H-direction of the peak value of the seek error signal (TESPP) of each of the software 102. When the specific medium 102 is still *CD 100 At this time, the flat/壬 system can last for all subsequent boundary crossings. This critical value is determined by the second iy To the average critical value, used for all future boundary crossings of this special (four) body ship. Fortune, continuous miscellaneous error money peak and peak amplitude y fp) 1 measurement does not have to be compared, because one of these measurements It may be ϊΐϊ ϊΐϊ ϊΐϊ , , , , , , , , , , 舰 舰 舰 舰 舰 舰 舰 舰 舰 舰 舰 舰 舰 舰 舰 舰 舰 舰 舰 舰 舰 舰 舰 舰 舰 舰 舰 舰 舰 舰 舰 舰 舰 舰 舰 舰 舰 舰The parameters of the new media. I. Nine diagrams and ninth diagrams indicate that one of the search algorithms 557 is in the search initiation plane 9G1, for example, the microprocessor=2 series (four)-search command · Again, the acceleration flag, the search direction flag t 7 7 point crossing (TZC) cycle, and a search length (indicating the target i track) are attacked in the initialization step 9〇3. In an embodiment, the laser power f can be reduced during a seek operation. Therefore, the power of the shot can be reduced in the search initiation step 901. Upon completion of the search operation, the red-read scale can be reset. (4) Force sheep system, in step 904, a track zero crossing (TZC) cycle count variable system In step 9〇5, the zero crossing (Tzc) child, the number system and the eye, the track zero crossing (TZC) cycle variable comparison check, and ^, if not passed the recent measurement For at least half of the zero crossing (TZC) period, the algorithm 557 proceeds to skip the calculation of the TTC (TZC) period and the counting device 803 and 8〇2. If the step is satisfied The condition is that the algorithm 557 proceeds to a crossover detection step 906. The sixth step 906 is to indicate a crossover zero crossing (TZC), if = group difference ^ (TES〇) Pass through zero. Except for the temporary magnetic stencil provided in step 9〇5: This parent detection step 9〇6 also includes amplitude hysteresis, that is, the next holding point 161 1277079 (TZC). The father (TZC) system can not indicate the value of at least one-half (TZC) period again, in order to avoid the erroneous indication of an old track zero point crossing, indicating that the first zero point crosses the ninth figure. Crossover (TZC) detection award wt

-之之行交交交交(TZC) 后后二:1 ‘This ruling zero crossing (TZC) storage and supply – derating value and

A critical value by which an incremental search error signal (TES, bound, value_to the zero crossing (Tzc) zero, and _decreasing 5 error (TES)) The zero crossing of the zero crossing is detected. Then an 'amplitude hysteresis is provided. In step 907, 'this algorithm 557 indicates whether the zero crossing (Tzc) value of the obedience changes two to indicate a track crossing. Otherwise, the calculation of the zero crossing jTZC and the update of the execution count in step 803 are skipped. ^ This track zero crossing (TZC) value has changed, and this algorithm 557 breaks into a block 908. In block 908, if the acceleration flag has not been set, or if the current zero of the track zero crossing (tzc) (the traversing zero crossing (TZC), the period count variable) is less than the most recent measurement, the zero crossing is performed. If the part of the (TZC) period is multiple (for example, 2 times), or if the zero crossing (TZC) is skipped, the algorithm 557 proceeds to step 9〇9, otherwise, The sub-alias 557 proceeds to step 913, which resets the obedience zero crossing (TZc) cycle count to zero. If the condition of step 9-8 is satisfied, then the algorithm 557 proceeds to step 909. Step 909 checks if the currently selected track zero crossing (TZC) pulse is the first pulse. If so, the algorithm 557 proceeds to step 913 where the 162 1277079 orbital zero reading (TZC) circumferential number Wei is set to zero. Otherwise, the algorithm 557 proceeds to step 91i, whereby the track zero thief (TZC) circumference ϋ J is the current traversal zero crossing (TZC) cycle count. This algorithm is immediately followed by the step 912 to reset the traversal zero crossing (TZC) cycle count before step 912 to clear the traversal zero crossing (TZC) skip flag. A step 908 to 912 performs a fulcrum zero crossing (TZC) cycle integrity. In some embodiments, the zero crossing (TZC) cycle is compared with the first zero crossing (Tzc) cycle check (ie, cycle κ, zero crossing (TZC) The period is compared with the orbit zero of period K-1 =)). If the period zero crossing (Tzc) period of the period κ is sinusoidally changed by the JK+1's zero crossing (TZC) period, a 5 is generated. In some embodiments, since the new zero-crossing system cannot be sideways, one-half of the zero-point crossing (TZC) of the straight one-week (step 905), step 9〇8 checks to confirm the κ cycle. The track zero crossing (TZC) week t ίτΚ7^ is the zero thief (TZC) position, so the track zero point ί Τ ΓΛ ΓΛ ΓΛ ΓΛ 保持 保持 保持 保持 保持 保持 保持 保持 保持 保持 保持 红 红 红 红 红 红 红 红 红 红 红 红 红 红Orbital zero crossing (TZC) (ie, the zero crossing of the love period (TZC) /2 < the IZC of the fK cycle) <2* (the zero crossing of the track of the κ-υ period) 4 < V 2: In the example, the (K-D cycle of the zero crossing (TZC) / orbital zero crossing (TZC) < 4 * (K-1) cycle (the middle, for example By checking the direction signal of the direction detection algorithm 592 to check the direction, so that the zero crossing of the obedient crossing point, the surname) ancient t number variable can be decremented in block 915, or in block 916, in this direction This algorithm 557 then proceeds to step 917. This algorithm 557 checks the current calculated reference speed, which is calculated by L eighth block 802. The crossing zero crossing (tzc) 163 1277079 counts whether the parameter is greater than one of the maximum values of the reference speed. If the reference speed is greater than one-half of the maximum value, the orbital zero crossing (TZC) period value is at step 918. The value is averaged with the previous traversal zero crossing (TZC) period, which may have the effect of smoothing the actual speed measurement. This algorithm 557 then proceeds to step 919 to search for the completion detection algorithm 816. _Step 919 is checked The current value of the zero crossing (TZC) count, ^ to observe whether to cross the required number of tracks. If not, then this algorithm 557 is to step 922 of the shoulder method 8〇5. If the number is correct, then the algorithm 557 checks in step 920 to see if the seek error signal (TES,) has the correct slope. If not, the algorithm 557 proceeds to step 92^. If the slope is correct, then the algorithm 557 sets a flag in step 921 and jumps out. Then, the seek can be retrieved in the seek close algorithm 555. In step 922, Calculate a reference speed. The reference speed is greater than the maximum reference value by a value, and this value is proportional to the zero crossing of the obedience (τζ〇: ten. The sign of this reference speed is the sign of this crossing zero crossing (Tzc) count. For example, toward one of the inner diameters (IDs), the search system can use the singer 200 to initiate the zero crossing (Dc) counting (because the ruling zero point father (TZC) counting device The system counts one-half of the way), and the counting device is divided into two parts - the orbital crossover is reduced (assuming that the direction sensing device is judged · · light to take a single 兀 (0PU) 1 () 3 is toward the inner diameter (10) Directional movement) until the end of the count to zero. If so, this reference speed is positive for the search towards the inner diameter (ID) direction. One of the outer diameters (〇D) is 1 〇〇 orbital search, and the value of 200 is the starting point of the zero crossing (Tzc) count. This counting device may be incremented (assuming the square field should be side-disconnected · optical pickup unit f〇PU) 103 is moved toward the outer diameter (0D) direction until it reaches zero in the destination track. If so, this reference speed has a negative sign for the search system towards the outer diameter (〇D) direction. At step 923, the reference speed calculated by the two 922 is compared to the maximum reference 164 1277079 speed, and when the maximum reference speed is exceeded, the reference speed is reset to the maximum reference speed of step 924. In step 8〇6, the actual velocity of the optical pickup element (OPU) 103 is calculated. This actual velocity (fbvel) is the reciprocal of the track zero crossing (TZC) period variable, which is calculated in block 803 of Figure 8A. In step 807, the speed error is calculated, which is the difference between the reference speed and the actual speed. This algorithm 557 is immediately followed by step 934 〇 In step 934, the algorithm 557 checks the head of the velocity error signal symbol and changes. If the sign of this speed error has not changed since the start of the search, then the search acceleration phase continues. If the first change in the velocity error symbol is detected, the acceleration flag is cleared in step 935. During the initial phase of the search (also known as the acceleration phase), the speed of the optical pickup unit (0PU) 1〇3 must be accelerated, straight, and its speed reaches the reference speed. At this point, this speed error may be large. Therefore, it is preferable that the multi-track search control means of the compensating means, including the summing means 813, cannot operate during the initial phase of the search, so that it will integrate the large speed error and cause the reference speed A major feedback overshoot. In addition, the control workload during the multi-channel search operation acceleration phase is clamped by the clamp device 808 to avoid excessive acceleration, which may also cause a significant overshoot of the reference speed. Otherwise, the algorithm 557 sets the search control workload, which is proportional to the search control variable of step 815. This algorithm 557 then proceeds to step 804 and the tracking phase leader 55 can be updated to properly initiate its state, thereby reducing the time required to regain the seek in closing the tracking algorithm 555. . From step 935, the algorithm 557 proceeds to step 927. In step 927, if the optical pickup unit (〇pu) 1〇3 is accelerated, a search control variable is set to the speed error in step 928. In step 929, the search control variable is compared to a maximum acceleration variable. Also, when the maximum acceleration variable is exceeded, the search control is set to the maximum acceleration in step 93. ^ If not exceeded, then this algorithm 93 proceeds to step 934. When the right step 924 determines that there is no acceleration, then the algorithm 557 proceeds to step 165 1277079 = 31. If the speed county is in the _most money error, the process proceeds to step 933, and the difference is the speed block difference, plus a value proportional to the speed error product, as shown in the eighth figure. Steps 8〇9, 813, 81〇, 幻卜^斤半七! If the 931 wire stripping wire depends on the error, the job speed error | 峨 ^ 奴 slave & is compared with the step, and the value of the difference knife. This algorithm 557 then proceeds to the step

In OlJ 0 - hour ϊ ϊ ΐΐϋ , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , A search completion detection device 816 can be enabled with a reverse fire ft. This tracking orbiting phase leading compensation device 550 (fifth Figure A) shows the conversion of the phase and the speed error of the phase-introducing device. In this case, the miscellaneous ore algorithm shows that the center of the track is accelerated or decelerated. By increasing the number of seek loops, (bandwidth) by a predetermined number of servo samples (for example: 5), the track servo algorithm 502 can more actively achieve the purpose. Retaining the incremental seek, the time during the loop gain avoids the stability caused by mechanical resonance, so that there is no limit to growth, and thus the system becomes unstable. The net effect of applying the reverse wood arrow converges on one of the obsolete centers, which is very close to the trackback of the building block, which is immediately followed by a very stable tracking control system with one of the rated bandwidths closed. In some embodiments, this algorithm 557 is implemented as part of a control loop on the digital signal processor (DSP) 416. In such embodiments, the search algorithm can be executed, for example, every 2 ( (i.e., 50 KHz). In some embodiments, this algorithm 557 can be operated only on a digital amp & processor (DSP) 416 to provide complete ιοο Ηζ availability. Brother Ten Figure B is a block diagram of the 559. 166 mi οι 9 ί Tracking error letter Focus control workload. The tracking error (Qing) and the difference signal (TES) shown in the figure and the tracking error track of the tracking error 474 indicated by the focus error skewing lung, straight output °: = output pulse width modulation device from block 462 ( The fourth (five) f$ electric house (for example: the orbital beating algorithm is the beginning of the opening map) ^4匕=trr: a single system follows—the focus opening number should be 5 money traces (four),—seek_focus cycle _ /, The optical pickup unit (OPU) is along the desired search, two: speed for a fixed time. During the taxi cycle 1003, the single-observer jump keeps the seek tracking control workload in a single orbital beat reduction. In some implementations, this taxi cycle leaks 3 to the tracking error signal output by the sample integrity test device 548. The value of the tracking error signal 1 Λ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ The single track run algorithm 559 is a tracking digital analog converter (DAC) 468 that applies a deceleration seek control workload. As shown in the figure, the f speed cycle 1002 and the taxi cycle Congzhi acceleration control workload, and _Speed Week J1004 deceleration tracking workload is to make the tracking error signal (TES) After a search, the difference signal (TES) is a period of the position curve, which indicates that a single orbital ί L is after the deceleration period 1 〇〇 4 part of the time 1006, the single track jumps the shoulder to the 559 system to re-assign The low frequency integration device 549 is disabled at the beginning of the algorithm 167 1277079 559 and is not reset. The cycle surface, money chat = quasi-this; circuit 530 will focus control 4: ί = = level. ^ When this early track-beating algorithm 559 is completed, a servo-isolation 500 system re-enters one of the modes of focus and the position of the search. In the case of the μ, the time measure of the tenth age The hierarchy of coefficients, for example, the numbering hierarchy is 2 〇〇 # s. In some examples, the algorithm 559 can be implemented in a digital signal processor (DS々P) 416. Because the response speed of the microprocessor 432 may not be fast enough. The tenth figure B is a block diagram showing the single-event beat algorithm 559. The tracking compensation device 1〇11 includes an integral device Μ9, phase Leading device 550, and notch filtering device 551 to 553. Therefore, The output signal of the tracking compensation device' is generated by turning off the tracking servo system 5〇2, which is input to the multiplex device 558. The tenth figure shows that the multi-tool d-switching device represents the beating state machine 1〇1 In other words, when the single execution algorithm 5^9 starts, the working device 558 is controlled, so that the seek workload generated by the algorithm 559 (rather than the seek control generated by the tracking compensation device 1〇11) The work can be completely applied to the tracking transmission 2〇1. In the tenth figure B ^: the tracking control output of the tracking digital analog converter (DAC) 468 is input to the adding device 1〇20, which is disposed in the power driving device 34A. As previously described, the tracking control workload output by the digital analog converter (DAC) 468 is added to the bias control operation generated by the summing device 1 〇 20 in the drive unit 340. The machine equipment 1021 includes a tracking drive 2〇1 and an optical pickup unit (OPU) 103 and a transmission arm 1〇4. The tracking control workload from the tracking compensation device 1011 is low pass filtered in the filtering device 1012 and input to the sampling and holding circuit 1017. During the execution of the single track jump algorithm 559, the output signal of the sample and hold circuit 1017 is fixed at a constant value. The constant seek control workload output by the sample and hold circuit 1 〇 17 is summed with the single track hopping tracking control generated by algorithm 559 1277079. The single track jump search control profile includes one of the acceleration pulses generated by the pulse amplifying means 1 〇 13 and one of the deceleration pulses generated by the pulse amplifying means 1 〇 14. This track bounce state machine 1010 controls the amplitude of the acceleration and deceleration pulses. The track bounce state machine 1010 further controls the direction of the single track run by determining the amplitude sign of the acceleration and deceleration pulses generated by the pulse amplifying means ^3 and 1014. In some embodiments, the amplitude and duration of the acceleration and deceleration pulses are set during the correction step of one of the correction algorithms 560. In some embodiments, the amplitude and duration of the acceleration and deceleration pulses may be varied in response to a positional function of the optical pickup unit (〇pu) 103 above the optical medium 1〇2. Furthermore, although in FIG. B, 'this jitter control workload profile is represented by including a positive and negative square wave pulse', in some embodiments, the acceleration pulse and the deceleration pulse system may have a sine wave pulse, thereby driving The mechanical arm 10 is prevented from arousing the mechanical resonance track bounce state machine 1010, and then the first sample latching and holding circuit 1017, the low frequency integrator 549 is turned off, and the latch sample and hold circuit 530' is applied from the low frequency integrating device 549. Acceleration pulse. This state machine 1〇1 then changes the symbol of one of the monitoring error signals (TES,). When the symbol is changed, the state machine 1010 applies a deceleration pulse generated by the pulse amplifying means 1 〇 14. If a symbol change is not detected within a set period of time, the track bounce state machine 1010 indicates a failing bounce condition. In these environments, the error recovery routine (please refer to the invention of the system architecture) will be replied to by this condition. Once the deceleration pulse is over, the state machine 1010 switches the multiplex device 558 to receive the tracking control effort from the tracking compensation device 110 and delays for a period of time to attenuate the transient current. This state machine 101 then turns the focus on (by setting the multiplex device 531 to accept the focus control workload instead of the output signal of the sample and hold circuit 530) and re-energizing the integrating means 549. In some embodiments, the single-event beat algorithm 559, 169 1277079 of the tenth figure B may further include notch filter devices 551 and 553, thereby connecting the single track outputted by the summation device 516. Bounce control workload contour. Furthermore, further discussion will indicate that this algorithm 559 can be implemented in a digital signal processor (DSP) 416 in a count-and-load mode, in which case, the single-handed algorithm 559 is implemented. The phase leading device 55 is set to ^=, so that the phase leading device 55〇 can be initialized to an appropriate state after the tracking is closed after the single orbiting operation. Initiating this phase lead device 55 can turn off the dynamic response during the tracking operation. Moreover, during a single track bounce algorithm, the focus control signal can be set to sample and hold, the output of path 530, which maintains the output signal from low pass filter device 529 during a single bounce operation. - Figure 11 is a block diagram showing a digital signal processor (Dsp) architecture 1100 in accordance with the present invention. As described above, the micro-bee 432 and the digital 4-processor (DSP) 416 can communicate via the mail box 434. The starting block hoi, the main loop block 1102, the counting device interrupt block 11〇3, and the sensing tiling block 1120 represent the algorithm on the digital signal processor (DSP) 416. In the initial Hua Cong, the fifth figure and all the second wave device % of the fifth figure 6 are set to zero and all the initialization steps are completed. The main loop, the table does not turn around, it does not actually engage in any of the guards, because in some examples, the digital signal processor (Dsp) 416 is interrupt driven. This counting device interrupt side = 1103 performs a single track jump algorithm 559. The focus and tracking servo algorithm is executed as part of the sensing device interrupt block 112. The sensing device interrupt block 12 can be utilized with the sampling filter devices 414-1 through 414-6 (fourth view) to provide all of the detecting device sensing device signals a, B, C, D, E, and F. Thus, in some embodiments, for example, the -10 GKHz rate has an inductive device interrupt, which occurs once per pass. Therefore, every 10//S, the digital signal processor (DSp) 416 receives an inductive device, which can be used to interrupt the digital device 1120 to 巳 '^彳 · 170 1277079, in steps In 1104, this algorithm ii2 decided to execute that algorithm: focus or seek. The focus servo algorithm 501 and the tracking servo algorithm 5〇2 are alternated with each other, so each algorithm is executed every 20/zs. Therefore, the focus and seek loops are sampled at 20//s or 50 kHz (rather than every 2 〇 # s interrupt) and the focus and tracking algorithms are performed simultaneously. In this manner, there is a lower time delay between the sample detection device signals A, B, C, D, E, and F. In a part of the algorithm, one of the algorithms 1120 can perform a rotary motor servo gentleman method (refer to the invention of the rotary motor servo system). However, this digital signal processor (DSP) 416 operates very fast, but has limited memory limitations. If the algorithm 1120 performs a focus servo algorithm 5〇1, then a focus error signal (FES') is generated in step yu. This focus error signal is the output signal of the sample integrity test device 515. Therefore, step 11; 11 includes the focus feed 501 to integrity test 515. In some embodiments, the missing, detecting J, 59l shots are calculated, and the shot providing - defect signal to "intrusion abandonment algorithm" can be operated on the microprocessor 432. When the focus error signal (FES,) is calculated in step 1U1, the process proceeds to step 1112. In step 1112, the calculation of the new 20 system is not enabled. In some embodiments, the algorithm 1120 determines one of the blocks by controlling one of the control words in the check number 434. If the wire focus is off, then the algorithm lm is completed and the process proceeds to step 1114 °. If the focus system is _, then the operation of the focus tilting method 5G1 is performed in the algorithm 1120 step 3. After step 3, the shoulder law 1120 proceeds to step 1114. If the seek servo algorithm 502 is selected in step 1104, then: in step _, the search = one t track two difference t# "TES" sample complete _ test device 548 is executed with 'number (TES') This algorithm 1120 then proceeds to step Cong. In the chat, this algorithm _ whether to execute a ^ 171 1277079 by the implementation of the financial, its system, _ check face mail box 434 - control early child ^ Search for the flag set. The search operation, the 贞阳胄 algorithm u_ proceeds to step 1107, flute\1, Qiao 57. Step 557 can perform the description of the search algorithm 557, the remaining eight figure B, the ninth picture A, Many of the steps described in Figure 9B. The partial steps shown in Figure 9A and IXg|B can be performed via a multiplexer, as described below. For example, search initiation 9 〇 1 is feasible as the work in the multiplex device 1116. The current search operation or when the step is completed, then the algorithm step (10). In step 1108, the reliance algorithm 1120 determines whether or not. The system proceeds to step = closed 3 steps _ system is completed, then this algorithm (10) "into J 忿 two pass ten, this algorithm 1120 is executed 110 7. Step 11〇9 or 2° However, 'in some examples' a search operation system can be turned on in step 1 and should then be turned on in step 1109, where step 11 is performed simultaneously during the same interrupt. . The minimum and maximum computational determinants 32 are selected in any of the variables in step 111G. Step U_ allows monitoring of the Wei and retaining trace data for use in the monitoring routine. From step 1110, the algorithm 1120 is in the front w f step mountain 4, and the algorithm 1120 determines whether the optical disk drive is in the early-track-off-skiing mode. If this step 1114 is to indicate a single track-and-slide mode, it proceeds to step 1115 in the partial real-range number 434-controlling the appropriate #bit flag in the temporary storage device. Step 1115 determines if the deceleration step of this single track bounce should begin. If yes, start this deceleration step. Once the step 1114 determines that there is no single orbital operation, the decision 1120 proceeds to the multiplexer 1116. 172 1277079 A single orbital beat algorithm 559, as shown in Figures 11A and 10B, is executed in a timing device interrupt mode. However, this algorithm 112 is executed every 10 ms. The acknowledgment steps 1114 and 1115 are performed every l 〇 ms in the embodiment executed in one 。. The timing device interrupt from the single track beat algorithm 559 has a lower interrupt priority than the sensing device interrupt of the touch algorithm 1120. The sensing device interrupt allows the step η μ to start decelerating in step 1115. The multiplex device 1116 includes the work that can be done after the tracking loop or focus loop has been processed (if there is any execution time before the next sensing device is interrupted). Typically, such work in the multiplexer 1116 can be a service that does not require frequent service such as focus and seek servo algorithms. For example, the detection device 517 can be completed by a work order seek error signal (TES) that falls into one of the multiplex devices 1116. As described previously, the tracking error signal (TES) completion detecting means 517 checks the focus error signal (f?Es) and determines the seek error signal (TES) if the focus error number (FES) is too high. According to "two, however, the track servo algorithm 502 does not need to be turned off immediately, so that the tracking error nickname (TES) element waits for the detecting means 517 to wait until the tracking error is reached in the multiplexer mg. The signal (TES) completes the detection device 517. In some embodiments, the multiplex device 1116 can include sixteen jobs. It can be included in the multiplex device 1116 - another example of work includes: by mail mailbox 434 Read new variables and update the Wei used in other areas of this algorithm (10). In this mode, if the microprocessor 432 is adjusted for the focus servo algorithm 5〇1 or the seek side algorithm 502 - For gain or offset values, one of the multiplexer devices 1116 can then read the gain or offset and update the appropriate variable. Some of the possible operations that may be performed in the multiplex device 1116 include: focus loop completion calculation Method 536, poly__ algorithm (t When the execution is executed), the focus of the poor focus flag, the zero-return low-frequency integration device 549 state, the search error signal (TES) and the focus error signal (FES) gain and offset variables are moved from the mail mailbox to the internal Wei, zero return Difficult to set 561 German position (if 173 1277079 this sliding detection device 561 is disabled), reset the beating state, start the search variable of the multi-track search algorithm and start searching, reset the search status, clear The write abandonment state of the abandonment algorithm 537, the search length spiral compensation in the algorithm 557, the notch filter of the correction notch correction algorithms 520 and 552, the wave device coefficients, and the general purpose mail mailbox communication are provided. The multiplexer 1116, the algorithm 1120 proceeds to the update status mail box 1117, which writes the status bits to the mail box 434 as needed. For example, the error interrupt system of the input microprocessor 432 can be set in step 1H7. This algorithm 1120 then proceeds to step 1118 where the diagnostic data can be maintained.

In some examples, this algorithm 1120 can take more time to complete a cycle than if there was time between sensing device interrupts. In this example, some of the sensor interrupts may be missed. However, if too many interruptions are missed or there is not enough time between interruptions, instability may occur in some embodiments. Heart [Example Embodiment of Correction Algorithm] In some embodiments, the dynamic correction system can be executed on the optical disk drive to dynamically optimize the operation of the optical disk drive. In the previously discussed letter; several correction algorithms have been mentioned in the process, which include the following correction algorithms: Detect; ^ Set Offset Correction Algorithm 548 (fifth Figure A) and the device for correction;

$法法583 (figure A), which is used to correct the offset I02-6 (fourth map) and the offset of the amplifying devices 404-1 to 404-6, respectively, and (4): number (the offset correction algorithm) , the system uses ^ 2 ==^ set 5 () 7 (fifth @) focus error signal (fes) ^ positive (FE, S) gain correction algorithm, the system uses 1 ", , error 仏 5 Tiger (FES) gain amplifying device 5〇9 ' _ to correct the inverse nonlinear algorithm 5] crosstalk (four) in positive ^ ^ ^ (TES) to focus error signal (FES: to gather its gamma to correct the tracking error signal (TES ..., difference domain (FES) crosstalk gain 514 and at least delete poly; t error ^ 174 1277079, (FES) part of the tracking error signal (TE 5.! loop 7 /; school '正异二铭H, 笞, + cm 4 feed day should be 'Tie's 抉 difference signal (TES) deviation if ^ TES) 丄, to set the tracking error (TES) offset to the totalizer 541 offset track error signal ( TES) Gain Correction I Method ώζ, ώζ #ΐΓΪ定増县 Algorithm 543 Gain; Reverse Surface Correction Reverse Synthetic Algorithm 546; Enemy Correction Calculator for ϋ, 峨 Positive Notch Filter 551; Correction Calculus Law 5, its 562 early one track Dynamic algorithm 559; loop gain correction algorithm

And ^ ϋϋ tracking error signal (TES) Wei algorithm 502; to, 隹 ^: feed the nose method 579. In some embodiments of the invention, the algorithm is added to continue the algorithm. For the paste, the low-profile device 516 and 546 can be indicated by the twelfth Α Α 犹 — 细 细 细 细 细 细 细 细 细 细 细 细 细 细 细 120 120 120 120 120 120 120 120 120 120 120 120 120 120 120 120 120 120 120 120 120 , 哲·^ is corrected or, or is initially corrected. for example,

The private system can include: controlling the power supply or correcting the motor servo parameters. Figure 12 shows the ugly system showing one of several operating parameters. One of the charts and the number of times the calibration is performed and the correction phase of these parameters in the calibration. The starting value of the parameter for finding the focus of the feeding service can also be initialized between the secret disc machine = 12_. For example, the _device offset correction algorithm: 4 and the detection device gain correction algorithm 583 offset and gain, the notch filter cryptographic forward algorithm 520, and the notch filter device correction algorithm can be ^ Conducting school JL. Operation ±, the correction algorithm can adjust the preset values of each correction > number, and adjust the parameters for the specific characteristics of a standard optical media 1 〇 2 operating CD player 1 。 2 . Once the particular factory calibration parameters are determined in the initial calibration 1201, in some embodiments, the factory calibration values may be stored in the program memory 175 1277079 330 which may include a flash memory. In some embodiments, the correction parameters of the specific media may include, for example, detection device inputs transmitted to the detection device offset devices 402-1 to 402-6 and the gain devices 4〇4-1 to 404-6. The focus error signal (FES) offset of the algorithm 5〇8, the tracking error signal (TES) offset of the correction algorithm 542, and the focus error signal (FES) from the correction method f Gain, Got Error Signal (TES) gain from correction algorithm 544, focus loop gain parameter from loop gain algorithm 522, tracking loop gain parameter from seek error signal (TES) loop gain 562, inverse nonlinearity Correction parameters of functional algorithms 5丨丨 and 546 (including, ···focus error signal (FES) inverse nonlinear parameters and seek & error (TES) inverse nonlinear parameters), notch filter devices 519 and 551 The wave filter device parameters, as well as the single-beat bounce correction algorithm 56, can be written to the optical media 102 so that the optimal operating parameters of the optical media 1〇2 can be awakened in the CD player 100 with a particular optical media. In some embodiments, the optimal average operating parameters can be stored in the program memory 330, and the optical disk drive 100 can be operated by such parameters. The scale average parameter is updated to be updated during the light-touch correction. & The initial correction 1201 can also be repeated during a rework or repair correction 1202. This correction 1201, then, can be restored on the CD 1 The reason why the time tube is repeated is that the fork positive cycle 1203 indicates the normal correction of the CD player 1 (when in service). ^Example,, correction, system can hide every: domain person - shape media 1〇2 When the optical disk drive 1GG starts, and the on-error recovery algorithm _ (the invention of the convergence code system architecture). In some embodiments, when the optical disk drive 1 〇〇 = (ie, "na"), the cycle The default value of the positive parameter is received from the flash memory 33. In some embodiments, the correction parameter of the media is read by the optical miscellaneous 1G2. In some real _, the correction of the specific optical disk drive and the special media Recorded preset number (4) can store miscellaneous memory 330 1 76 1277079 (p. 3) and manned when the disc is touched. In some embodiments, the temporary correction parameters of the media can be stored in the memory 33G, thereby fine-tuning the previous calibration parameters when the CD player 100 is started. The disc player i 〇〇 is usually restarted with the same optical media that was previously turned off, so the number of calibrations stored can save the "waking up" time of the disc player 100.

In some embodiments, the preset values may change over time. When the optical drive 1?0 ages, many of the preset parameters may be very different from those required to operate the optical drive. Therefore, in some embodiments, the actual number of light discs can be used as a job record. In the case of the instance, the average of the actual age setting parameters can be re-stored as a preset parameter. However, if the CD player is operating in an extreme environment, the right optical media 102 is particularly problematic (for example, if the fresh media 1〇2 is severely uneven due to exposure to heat or other curved loops), the second operation under the age scales The parameters should not replace the current default parameters of the sister. Therefore, in the partial column, if the current parameter changes beyond the critical value of the preset parameter, the 4 preset values do not have to be replaced or changed by such parameters. The busy graph B shows the specific parameters of the corrected CD player. In general, the optical ship 102 system can have a pre-master part (which is read only) as described earlier.

Divide (which is read/write). In general, the operating parameters are corrected so that the optical disk drive 100 operates under such conditions, that is, a read operation above the writable portion of the optical disk 1〇2, and a write operation over the writeable portion of the optical disk 1〇2 And the read operation above the pre-master portion of the disc 1〇2. "J" Figure A shows the -correction sequence 135 - an embodiment for correcting the various media types of a light to the medium 102 and for fetching and writing the patterns on such media < (in appropriate manner) In general, the optical medium has several jobs and has four fields. The sequence 1350 starts with step 1351, which sets a first piece. For example, the conditions of the first set The system may be a read-on type above the pre-master portion of the optical media port 102. In the tilt 1352 towel, the pre-amplified 177 1277079 is in the correct mode (eg, reading or writing the laser to the laser system for this mode) Shooting power system setting

The μ system ^ - sequence _ in the 敎 mode and the selected touch _ correction routine 1, and the operating parameters are stored for the disc machine. In step 1355, it is determined whether the operation mode has been corrected and the media type ην7 has ^5. There is a more matching domain, and the 135G system advances to step = and is a combination of the tot operating mode and media type. From step = 7, this phase 1350 proceeds to step 1352, privately correcting the next combination. After the preparation of the school, the "寅 algorithm 135G" ends at step (10). Fig. 13B shows an embodiment of an exemplary correction routine 13〇1 which can be executed at the initial optical disk drive state 12〇1 or in the rework state 12〇2 phase. For example, the calibration routine shown in the thirteenth post may be adapted to the pre-master (four) body-read mode correction. In the partial implementation of the shot, as described in the state 12〇3, the correction algorithm 13〇1 can be executed each time the optical disk drive 1 is started or when a new optical medium 102 is inserted into the optical disk drive 1〇〇. When this algorithm 130/ is started in step 1302, this algorithm 13〇1 is composed of program memory.

(Fig. 2) Read the preset correction parameters. This algorithm 13〇1 then proceeds to step 1303. μ, in step 1303, the algorithm 1301 performs a detection device offset correction algorithm 584 and a detection device gain correction algorithm 583, thereby correcting the offset devices 401-1 to 401-6 and the amplification device 404-1. Up to 404-6, to optimally receive the detection device signals AR, BR, CR, DR, ER, and FR. Once the optical zoom unit (OPU) is input to the parameter offset and gain, the rotary motor 101 can direct the optical media 102 from the algorithm 1301 to the step 13〇4 to a first rotational speed. In step 1304, the algorithm 1301 performs a focus error signal (FES) 178 1277079

The gain correction algorithm 510 corrects the focus error signal (FES) gain parameter input to the gain amplifying means 5〇9. At this point, the focus loop 5〇1 can be closed, and the algorithm 1301 then proceeds to step 13〇5, this algorithm \301 and performs a focus error signal (FES) offset correction algorithm 5 here. 〇8, to optimize the focus error signal (FES) offset parameter input to the summing device 507. Then, the algorithm 1301 proceeds to step 1306, this algorithm 1301 and performs a seek error signal (TES) offset correction 542 there. This algorithm 1301 is then followed by a tracking error signal (TES) gain correction 544 in step 1307. This algorithm 13〇1 then performs a seek error signal (TES) offset correction 542 in step 13〇8. In some embodiments, such seek error (TES) offset correction 542 and tracking error signal (TES) gain correction 544 are alternately performed, and the TAS offset and the search error signal are searched. The chirp (TES) gain is acceptablely convergent. Furthermore, in some embodiments, the focus error signal (FES) noise correction 51G and the focus error money (FES) offset, positive, can be alternately performed until the focus error The signal (fes) gain parameter and the focus error signal (FES) offset parameter converge.

In the embodiment of the algorithm 13〇 shown in FIG. 12B, once the offset error signal is newly corrected in the middle, the algorithm proceeds to step 1309 to perform the % focus loop. The gain correction 522 is before the tracking loop gain correction 585 is performed in step 1310, the string signal (ras) / focus error signal (10)) the error signal (FES) crosstalk gain 枋 positive ^, ± ~) W focus 1 gain correction 522 And in step 1313, the tracking is performed, and the path is 585. In some embodiments, such seek and seek free money (TES) / focus positive gain correction 579 can be performed sequentially until the school 179 ^ 277079 traps 'this algorithm 13G1 is based on performing notch correction 520 And the correction of the trapping ship devices 519 and 55, in the present invention, the algorithm 3G1 can proceed to the step_main 1314 again until all the correction parameters of the servo can be converged. The 13G1 method of the corpuscle method is used to program the new correction parameters in the program fh tif'^ 阙 ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' again

If the number is different than the critical value, then these new positive parameters "storage iWf storage, or will not be stored to replace the old operation of the meeting is stored, straight; school, system may be two examples 'The new calibration parameters and the old correction parameters - the average system can be stored in order to make a quick check. In the embodiment, ^ large number 'by this new correction parameter ^ί=ίί, ΜThe quantity-quantity' will change the old correction parameters

Thanks to the new calibration parameters, this is a flash memory in the memory of one of the eight. Correcting the optical pickup unit (OPU) input parameter A, reading the positive values of 512 and 547, and the offset value of the face-to-face (1) 180 1277079 and the gain values of the respective variable amplifying devices 404-1 to 404-6. B, C, D, E and F. In some embodiments, step 13A2 may also include calibration of one of sampling filter devices 414-1 through 414-6. The embodiment shown in Fig. 14A performs an undercurrent correction of one of the optical manipulation unit (OPU) input parameters. The embodiment shown in Fig. 14b is corrected by one of the input parameters of the optical pickup unit (〇PU) in the presence of light scattering. The embodiment of step 1303 shown in Figure 14A begins at step 1401 and the parameters are passed to step 1303. In some embodiments, the parameters include a gain parameter bFrontEndGain and a correction type flag bCalTypeFlag. These gain parameters are indicative of the gain of each of the amplification devices 4〇4—α 404-6. This algorithm 13〇3, then includes the features of the detection device offset correction 584 and the detection device gain correction 583. In some embodiments, the gain and offset systems of gain devices 404-1 through 404-6 and offset devices = 2-1 through 402-6 can be performed when the laser is off (i.e., a dark current correction). In some embodiments, the gain and offset of the gain device 4〇4_β4〇4_6 and the offset devices 402-1 to 402-6 can be performed without the optical medium 102 when the laser is turned on, thereby adjusting the optical 撷The presence of light scattering in the unit (0PU) 103 is taken. The fourteenth introduction introduces an undercurrent correction. Figure 14 shows the adjustment of one of the corrected light scattering. In some embodiments, as shown in FIG. 14A, the gains of the variable amplifying devices 4〇4-2 to 404-6 are fixed, and the offsets of the offset devices 4〇2_丨 to 4〇2_6 are offset. The values are corrected. In some other embodiments, the gain of the amplifying device 404-6 may also be based on a correction condition (for example, the dynamic range of the sampling filter device 414-1 to 414-6 output should be a fixed peak to peak value) ) to make adjustments. In step 1402, the algorithm 1302 switches to a higher power mode. In the high power mode, this optical machine can ride (as opposed to sleep mode). The operating voltage is led to its operational value and the power is supplied to the laser 218 and the rotary motor κη of the optical pickup unit (OPU) 103. From step 1402, the algorithm 1302 performs step 1404. In step 1404, the difference method 1302 determines the gain of each of the amplifying devices 404-1 to 404-6, bFrontEndGain, according to the gain parameter input of step 1401. In some embodiments, the gain of each of the amplifying devices 404-1 to 404-6 is set to the parameter bFrcntEndGain. The gain values of the respective amplifying devices 404-1 to 404-6 are stored in a gain array 14i4t. In some embodiments, this parameter bFrontEndGain may have a different gain value for each of the amplifying devices 404-1 through 404-6. These gain parameters can then be set during a factory calibration or a rework calibration and stored in the program memory 33A. In some embodiments, the gain values of the respective amplifying means 4〇4-1 to 404-6 are set to fill the operating range of the digital analog converters (DAC) 410-1 to 410-6 (fourth figure) with _. μ In step 1405, the lightning system is set to on or off in response to the bCalTypeFlag parameter input during step 1401. If the laser system is off, the correction is an undercurrent correction that zeros the output of the sample filter to 414-6 when the laser power is off. The laser 218 is one of the correction systems to further reduce the systematic light scattering in the optical pickup unit (OPU) 103. In steps 1406 to 1411, the offset values of the respective offset devices 4〇2 -1 to 402-6 are set. In some embodiments, this offset value is set such that the output signals of the sample filtering means 414-1 through 414-6 can be maintained at zero between calibration periods. In a laser turn-on correction, steps 1406 through 1411 may be, in some embodiments, performed on one of the optical media 1's in the optical disk drive 1 to provide standard reflection. In some embodiments, the optical medium 102 is not applied, or an optically absorptive material may be applied in place of the optical medium 1〇2. Each block 1406 through 1411 updates a portion of an offset array 1415 that is used to store offset values for the offset devices 402-1 through 402-6. This algorithm 13〇3 then jumps out in step 1413, indicating any error conditions that occur (such as an offset value that exceeds the range, a laser that fails the function, or abandon the command (for example)). 182 1277079 ^Temple 4 Figure B shows an embodiment of an input signal offset and gain correction algorithm in accordance with the present invention, including offset of stray light. For example, the detection devices 225 and 226 (second diagram B) of the learning unit (〇PU) 1〇3 receive light from the laser 218 that has not been reflected by the optical medium 102. Thus, the stray light causes the sensing device to shift, thereby affecting the seek servo system 5〇2 and the focus servo system 501 (fifth figure A and figure B). A particular problem is that when the laser 218 power is translated from the read power to the write power, for example, the amount of scattered light measured by the detection devices 225 and 226 is translated and optimized. The seek error signal (TES) offset of the operation of the optical disk drive 100

The signal () offset causes translation. In some examples, the panning system is large enough to cause a write abort condition as indicated by a write abandonment 537, or to cause an uncontrolled miscellaneous error (TES) offset and a miscellaneous error signal ( FES) Offset control performs data writing. Green Tenth_B is an embodiment of algorithm 1302 that is used to correct = the power of the Thunder or the input signal offset of the human laser. The disc drive just shifts the input signal offset to reduce the offset shift caused by the power operation of the laser 218. In the step of algorithm 1302, the optical disk drive is maintained in a fully powered state except for the time when the rotary drive is not operated. again

The optical medium 102 is removed by the optical disc drive 100 so that the light is not incident on the optical pickup unit (〇pu) 1〇3 by the optical transmission. When the CD player has just turned on the voltage solution to lead to the operating parameters, and the CD player " wakes up rather than in sleep mode. The input signal gain (e.g., the gain of each of the gain adjustment devices -1 to 404-6) is corrected in the read mode in step 1451. In some embodiments: two, one input signal (the signals Av, Bv, Cv, Dv, Εν, iLVi shown in the fourth figure are set to be 111 years old. In some embodiments, i-shaped input When the job is recorded, the dynamic range of the analog-to-digital converters (ADCs) 410~1 and 410-2 183 1277079 is filled in. In step 1452, the input is filled. The signal gain can be set to one of the write power levels of the laser 218. Again, the input signal gain can be set to a fixed value. Furthermore, the input signal gain can be set to set the write power level. On time, fill the dynamic range of each analog-to-digital converter (^C). In step 1453, an undercurrent input correction is performed. One embodiment of this input offset correction is shown in Figure 14A. In 1454, the laser power of the laser 218 is set to the read power. In some embodiments, the read power system is nominally set to 〇25 mW. In addition, the input sensing devices of the gain adjustment devices 404-1 through 404-6 The gain system is set to read _ take power and pre-amplify The other channel gain and offset in 31G (figure 3) can be set to read. Furthermore, the input signal offset of the offset device - G can be reset to zero. In step 1455, the digital value of the input signal is entered. After setting a time delay of one of the power levels of the laser 218, an average of a plurality of samples is obtained. For example, the time delay may be about 1 〇ms. In addition, each of the bit input signals is 256. The sampling system can be acquired and averaged to determine the value of the stray light. The input signal offset of the read power level can then be set to a specific value so that the digital input signal is at a certain value (for example: zero) In step I456, the laser power and other channel parameters (for example, the input gain and parameters from the pre-amplification device 31G) can be set to the write mode. In some embodiments, the radar is written. The transmit power is rated above about UmW. In some embodiments, the write laser power can be set to about 15 times the read power, and the input signal offset of any other laser power can be These values are interpolated from the input signal offset. In some examples, the measured stray light is generally linear with the laser power. In step 1457, the input signal offset of the write power is measured. The input signal offsets of the offset blocks 402-1 to 402-6 can be zeroed, and the digital value of the input signal 184 1277079 can also be measured. It is suitable for the write operation. Wait for the number to be sampled in Xu Xi (for example: 256 to set the scale to lose the human offset. Ten (10) to 0.25 two parts of the force rate, the system can be rated as pull ί Γ 应用 applies two points in the calibration, such as · · read power level and 1 5 buy, and read and write people bias (four) from this without plug

Storage:, Ϊ^ίΪ (undercurrent), read power, and write power can be 1 to fall into 1 f memory 320 or 330 (third image). On the CD player. In the persimmon sub-compensation, if the stress rate is reduced (for example, during a multi-executive search operation), the appropriate input signal offset can be read via the power.

The signal offset is taken in ^ and determined by linear interpolation. These appropriate input signal parameters can flow a minimum of I匕 when switching between modes. The frequent correction of the transient electroacoustic in the I-focus servo system 501 and the seek servo system 502 can correct the heat of the optical system of the optical disc 100, and the offset correction of the fourteenth column The algorithm 1302 can be executed at any time in the ^, , and ^^. A method of correcting thermal drift is to track and focus the feeding system and turn off the laser power, measure the dark flow offset via monitoring analogs 1 and 410-2 or sampling filter devices 414-1 to 414-6, and The stray ray values are adjusted for each read mode, ie, using the if parameter set for the read operation and the write mode (also using the operating parameters set for the write operation). 185 1277079 Once these spurious ray values are adjusted for the new undercurrent offset value, focus and tracking can be retrieved. In some embodiments, the average undercurrent shift can be measured. In some embodiments, when the seek and focus servo system remains off, the detection device input system can be disabled and the undercurrent sampling system can be read. The write power stray light values can be measured during manufacturing using known laser power (for example, UmW). In some embodiments, an adaptive; k positive system can be performed to adjust the laser power to optimize the write error rate. The actual write power during the operation of the optical disk drive is then changed. A stray light adjustment algorithm measures the amount of stray light correction based on the actual written laser power using a linear interpolation method. These metric write stray ray values are added to the dark offset value of the periodic measurement and stored as each time the dark offset value is measured. In the write mode, the disc drive 1 is applied to write values; and in the read mode, the disc drive 100 is applied to read the values. For example, the input offset using the laser power can be maintained forever, and the transient current in the tracking servo system 502 and the focus servo system 5〇1 can also be minimized. If stray light is not considered in the input offset, the tracking servo system 5〇2 and the focus servo system 501 will experience a translational effect as the laser power changes. borrow

Corrected by stray light offset, the present invention achieves a looser tolerance of one of the stray light. A fifteenth diagram A and fifteenth diagram B show an embodiment of the focus gain correction algorithm 51 〇 · which can be performed in step 13 〇 4 · of the thirteenth diagram correction algorithm 1301. The fifteenth figure A and the fifteenth figure B also describe the correction of a focus sum threshold value. Fig. 15A shows a block diagram of the algorithm 510, and Fig. 15B graphically introduces the signal and the actuator motion initiated by the focus gain correction algorithm 51. In step 1501, the call algorithm 5〇1 is called. In step 15〇2, the focus error signal (FES) gain of the focus error signal (FES) gain means 509 and the focus error signal (FEs) offset of the offset summation means 507 are loaded. As previously described, the initial focus error signal (FES) offset and focus error signal (FES) gain parameter may be input by optical media 186 1277079 102 in some embodiments, and in some embodiments, by program The memory is 33 inches round. In step 1503, the algorithm 510 generates a focus control workload to move the optical pickup unit (OPU) sinusoidally from its current position to one of the extreme points of the optical pickup (OPU) 103. This extreme point is the point furthest or closest to the optical medium 1〇2. This step is graphically presented in the position map of the drive unit in the time period. From the extreme point of the optical pickup unit (0PU), the optical pickup unit (OPU) 103 is sinusoidally moved to the opposite extreme point and returns to the extreme point of step 1504, as in the time period of FIG. 2 instructions. During this movement, the sum signal from the summing device 534 is monitored. An example of a sum signal from the adder 534 is shown in Figure 15b, which is located on the same time axis as the transmission position. The peak value of this sum signal is the average of the two peak values as the optical pickup unit (OPU) 103 moves from the first extreme position to the opposite extreme position and back to the first extreme position. The sum of the peak sum signal and the peak sum signal can be stored in the variable 15〇7 and accompanied by a counting device to count the number of stored peak values. In step 1505 of > Bifference 510, a reasonable sum threshold value is calculated. This reasonable sum threshold is set based on the peak sum signal calculated in step 1504. In some embodiments, this reasonable sum threshold value is set to one-half of the peak sum signal calculated in step 1504. However, any reasonable value can be applied to a reasonable sum threshold (such as, for example, between about 30 〇/〇 to about 90% of the peak sum signal). When this reasonable sum threshold is lowered, the focus control system becomes more relaxed. Conversely, when the reasonable sum threshold increases, it will be more likely to cause out of focus. This reasonable sum threshold value is output to the focus completion algorithm 536 and further applied to determine if there is sufficient focus to indicate a focus off condition to other algorithms executing on the disc drive 1〇〇. From step 1505, the algorithm 510 proceeds to step 1506. In step 1506, the algorithm 510 moves the optical pickup unit (〇pu) 103 from the first extreme position to the opposite extreme position and via the reasonable total of 187 1277079 and the critical value calculated in step 15〇5, By measuring the focus control workload FCSOFFA occurring at one of the critical values. Again, another sum critical peak is measured and the sum peak variable 1507 is added. In step 1508, the algorithm 510 moves the optical pickup unit (OPU) 103 back to the extreme position and measures a focus control workload FCSOFFB when the sum signal again passes the critical value indicated by the reasonable sum threshold value. . Again, this sum signal peak is tabulated and stored in the variable 15〇7. A critical focus control workload, the offset control workload FCS0FF, can then be calculated by calculating the average of the two critical control workloads FCSOFFA and FCSOFFB. The movement and summation of the optical pickup unit (CHPU) 103 in steps 1506 and 1508 are performed at times 3 and 4 of Fig. 15B, respectively. In some embodiments of algorithm 510, particularly those performed on microprocessor 432, this algorithm 51 is controlled by a digital signal processor (DSp) 416 to control the optical pickup unit (〇pu) 1 〇 3. In step 15〇9, the algorithm 51 from the processor 432 communicates the critical value to a digital signal processor (DSP) 416. The digital signal processor (DSp) 416 then monitors the sum signal from the add-on, device 507 and compares the sum signal to a corrected threshold value to determine, for example, whether the focus is poor and whether the focus can be turned off (eg, Algorithm 535), or whether a defect is detected (e.g., algorithm 591). In step 510, 'this algorithm 51' moves the optical capture unit (〇pu) 1〇3 to the calculation of step 1508. Focus offset control work | FCS 〇 FF indicated position. In some embodiments, the optical pickup unit (〇pu) 1〇3 is moved in a sinusoidal manner to a position indicated by the focus offset control workload 17 (: 8〇171?, to avoid arousing mechanical resonances) It may be aroused with the movement of the optical pickup unit (〇pu) 1〇3 and is not smooth. This algorithm 510 then proceeds to step 1511. In step 1511, the FCSOFF control i is measured - the smaller ball secret Wei Jia to the focus drive ^ set 206 'by which the smart learning unit (〇pu) 1〇3 sinusoidally moved to the vicinity of the critical I focal position 'the sum of the sum of the sum of the signal A decimal number of 1277079 is represented, for example, by one of the required amplitudes if the sum signal is reduced below the reasonable sum threshold. When the optical pickup unit (〇pu) 103 is wound around the critical number, the focus error signal (5) s) outputted by the summing device is controlled. Therefore, the focal error signal (FES) can be sampled at various time points for a plurality of times (i: 300 times), and the focus error signal (FES) peak maximum and the focus error # (FES) peak minimum value can be stored in the variable In 1512. In some embodiments, step 1511 monitors the focus error signal (j?ES) via four oscillations of the optical pickup unit (〇pu) 1〇3, however, any number of oscillations can be monitored. Figure 15B shows the sinusoidal shift and focus error signal (FES) of the optical pickup unit ^(OHJ) 1〇3 in period 6. "In step 1513, the focus error _ tiger fFES obtained by performing the oscillation in step 1511) and the average maximum value of the focus error signal (FES) are obtained by the variation 1512. In addition, the focus error signal (FES) The average peak-to-peak value is calculated in step 1513. Additionally, in some embodiments, the peak sum signal is added to the previous peak sum signal, and a travel integration is integrated. In step 1514, a new gain value is added. The value obtained from the average peak-to-peak value of the error signal (FES) is calculated according to the convergence calculated in step 1513. In some embodiments, the gain is calculated to average the focus error ## (FES). The peak-to-peak value is a predetermined value. In some embodiments, the gain is calculated such that the values between the maximum and minimum peaks and the ♦ ring value are at a predetermined value. Once the gain value is calculated ^ Step 1514 is to transfer the gain value via mail box 434. In some embodiments, the calculations of 'steps 1513 and (4) may utilize the number of health numbers. The processor (10) p) 416 performs. In some embodiments, the calculations of steps 1513 and 1514 can be performed by the microprocessor 432 using the focus error signal (FES) peak value determined by the digital signal processor (DSP) 416. In step 1514, the new gain value is written to mail box 434', which is transferred to digital signal processor 189 1277079 (DSP) 416 based on digital signal processor (DSP) 416 or microprocessor 432 that performs this calculation. Or microprocessor 432. Steps, 151, 1513, and 1514 may be repeated plural times, for example: four times, thereby converge to the optimal correction gain value. In step 1515, the microprocessor 432 is a coffee-value ( For example, the aggregation service algorithm implements a two-point sum of the peak sum signal, so that the critical mail box (5) 5 is more outlined. In step (5) 6, the focus error signal (FES) gain device 5〇9 The new gain value is stored, for example, in the program memory 33. In step 1517, the algorithm 510 jumps out of the algorithm 51 in step 1518, and the optical pickup unit (OPU) Optical media 102 removed Fig. 16A, Fig. 16B, and Fig. 17 show an embodiment in which the focus error signal (FES) offset weight is positive; the difference method 5〇8. In some embodiments, the focus error signal ( The FES) offset correction algorithm 5〇8 optimizes the focus error signal (FEf) offset value for optimal servo operation, as in the sixth figure. In some embodiments, the focus error The signal (FES) offset correction algorithm 508 is optimized for the focus error signal (FES) offset value for optimal read/write operations, which is shown in FIG. In some embodiments, the 1Joule Error ## (FES) offset correction algorithm 5〇8 performs the algorithms represented by the sixteenth, A and sixteenth graphs represented by algorithms 5〇8 and 17th. Then, calculate ^: 508, and calculate a focus error signal (FES) offset correction between the best servo system considerations and the best read/write test. Figure 16 c is a graphical representation of the peak-to-peak value of the Coordination Error Signal (TES), which is a function of the focus error is number (FES) offset curve. If the focus error signal (fes) offset is sufficient to move beyond the flat portion of the curve, the peak-to-peak signal of the seek error signal (TES) will become smaller and the tracking error signal (TES) gain will not Need to change. Figure 16A shows an embodiment of a focus offset correction algorithm 〇8 that includes an optimal servo correction algorithm. This algorithm 5〇8 begins when the call is made in step 1601. In step 1602, the algorithm 508 checks to confirm that the focus servo algorithm 5〇1 indicates that the focus system is off and the rotary servo system indicates 190 1277079 that the learning medium 102 is spinning. Please refer to the invention of the rotary motor servo system. If the I focal system is not turned off or the optical media 102 is not rotated, then the algorithm 5〇8 returns an error flag in step 1607 and returns. If a discard condition is detected, the algorithm 508 jumps out via step 1609 after setting a discard flag. When the right focus system is off and the optical media 102 is rotated, then the algorithm 5〇8 advances to step 1603 where the tracking is turned off. When the seek is closed (ie, when the tracking servo algorithm 502 is not closed), the tracking error signal (TES) is immediately changed to a sine when the obeying passes through the optical pickup unit (0PU) 1〇3. In step 1604, the tracking error signal (TES) settings (including · tracking error signal (TES) gain, seek error signal (TES) offset value, and 1 pre-find control signal) are Save it. In step 16〇5, the tracking error number 4 (TES) gain is set to a predetermined value (for example: 〇χ2〇) and the seek error signal (TES) offset is set to zero. If the algorithm 5〇8 is primarily executed on the microprocessor 432, then the parameters can be communicated to the digital signal processor (Dsp) 416 in the mailing message, 434, where the digital signal processor (DSP) 416 monitors the tracking error signal (TES) output by the tracking error signal (1ES) gain device 543 during execution of algorithm 508. In step 1606, the focus error signal (FES) offset is set to zero. In step 1608, the algorithm 5〇8 monitors the value of the peak-to-peak value of the seek error signal (TES) output by the tracking error signal (TES) gaining device 543, and the focus offset value. The value of the tracking error signal (TES) between the peak and the peak value can be calculated by the value of the search error signal between the ridge value and the peak value (TES p_p). During step 1608, the focus error signal (FES) offset is decremented by a set number, and, between the peak value of the tracking error signal (TES) and the peak value m, the _best focus error signal (touch> offset value is set For the poly: disease, signal (FES) offset value. If the error signal (TES) peak-to-peak signal is increased during a set number of decrement, the step Μοβ K is incremented and jumped out. In some embodiments, if a best focus error (FES) offset value is set (ie, indicating the tracking error signal (TES) peak 191 1277079, and the inter-peak value doping error signal (FES) = ,----------------------------------------------------

The offset value can be used to provide a better value for the focus offset value by using the finer amount of Sr. If an error is found (for example: the search error 3 and the peak number 働 in the - critical peak and peak _ practice); Palace = 5, can be set in the step - error flag to jump ^ ^ receive ^ J- Give up the command, the thief algorithm 5_ can cut one of the instructions to jump out. Τ If the value of the search error signal (TEs) peak and peak = curve, the middle-peak has not been set, the flight algorithm 5_ advance to the step where the 'focus error signal (FES) offset value is reset to zero S is set to the best focus error signal (FES) offset value in the σρ sub-embodiment. In step 1611, if the _ maximum seek error signal (TES) peak-to-peak value can be set in the increased focus error signal (FES) offset direction, then the algorithm 508 increases the focus error signal (FES) bias. Move the value to a set amount. Again, if the measured seek error signal (TES) peak value and the bee value are greater than the current best focus error signal (FES:) offset value, the tracking error number (TES) peak-to-peak value, Then the optimum mis-error signal (FES) offset value is set to the current focus error signal (FES) offset. In some embodiments of the present invention, the algorithm 5〇8 in step 1611 may be incremented, and the maximum value of one of the values between the peak value of the tracking error signal (TES) and the value of the peak value is exceeded. Here, the tracking error signal (TES) peak value, the peak thief value is reduced before the jump out value, and each time the impurity error signal (FES) offset value is incremented. Again, an error condition can be indicated by jumping out of algorithm 5〇8 via step 1607, and an abandon condition can be indicated by jumping out of algorithm 508 via step 1609. Furthermore, in some embodiments, once the peak-to-peak value of a tracking error signal (TES) is set by the set number of 192 1277079 increments, a finer incremental value can be applied, ground, and tracking error. Signal (TES) peak to peak value. The n Z 08 system can perform a search by first delivering a focus error signal (FES) offset, and then decrementing the focus error signal (FES) offset (eg, inverting steps 1608 and 1611 in FIG. 16A). action. From step 1611 or step 1608, the algorithm 5〇8 proceeds to step 1612. In step 1612, the focus error signal (FES) offset from the focus error signal (FES) offset correction method can be set to the optimal polyphonic error (FES) offset value. In step 1613, the algorithm 5〇8& restores step 1605 to store the tracking error health (TES) gain and the seek error signal (TES) offset value. In step 1614, the algorithm resumes the tracking start (i.e., by turning off the tracking in the seek servo algorithm 502), if in step 1602 the seek is turned on. This algorithm 508 then jumps out at step 1615. Fig. 16B is a diagram showing another embodiment of a focus error signal (FES) offset correction algorithm. Again, the focus error signal (FES) offset positive algorithm 508 begins with a call to one of FESOffsetCal in step 1601. In step 1650, the algorithm 508 confirms that the voltage is tied to its operational position ($ is maintained in a sleep mode). Step 1652 represents the top of a loop that ends at step 1615. Step 1653 is to capture a waiver request. The sixteenth embodiment of the sixth embodiment of the algorithm 508 is shown in the state machine format. In state 1671, this focus offset value is the starting value to the beginning, for example: 0X20. This fishing method 508 then proceeds to state 1670. If optical media 1 〇 2 is not rotated or the focus is not turned off, state 1670 begins to rotate optical media 102 and turns off focus in focal servo algorithm 501, as shown in block 1602. The 'No' state 1670 is transferred according to the parameter bCALStep. In the embodiment shown in Fig. 16b, the algorithm 508 can be converted to a measured baseline state 1655, a measured coarse negative state 1659, a current optimal offset rising value 166, a measured coarse Value state 1663, current optimum offset drop value 1665, measurement fine 1667, or final loop gain correction state 1678. In a failure or error condition 193 1277079, this algorithm 1670 can be transferred from state 1670, or from any other state to command retry state 1672. ~ State 1672 can be transferred back to state 1670 to retry a particular command for a set number of times. If the current command is not successfully completed within the set number of times, then the algorithm 508 can be transitioned from state 1672 to command clear state 1673. In state 1673, this algorithm 508 performs a clear function to reply from a failure or a relinquish command and to a final flag state 1676. If a give up command is detected, then the algorithm 508 transitions to the abandon state 1675 via state 1674. From state 1675, this algorithm 508 branches to command clear state 1673. > State 1670 can be moved to final flag state 1676 when parameter bCalSel is set to the last flag step. In state 1676, this algorithm 5〇8 sets the jump flag. If an error is detected, the algorithm can be transferred to command retry state 1672 via state 1656. Otherwise, this algorithm 1676 transitions to command completion state 1677' to jump out in return step 1615. If an error is detected, state 1677 can set an error flag, and if the algorithm 5〇8 is successfully completed, state 1677 can set a flag to indicate successful completion. In step 1670, if the parameter bCalStep indicates a measured baseline function, then the algorithm 508 branches to the measured baseline state 1655. State 1655 measures the baseline value of the peak-to-peak curve of the tracking error signal (TES) by calculating the minimum and maximum values of the tracking error signal (TES), as indicated by block 1658. If state 1655 indicates an error, then this algorithm 5〇9 transitions to state 1672 via state ^6=. If there is no error in the indication, then this parameter bCalStei^^, is set to perform a coarse negative value function, and this algorithm 5〇8 is shifted back from state 1657 to state 1670. If the parameter bCalStep is set to perform a coarse negative function, then this algorithm 508 is transitioned from state 1670 to state 1659. In state 167, this algorithm 508 decrements the focus offset value to maximize the tracking error signal (TES) peak value and peak value. If a maximum value of 194 1277079 is found by decrementing the focus offset value, the focus offset value is set to this value. In some embodiments, as shown in block 1690, a loop gain correction algorithm of focus servo system 501 can be executed in state 1600. If state 1659 indicates an error, then algorithm 508 transitions to state 1672 via state 1656. Otherwise, the parameter bCalStep is set to the current optimal offset rise value, and this play method % grandchild transitions to state 1670 via state 1657. In state 1670, if the parameter bCalStep is set to the current optimal offset, the algorithm 508 branches to state 1671. In step 1661, algorithm 508. The sorrow 1659 may be via a reduced offset. The best focus error signal (FES) offset is found. State 1661 is smoothly advanced to the best offset found by state 1659. If state 1661 indicates an error, then this algorithm 5〇8 is transferred via state xin 1656 to State 1672. Otherwise, this algorithm 1661 can set the parameter bCalStep to measure the coarse positive value, and the algorithm 508 can be transferred to state 1670 via state 1657. In some embodiments, in the focus servo loop 5〇j One of the loop gain correction algorithms can be executed in state 1661, as indicated by block 1662. From state 1670, if the parameter bCalStep is set to measure a coarse positive value, then the algorithm 508 branches to state 1663. In state 1663, the best focus error signal (FES) offset can be found by increasing the focus error number (FES) offset. If an error is detected in state 1663, then the algorithm 5〇8 is φ by State 1656 transitions to state 1672. Otherwise, this parameter bCalStep can be set to calculate the current optimal offset descent value, and this algorithm 5〇8 can be transferred to state 1670 via state 1657. In some embodiments, the primary loop The gain correction algorithm can be executed in state 1663, as indicated by block 1664. If the parameter bCalStep is set to calculate the current optimal offset descent value, then the algorithm 508 branches to state 1665. In state 1665, this Algorithm 508 smoothly proceeds to the best focus error signal (FES) offset found in state 1663. If an error is detected in state 1665, then algorithm 508 is transitioned to state 1672 via state 1656. Otherwise, the algorithm can set 195 1277079 parameter bCalStep ' to measure the fine bidirectional value (b〇thway) and transfer to state 1670 via state 1657. In some embodiments, one of the focus loops 5〇1, The road gain correction algorithm can also be performed in state 1665. If the parameter bCalStep is set to measure the fine bidirectional value, then the algorithm 508 is transferred from state 1670 to State 1667. In state 1667, the algorithm 508 begins with the best focus error signal (FES) offset and gain determined by states 1659 and 1663, and takes fine steps (both positive and negative). The number of peaks and peaks of the tracking error signal (TES) is found to be reduced by -, and if an error is detected in state 1667, then this algorithm 5〇8 is transferred from state 1656 to state 1672. Otherwise, this parameter can be set to loop gain calculation, and this algorithm view can be transferred back to state 1670 from the state view. If this parameter bCalStep is set to loop gain calculation, then this algorithm 508 is shifted from |y|1670 to state 1678. In state 1678, the primary loop gain correction algorithm is executed on focus servo system 5〇1. This parameter bCalStep can be set as the final flag, and this algorithm 5〇8 can be in state 1670. The seventeenth figure shows a focus offset correction algorithm 5〇8 which provides an optimum item//3⁄4 person offset value. The algorithm 5Q8 of Fig. 17 begins with a focus offset jitter correction algorithm at step 1701. In step 17 (10), the algorithm 508 of the tenth diagram is performed by performing a search operation (for example, by performing a home-tracking orbit search > 贞 nose method 557), thereby placing the optical pickup unit (Qpu) on the optical Above one of the sections of the media 102. When step 17〇2 is completed, the focus servo loop 501 and the tracking servo loop 5〇2 are simultaneously turned off. w In step 1705, the algorithm 5〇8 of the seventeenth figure adjusts the focus offset value. In step 1706, the algorithm 508 adjusts the focus servo loop (i.e., utilizes the focus servo algorithm 501 and the mechanical device) to provide an overall open loop gain, thereby providing a single response at a crossover frequency. This crossover frequency is the open loop of the focus loop (i.e., including the focus servo algorithm 501 and the mechanical device) 196 1277079. The transfer function is the frequency of 壹. In some real wipes, this crossover frequency is about 135. In step 1708, the measurement data is beaten. Alternatively, the hopping system can be measured by controlling the bit error rate in a read operation. In some embodiments, 'for example, the jitter system can be compared by phase comparison from the slicing device 42 / the figure and block 426 (fourth) - loading. π In step 1709, the algorithm 508 checks to see if the data jitter is minimized. If not, then the algorithm 508 returns to step 17〇5 to further offset the focus error signal (FES). Otherwise, in step (10), this performance

The f508 sets the filament subtraction (FES) offset to the worst value and jumps out in step 1711. The lower ~ and nineteenth lines show the tracking error signal (TES) offset shoulder algorithm 542 - an embodiment, which can be performed in the thirteenth figure correction exercise = 2 steps 1306 and 1308. Again, the tracking error signal (10), the bias can be included: according to one of the best ship operations offset calibration shown in Figure 8, or according to the best read / write operation of the forward algorithm (such as Figure 19 shows). In part

(10) Calculate _ Newca according to the fine good = take /, the person is actually closed, and can be whispered - tracking error error one (; E 乂 T shift value ' is based on the best servo operation (such as the eighteenth "I error signal (TES) offset and root according to the best read/write operation: shown in the figure) between the tracking error signal (TES) offset: - the appropriate signal (TES) offset, for example, The system can be: - the weighted average between the tracking error signal (TES) offset and the power difference signal (10) of the service function. Change = #夫 =, =) partial, often indicates: optical extraction unit (0PU)(9) It is not possible to track the track above the center of the track, but it may be unstable in the center of the car. For example, ^, it will be easier to lose the track. In addition, the specific track Error ^ 197 1277079 = Other parameters (for example, 'find loop gain') may also be incorrect. In Figure 18, the tracking error signal (TES) offset algorithm is used. In step 1801, Called here. In step 18〇2, this is the result of whether the focus in the algorithm 501 is off and the rotation motor is not red (light reference rotary motor servo) The invention is disclosed. (For example, if the focus system is turned on, the silky media 102 is not, turn 4), then the algorithm 542 jumps out via step 18〇8 and sets a ΪίΪ mark. Error recovery example The line program further describes the invention of the system architecture

In the case of Zhong Yiqing, the algorithm 542 jumps out through the steps, which indicates a waiver condition.

The seek algorithm 542 then proceeds to step 1803. In step 1803, if it is self-explanatory (that is, when the tracking servo system 5G2 is off), then the tLJ*2 system proceeds to step 18G4 to close the search. When the search is closed, the ί^ίΐ542 system proceeds to the step. 1805. In step 1805, the current tracking error M; r' (TES) gain and the current seek error signal (TES) offset are added to the tracking signal (TES) offset value in step 18G6. In some embodiments, this tracking error signal (TES) offset can be sighed to zero. In other embodiments, the tracking error signal (TEs) offset ΐ can be set to a different value. In some real-time, this algorithm 542 ΐ 重新 re-set the tracking error signal (TES) gain number -: Γ pre-, value. In some embodiments, the tracking error signal (tes) = cup value is maintained at the current seek error signal (TES) gain value. This performance method 542 then proceeds to step 1807. In step 18G7, this algorithm 542 checks to confirm that the focus ship is 502-instructed-focus off condition. If the focus is lost, then the algorithm M2j can jump out via step 18〇8 indicating an error message. Again, if there is a : abandon condition ' then this algorithm 542 can jump out via step 1809 < nose 542 then proceeds to step 1810. 198 1277079 Step by step 'This algorithm 542 determines the small and maximum values of this tracking error signal /FES). Since the tracking system is turned off, the tracking error signal (TES) is a sinusoidal signal that shifts the sinusoidal period when a track passes below the optical pickup unit (〇pu) 1〇3. The axis averages these minimum and maximum numbers, and the center of the ten sine seek error signal (TES) can be determined. This measurement of the tracking error signal (TES) offset and this tracking error signal (TES) is the youngest in a number of cycles: the value can be applied to determine the tracking error signal (TES) offset value. In step 1811, the algorithm 542 checks if the measured tracking error signal (TES) offset value is zero. If yes, then in step 1812, a count

The setting is set to the parameter iCalNum+1. If not, the parameter iCount is passed and the algorithm 542 proceeds to step 1813. In step 1813, an offset is set to subtract the resulting seek error signal (TES) offset for this miscellaneous error signal (TES) offset. In step 1814, the calculated offset is truncated. In step f^15, the seek error signal (TES) offset is set to the value calculated in step 1814. In step 1816, the counting device ic〇unt checks to see if it is less than the parameter iCalNum+1. If so, then the algorithm 542 returns to step 1817. In the step π towel, if the counting device iQ) unt is equal to the reference

The number 1 〇: & 1 > ^ 111 sets a pause error condition, and the algorithm 542 can jump out via step 1808. ^ This even device iCount is greater than the parameter iCalNum, indicating that the good tracking error signal (TES) offset value has been found, and the algorithm 542 then proceeds to step 1817 where the best is stored. The seek error signal (TES) offset value. This ridge error signal (TES) gain value is reset in step 1817. In step 1818, if the tracking system is turned on at call algorithm 542, then the algorithm 542 turns off the seek in the tracking servo algorithm 5〇2. This algorithm 542 can then normally jump out via step 1819. The nineteenth figure shows a seek error signal (TES) offset correction algorithm 542 that sets the seek error signal 199 1277079 (TES) offset based on the optimal read/write conditions. The algorithm 542 as shown in Fig. 19 is called in step 19〇1. In step 1902, an optical capture unit (〇PU) 1〇3 is placed over the optical media 102 readable material. In some embodiments, an optical pickup unit (OPU) 103 is placed over the middle of the optical medium 1〇2. In some embodiments, an optical pickup unit (OPU) 103 is placed over the optical medium 102, and a multi-channel search system is applied to place the optical pickup unit (〇pu) 1〇3 on the optical medium 102. Read above the data. In step 1903, the algorithm 542 turns off the focus in the focus servo algorithm 5〇1, and in step, the algorithm 542 turns off the tracking in the tracking servo algorithm 5〇2.

In step 1905, the algorithm 542 adjusts the tracking error signal (TES) offset value. This tracking error signal (TES) offset value can be incremented towards either, increasing or decreasing. If the search error # (TES) offset value is not successful in the first direction, then the algorithm 542 can increment the tracking error signal (TES) offset value in a = direction. Furthermore, the starting tracking error signal (TES) offset value may be the optimum seek error signal (TES) offset value calculated by the eighteenth graph method 542. In step 1906, the tracking error signal (TES) gain is set to provide a single overall open loop at the two tracking error signal (TES) crossover frequency.

f ϊ,. The tracking error signal (TES) crossover frequency is the frequency at which the open loop gain is set to 壹. In some embodiments, the more the tracking error signal (tes) = the rate is about 1.8 legs. In the step of the scarf, (4) the beating system is measured. The beating of the beaker can be measured by the method described in steps 17 and 8 of the seventeenth embodiment. In step = 1908, this algorithm 542 checks to see if the ί2!! hop is determined at step 19 〇 7 to be at a minimum value. If no (ie, if the data is beating, the rail error signal (TES) is incremented), then the algorithm 542 returns to step 1905. When the data decreases as the additional tracking error signal (TES) offset increases, an optimum tracking error signal (TES) offset is determined. If an optimal tracking error signal (TES) offset value is set, the 200 1277079 寅 algorithm 542 can proceed to step 1909 where the search error b tiger (TES) offset value is stored. This algorithm 542 can then jump out at step 191. The twenty-fifth diagram illustrates one embodiment of a seek error signal (TES) gain correction algorithm 544, which may be in step 1307 of the correction algorithm 13〇1 shown in FIG. This calculus 544 is called in step 2001 and is in front of the boat. This tracking error signal (10)) is one of the gains of the f-f, which is different from f544. This starting value can be the current value of the seek error signal (TES) gain or a preset value of the seek error signal (TES) gain. In step 2002, the algorithm 544 determines that the focus system is turned off in the focus servo ϊΐΐϊ 2 and the optical medium 102 is rotating. If the focus system is not turned off or the media 102 is not rotated, then the algorithm 544 jumps out using one of the error flags set in step 2〇〇6. If an abandon condition is detected during step 2〇〇2, the algorithm 544 uses the abandonment flag ^ which is set by step 2007 to jump out. If step 2002 is normally identified, then the algorithm 544 proceeds to step 2003. In step 2003, if the homing system is turned on, then the algorithm 544 proceeds to step 2004 to turn off the tracking and then proceeds to step 2005. Otherwise, the algorithm 544 falls into step Na. In the partial implementation, the optical array (ORJ) 1〇3 series can be placed in a specific area of an optical medium or a specific media type in step 2〇〇2. In step 2005, the algorithm 544 checks for a focus closure condition (a focus completion flag set by the ridge completion algorithm 536 to indicate). If (4), side open, then this algorithm 54 forging can be profitable = step 2GG6 obtained - the error flag surface jumps out. Again, if a discard condition is detected, then the algorithm 544 can use one of the steps obtained in step 2〇〇7 to discard the flag and jump out. If the focus is off and no error is detected or the condition is discarded, then the algorithm 544 proceeds to step 2Q08. In coincidence 8, this algorithm 544 determines the minimum and maximum values of the tracking error signal 1) sinusoidal signal. Step 2008 can include searching 201 1277079 1277079

The error signal peak-to-peak value (TESP-p) algorithm 545 is implemented. In particular, this algorithm 544 determines the peak-to-peak value s-IPeakPeak of the tracking error signal (TES). In step 2〇〇9, a gain factor is calculated based on the peak-to-peak value determined in step 2009 and a reference peak-to-peak value TES-GAIN-REF. In some embodiments, the gain factor is a ratio between the reference peak-to-peak value of the tracking error signal (TES) and the value between the measured peak-to-peak value. In step 2〇10, the algorithm 544 checks to ensure that the enhancement factor is between a lower limit and an upper limit (for example, 'between 0.25 and 4') to ensure the tracking error. The signal (TES) gain does not change too fast or fast. If this gain factor falls outside the range, the gain factor of Bay 7 can be reset to extreme values within this range. ...in step 2011, the -gain value is set to the tracking error signal (TES) gain multiplied by this gain factor. In step 2012, the algorithm 544 checks to confirm that the gain digit is between the set limits (for example, between ^28 and +128). If the tracking error signal (TES) gain (this gain value) is outside the set limit, an error flag can be set. Otherwise, the tracking error signal (TES) gain is set to the gain value in steps 2〇13, and the algorithm 544 proceeds to step 2014. 2 In step 2014, if the counting device ic〇unt is less than a maximum value and this increase

If the sister factor is not 壹, then the algorithm 544 returns to step 2〇05. In step 2(8)5, the computing device iCou_ is incremented and an error condition can be set so that the algorithm 544 can jump out via step 2〇〇6 (if the counting device fount is the maximum counting device iCount). If the gain factor is 壹, then the algorithm 544 converges to the value of the TES gain and proceeds to step 2015. In step 2015, when the algorithm 544 starts at step 2〇〇1 and normally jumps out in step 2G16, the 544 system that is turned on will be closed. The twenty-first figure of the expanded table a represents a loop gain correction algorithm 2100, which may be the focus loop performed by the step 13〇9 in the thirteenth graph correction algorithm 1301. 202 1277079 ϋ才父正> The heterogeneous 522, or the thirteenth figure correction algorithm i3〇i, in step 1310, executes the seek loop gain correction algorithm 562. Both the focus loop gain correction algorithm 522 and the seek loop gain correction algorithm 562 operate on the same method as the credit. In the focus loop gain correction algorithm 522, a sinusoidal interference that is one of the desired frequencies is generated in the sine wave generating device 528 and applied to the focus control workload via the summing device 523. One of the discrete Fourier transform coefficients obtained by the discrete Fourier transform algorithm (DFT) 527 of the front focus control workload of the summing device 523 and the discrete Fourier transform algorithm (DFT) 525 interfered by the gain calculating means 526 are discrete. The Fourier transform is compared to determine the gain of the loop gain amplifying means 524 so that the overall open loop gain of the crossover frequency is OdB. Similarly, one of the sinusoidal gain correction algorithms 562 φ one trajectory crossover frequency (which is generally different from the focused crossover frequency) is generated by a sine wave generating device 568 and is summed up Device 563 is applied to the tracking control workload. A discrete Fourier transform system of the discrete Fourier transform algorithm (DFT) 567 of the front tracking control workload by the summing device 523 and a discrete Fourier transform algorithm (DFT) 565 of the interference by the gain calculating means 566 Conversion comparison. The gain of this loop gain device can be set so that the overall turn-on loop gain of the seek is 〇dB. In some embodiments, the crossover frequency of the focus loop correction algorithm 522 can be; [·5ΚΗζ left

Right, and the crossover frequency of the tracking loop correction algorithm 562 can be about UKHz. In the twenty-first diagram of W and f, the loop gain algorithm 2100 represents a generalized loop enhancement algorithm, which can be implemented as a focus loop gain correction algorithm 522 or a seek loop gain correction algorithm 562. This algorithm 2 touch begins in step 2101 with this call. This algorithm 21 then proceeds to step ^. In the ^ Road Increasing Algorithm 2 just the towel, the current correction of this loop side closed. In some of the realities, the focus loop gain correction algorithm 522 can be executed without shutting down the seek. However, for the hybrid loop gain correction calculation, the focus and the search system are simultaneously turned off. Port 203 1277079 In step 2102, this algorithm 2100 performs a Bode algorithm at the crossover frequency. An embodiment of this Bode algorithm is further discussed in the twenty-second diagram. Basically, the Bode > algorithm executed in step 21〇2 performs a discrete Fourier transform algorithm (DFT) while indicating the frequency interference with the loop (the crossover f at step 21〇2). The interference and the obtained measurement signal, the comparison of the two conversions, and the return of the specified frequency in the frequency range, the gain value. Therefore, in step 2102, the Bode algorithm returns the overall loop gain of the crossover frequency. Once the loop gain for this crossover frequency is obtained in step 2102, it is inverted in step 2103 and multiplied in step 2104 by the current increment value obtained at block 21〇5 to form a new loop gain value. The new gain value enables the return gain of the output signal of the return-channel gain amplifying device (the amplifying device 524 of the focus loop gain algorithm 522 or the amplifying device 564 of the tracking loop gain algorithm 562) to maintain the loop gain The value of the gain required for zero (for example). In some embodiments, to achieve a large dynamic range using a finite number of bits, the gain of the loop gain amplifying device is separated into a gain and a translation term. The overall gain is multiplied by the translational power of two (2SHIFT). Therefore, in some embodiments, this algorithm 21 expands the new loop gain into a gain and a second translation in step 21〇6. For example, in some embodiments, the data is transmitted in a sixteen-bit word and the loop gain value can be separated into a twelve-bit gain item and a four-bit translation item. If so, as long as the approximate loss resolution is achieved, a larger dynamic range can be achieved. In step 2, the algorithm 2100 stores the new gain of the loop gain amplifying device. This algorithm 21 jumps out normally in step 2108. The less eleventh figure indicates that a GetBode algorithm 2200 is obtained, which can be performed in step 2102 of the twentieth-picture loop gain correction algorithm 2. In general, the 'B〇de' algorithm utilizes a known interference to interfere with the loop (for example, the summing device 523 or in the first graph, and measures the loop for this interference) The response is used to determine any 204 1277079 call rate in a servo loop; the rate '曰'. This Bode algorithm 2200 starts at step 2201. Several parameters can be transmitted to this Bode algorithm. , the starting frequency and the ending frequency, indicating that the circuit should be disturbed (tracking 22 if-parameter, oscillating device amplitude value (which may vary with the tracking feed feeding circuit), calculate the average number, Loop = wave, whether the wave device will correct the fine-turning state, during the correction period, whether it is closed, whether the automatic gain is turned on or off, and whether the floating point mosquito point is used. Step 2202 indicates - Hybridization step. Step 2203 indicates the top of the loop, which may end when the correction sequence of algorithm 2200 is completed.

The remainder of this algorithm 2200 is represented in the state diagram format. From step 2204, the algorithm 2200 enters an introduction state 2217, where the software indicator is initialized to the silk transfer function numerator and the denominator (eg, the search error number (TES), focus error signal (FES). ), and the number of points in the search control workload). In addition, if it is enabled, this introduction state 2217 will automatically close the jump. Thus, state 2217 is introduced. This algorithm 2200 enters a memory e state and state 2204. In this memory setting state 2204, this algorithm 22 〇〇 δ is further set to § 己 体 to perform the algorithm 22 波 Bo (je 〇 je calculation. In some embodiments, the memory The setting is performed separately for each frequency, because the path length can vary with each frequency. In contrast to the frequency & the length of the path can get better frequency resolution. If the available memory is insufficient, Then the algorithm 22 is transferred to a free memory state 2214, where any memory that has been set is released. Thus free memory state 2214 'this algorithm 2200 can be transferred back to state 2214 (if wave The Bode calculation is performed on a further frequency or a positive completion state 2215 (which closes the loop starting at step 2203 if the computation is complete). If there is not enough memory available to perform this calculation, then this The algorithm g can jump out in step 2216, which indicates an insufficient memory error condition. If state 2204 sets enough memory, then this algorithm 22 transfers 205 1277079 to the state. 2205. In state 2205, the algorithm 2200 tests to confirm that the focal system is off and the trajectory is off (if indicated). If the focus system is A, then the sorrow 2205 is off focus. If it is turned on and should be turned off, then the 2205 series will find the _ _ _. If there is no _ memory, then the 2 2206 system can be transferred to this free record state, and the additional record = body.

Once the required loop is closed in the sorrow 2205, the algorithm 22 〇〇 to state 2206. In state 22061, one of the selected frequencies operates to oscillate through the system. On the first channel via algorithm 22, this selects the frequency of the start frequency. In the subsequent ride, this is between the frequency of the job and the frequency of the surname. This oscillating device applies - sinusoidal interference to the domain tracking;; The amplitude of this interference is related to previous measurements. For example, if the response data towel has a positive slope, the amplitude can be reduced; and if there is a negative slope in the response data, the amplitude can be increased. This algorithm 22〇曰6 Ik shifts to state 2207 (if an automatic gain is set to on), or to sample state 2208 (if the automatic gain is set to off). If the auto-increment is turned on, the interference amplitude is adjusted so that the maximum peak-to-peak value of the tracking error (TES) and the focus error signal (FES) is close to a target value. If the tracking error signal (TES) or focus error signal (FES) is too large, the interference amplitude is reduced. If both are ^ hours, the interference amplitude is increased. In some embodiments, the seek error signal (TES) and the aggregate error signal (FES) can be directly monitored for frequencies below the t frequency; and for frequencies above the critical frequency, peaks and peaks can be monitored. The value between. The automatic gain state 2207 can be wrapped around the correct sampling state 2210 to increment the interference amplitude. In the correct sampling state 221 — - this / show method 2200 is confirmed that the focus system is still off and the tracking system is still closed (if required). This algorithm 2200 is shifted via the loop indicating state 22〇7^221〇 until the interference amplitude generated by state 2206 has been set. At the time of completion, this algorithm 2200 is transferred to the state toilet.熳搌中田 (10) 206 1277079 In state 2208, the path data is obtained. The path data includes: data with interference, and interference from measurement of control workload. For example, the state 2206 can turn on the sine wave generating device 528, and the path data obtained by collecting the signal input by the summing device 523 and the path dragon obtained by the twisting 523 output signal are respectively collected by the large state fiber. , path i and path 2. Once algorithm 1 has sufficient path data for Path 1 and Path 2, algorithm 22 (8) is transferred to state 2209. In the j-shaped %2209, the interference turned on in the state 2206 is turned off, and the method 2200 is shifted to the state 2210. In state 221, this algorithm 2200 confirms that the focus system is still off and the seek system is still closed (if needed). In some embodiments, the algorithm 2200 can also check whether the path data of the path 丨 and ^2 has sufficient _ peak peak training. If the path data is incorrect (for example, because the loop is already open), then the algorithm 2200 transitions to state 2211. In state 2211, this algorithm 22 attempts to measure the path data. If the focus or tracking loop is already on, the sinusoidal interference amplitude that begins in the dim 2206 can be reduced. Once this algorithm Bo adjusts the parameters (e.g., the amplitude of this sinusoidal interference), the algorithm 22 then transitions back to state 2205. If too many retry actions are attempted, then this algorithm 22(8) can transition to state 2213 and set an error flag. If the algorithm 2200 finds the correct material in state 2210, then this algorithm 2200 is transitioned to state 2212. In state 2212, the amplitude of path 1 and path 2 at the sinusoidal interference frequency is calculated simultaneously. Once this is done in state 2212, this algorithm 2200 transitions to state 2213. In state 2213, the ratio of the amplitude of path 1 to the amplitude of path 2 is calculated. This algorithm 22 then moves to state 2214. This algorithm 2200 can release the records applied in the previous calculations. If an error flag has been set, or the Bode calculation has been completed, then the algorithm 2200 then transitions to state 2215 and then ends at state 2216. Otherwise, this algorithm 22 transfers the frequency and transfers to state 2204 to set the memory for the next frequency calculation. 207 1277079 ^ Twenty-three graphs represent a discrete Fourier transform algorithm (DFT) 23 〇〇 ^ two embodiments, which can be applied to the GetBode algorithm 2200 of the twenty-second graph. This Discrete Fourier Transform Algorithm (DFT) algorithm can be applied anywhere, for example, in discrete Fourier transform algorithms 527, 525, 567, and 565. In some embodiments, a fixed point operation can be used to perform the calculations described herein. In some embodiments, the floating-point arithmetic system can perform faster algorithms using fixed-point arithmetic. However, algorithms that perform operations using floating-point arithmetic can be more accurate and less prone to overflow problems. ^ This/Bei method (8) begins when the call is made in step 2301. In step 2302, the variables R and I are initialized. In step 23〇3, the other variables threats _ and ImagComp are set to zero and the path index is set to zero. In step 23〇4, this departure from the Fourier transform algorithm (DFT) is checked to see if the sine and cosine coefficients (R and I) exist at the current path point of the path indicator. If not, in step 2305, the sine and cosine coefficients can be calculated. = Then, this algorithm 2300 proceeds to step 23〇6. In step 23〇6, the algorithm 2300 checks-missing the sample to confirm that the sampling of the sine and cosine is aligned with the time of the measurement waveform. If a sample is missed during the measurement, then the algorithm 23〇0 must be executed while skipping one of the sine and cosine coefficients. If no, then this algorithm is 23〇. The multiplication of the cumulative path with the positive 3/cosine coefficient is performed in step 23.7. In addition, this path indicator can also be incrementally increased in step 2307. In step 2308, the indices pointing to the sine and cosine are incremented. In the step ', if there is more path data, then the algorithm 2300 returns to step 2304. If all of the path data has been processed, then the algorithm 23 proceeds to step 2310 where the cumulative amplitude calculated in step 2307 is calculated. In step 2311, # this amplitude is accumulated. In step 2312, if a more uniform average amplitude is to be processed, then the algorithm 2300 proceeds to step 23〇3. Otherwise, the algorithm 2300 calculates the average amplitude in step 2303 and jumps out in step 23〇4: the twenty-fourth figure represents the seek error signal (TES) to the focus error signal 208 1277079. An embodiment of algorithm 579. As shown in Fig. 5A and Fig. 581, the positive correction algorithm 579 will generate a sine wave from the sine wave. & scrambling, adding device 563, # to interfere with this tracking control dream Φ string increasing her forward algorithm 579 immediately system - crosstalk plus total 士士Μ3 output of the clock difference (FES) single Point, scatter Fourier transform (DFT), and in ί raw with tSif, (FES) fresh component = string;, turn out 'hunting to set the frequency of the focus error signal (FES) into: ί; Set 2 selected = mention f good = fruit no Ϊ ί why convenient frequency (ie: steady) 5) =, ΐ κ ί 2 = column, a crossover solution can be applied, 夕 ϋ ϋ _ table does not execute This crosstalk correction algorithm 579 is an algorithm of the second block @. Before the execution of the sound correction algorithm S79, it is turned on at the same time. This algorithm 579 is in the step-by-step call, and the 579 system starts the loop, which is performed in the algorithm 579. When the crosstalk gain parameter correction system is determined The knot 24^ calculus 7^f9^i is expressed in the state function format. In the state =t:^ foot touches the ton line this algorithm. If „Insufficient, the algorithm 579 is transferred to step 24〇9, which releases 2:1: over. This algorithm 579 then moves to the step and ends the loop starting in step _. Finally, This algorithm 579 sets an error flag and jumps out in step 2411. Fans have enough to make this algorithm 579 capable of setting 6 memory in state 24〇4, then this>胄#如9杂移到 State鸠. In (4) 2 This algorithm 579 is a mosquito 4, and its suppression target is 209 1277079 = 514 514 (figure A). This algorithm 579 can be - the preset standard reads the preset value, or the last crosstalk gain & value is read by the program memory 33, or the last crosstalk for the optical medium 102 is read by the optical medium 102 =

Hr妓 starts the crosstalk and adds the best, the best crosstalk gain value, and the number of benefits. Once the start value of the crosstalk gain parameter is set, this exception 579 is transferred to state 2406. In state 2406, the algorithm 579 performs a Bode calculation by, for example, calling the twenty-second map, the GetBode algorithm 22〇. This gets the Pod (GetB〇de) algorithm 22〇〇 input two

Interference to the tracking loop at the desired frequency, for example, at the tracking crossover frequency (eg, 1·8ΚΗζ). This obtains the GetB〇de algorithm 22〇〇, as performed in the shape f 2406, measures the focus error signal (FES) output by the summing device 513, and calculates the focus error signal (FES). Here is the interference frequency. The value returned by the GetBode calculation is performed by the state 2406, which is then the amplitude of the signal component at the interference frequency. If the crosstalk gain ^ amplitude is less than the current minimum, the optimum crosstalk gain variable is set to this gain value. If the crosstalk does not have a small amplitude at the current crosstalk gain value, the algorithm 579 transitions to state 2407. , , , , in state 2407, this algorithm 579 increments or decrements the crosstalk increase,

And return to state 2406. In some embodiments, the algorithm 579 can begin with an initial gain and be incremented via a gain range to determine the optimal crosstalk gain. In some embodiments, the algorithm 579 can begin with an initial gain 曰 and move the gain along a first direction. If the crosstalk increases along the first direction, the algorithm 579 can move the crosstalk gain in the opposite direction to the first direction until it finds a minimum number of finds. Rail error signal (TES) to focus error signal (FES) crosstalk. In some embodiments, the algorithm 579 can search for more than a set minimum value (e.g., about five increments) to ensure that the minimum value set is an actual minimum value. μ 210 1277079 In state 2406, state 24〇6 transitions to state 2408 when this algorithm 579 finds that it has checked each gain value or has found one of the minimum value crosstalk gain values. In state 2408, this algorithm 579 stores the new crosstalk gain value and transitions to state 2409. In state 2409, this algorithm 579 releases the memory set in state 2404 and transitions to state 2410. In the case of 2412, this algorithm 579 ends the search loop and jumps out normally in step 2411. The twenty-fifth diagram shows an embodiment of a notch filter device correction algorithm. This algorithm 2500, for example, may be a notch filter device correction 552 in the tracking servo algorithm 502 or a notch filter device correction 520 in the focus servo algorithm 5〇1. This notch correction algorithm 25 is called in step 2501. In step 2502, the algorithm 2500, by way of example, calls the GetBode algorithm 2200 in the twenty-second diagram to perform a Bode calculation to obtain a particular frequency range. Properly control the frequency response curve of the loop. In some embodiments, the GetBode algorithm 2200 of the twenty-second figure provides a single point of separation (DFT) off at the separation frequency in this frequency range. For example, the enemy correction 52 can correct the range of about 3 to about 5 kHz of the notch filter device 519. This acquisition of the GfctBode algorithm 2200 is passed back to an array to provide, for example, the frequency response amplitude of the focus loop or the seek servo loop. At step 2503, the algorithm 25 sets the maximum peak to determine the frequency at which the maximum response is achieved. In some embodiments, a peak above a critical value is locked for the purpose, so that a frequency greater than a certain number of responses can be found. In some embodiments, a certain number of peaks are found, regardless of the amplitude of the actual response. The frequency at which the maximum response is obtained is then transmitted to the routine 25, for example, by the wave device, by which the signal of the _ rate is removed. This algorithm 2500 then jumps out at step 25〇4. The right notch wavefront forward algorithm 2500 is implemented as the notch correction 52〇, then the Bode algorithm 2500 is the interference focus control operation 4, and the output is read in the phase leading 211 !277〇79 device 518 Focus error signal (FES). The measured most responsive frequency is passed to the notch filter device 519 so that a notch filter can be established near these frequencies. If the notch correction algorithm 2500 is implemented as the notch correction 552, then the Bode algorithm 25 is the interference seek, control, workload, and is read at the output of the phase leader 55(). Corresponding to the search for the difference signal (TES). The frequency at which the maximum response is measured is transmitted to the notch filter device 551. ^ ^ In some embodiments, in this algorithm 25〇〇 is called as notch correction 2〇钿, the focus system is off. In some embodiments, the focus and tracking system is turned off before the algorithm is called the notch correction 522. ^ 500 is a diagram of an embodiment of a feedforward algorithm 2600. The previous shoulder-to-shoulder 2600 system can be applied as the feed-forward block 579 in the focus servo algorithm 〇5 532 and the seek servo algorithm 〇2. Previously, the feedback control algorithm outputs the focus control output to find harmonic variations, which may be caused, for example, by the bending, wear, or possibly focus error of the optical medium 1〇2. Signal (FES) 4 疋 = 2 3, this bribe algorithm 579 is to monitor the tracking control of the work side of the change, then the periodic error of the focus error signal ^ (〒 s) can be (4) the expected algorithm 532 And = ^ 〇 , , , , , , 103 103 103 103 103 103 103 103 103 103 103 103 103 103 103 103 103 103 103 103 103 103 103 103 103 103 103 103 103 103周期πίί The periodic variation in the rail error signal (TES) can also be used by the feedforward simple touch, in order to remove the dream and operate completely, the feedforward algorithm 532 and the first two tUf, cake (four) ^1 and The tracking control workload is added to achieve the result of removing the focus error signal () and the singularity of the singularity of the singularity. In some embodiments, the algorithm 2600 is a mobile cycle change. Its light 212 1277079 learns the spectrum wave of the media 102 rotation f frequency (that is, the rotation frequency of the rotary motor 101). Therefore, the output signal (cycle variation) of this algorithm 2600 can represent Asm(wt) + Bcos(wt ), wherein the rotation rate of the w-type rotating motor 1〇1: 输 演 演 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 The total device 578. The algorithm of the twenty-sixth figure is detailed, providing a square wave clock signal, which is multiplied by the frequency hybrid motor 1G1 to generate a sine wave-sine wave table length. A delay parameter is also transmitted to this point. Algorithm 26〇〇, in order to re-take & input signals, Before updating the summing device 2616 to output the signal parameters, the delay clock period is determined. Further, the number of sampling periods is input to the algorithm 2_. The input signals are received by the multiplying devices 2602 and 2603. Generally speaking, this is The incoming signal is expressed as: ff (t) — asin (wt) + bcos (wt) + g (t) , where 'a&b is the period control workload coefficient that has not been removed from the control workload, and g (t) is the control workload that does not include the frequency component of a rotating motor. At startup, the overall number of periodic corrections can be included in the input signal f(t): and therefore, a == A and b = B. During operation, the output parameter is entered into the input signal f(t). The input signal f(t) is multiplied by sin (wt) in the multiplying device 2602 and is in the multiplying device 2603. Multiply by cos (plus). The output signal of the multiplying device 2602, f (t) (wt), is input to the multiplexer 26〇9, and the output of the multiplying device 26〇3 is ' tiger' f (t) cos (wt) Input to the multiplexer 2608. 隹J number timing device 2605, which can be executed with delay parameters in each clock cycle Countdown action. During the delay period, the countdown device 2605 outputs a select signal to select the ground input of the input multiplexer 2609 and 2608. Once the countdown device 2605 reaches zero (indicating the end of the delay period), then the timing The device 2605 outputs a selection signal to the multiplexers 2609 and 2608' to select the output signals of the multiplying devices 26〇2 and 26〇3 respectively. The output signals of the multiplexing devices 2609 and 2608 are respectively input to the summing device 213 1277079 2610 and 2611. The summing device 2610 adds its input to the output. The summing device 2610 begins each sampling cycle with a zero output signal. At the end of the sampling period set by the delay envelope and the signal DFTCYCLES, the summing device 261 adds the signal f (t) sin (milk) of the sine wave during the DFTCycles period. Therefore, at the end of this summation, the output of the summing device 2610 has all other products with respect to the coefficient a, f(t) being zero (due to this summing action). Similarly, the device 2611 sums the f ") c ss (tree) of the DFTCYCLES number cycle so that the output signal of the summing device 2611 is related to the coefficient b.

The period f mesh DFTCYCLES multiplied by the sine table length is added to the delay in the multiplying device 2606 and added to the delay in the summing device 2607. Then, the countdown timer 2617 is in the period in which the delay and the summing devices 2610 and 2611 are accumulated, and the countdown operation is performed. At the end of the countdown period, is this countdown device Mi?

These summing devices 2612 and 2613 are enabled prior to the start of the next cycle. In the merging of the summing devices 2612 and 2613, the output signals of the summing devices 261 〇 and 2611 are respectively added to the already existing values. Immediately thereafter, these 2612 and 2613 maintain the output signals until the summing device 2610 and the accumulation operation are completed at one time. The output signals of the summing devices 2612 and 2613 are multiplied by a sine function and a cosine function, and added in the summing device 2616 = field supply, and the signal Asin (wt) + Bcos (wt), which is further added. = 0 is made. These coefficients eight and 18 are updated in each accumulation cycle. The basic period is obtained by taking the input of the input-heavy Fourier transform, thereby determining the w-frequency component of the input signal, and transmitting the component-invention, in some embodiments, the correction parameter is along with the optical media 102 orbital position. It is different. For example, the gain and offset values of the optical pickup unit are different from those of the optical medium 102. In some embodiments, the silk media 1G2 is a zone area. In some embodiments, the number of regions may be the same as the 写入12 write and pre-master portions. Thus, the operating parameters can be corrected in different media types and in different 214 1277079 areas. The twenty-seventh diagram A and the twenty-seventh diagram 6 show an embodiment of an algorithm 2700 for correcting parameters of different regions in the optical medium 1〇2. This 'be algorithm 2700 is called in step 2701. In step 2702, a command status parameter is set to correct the initialization. The top of this correction loop begins in step 2703. After step 2703, until the correction loop is completed, the algorithm is illustrated using a state diagram. From step 27〇3, the algorithm 27 enters state 2704. In state 2704, the correction parameters are initialized. In addition, a current regional parameter is set as the first region to be corrected. μ This algorithm 2700 then moves to state 2705. In state 2705, this algorithm 2705 checks if all regions have been corrected. This algorithm 2700 is transferred from state 2705 to 2713 if all zone 0 fields have been corrected. In state 2713, the corrected parameters are stored. In some embodiments, some or all of the parameters are stored in program memory 330. In some embodiments, some or all of the parameter 1 is stored on optical media 102. " If this algorithm 2700 determines that all regions have not been corrected, then in state 2705, the algorithm 2700 performs a seek operation to place the actuator arm 104 in a particular region of the optical media 1 〇2. This state algorithm 27〇5 determines that one of the Q domains wants the orbital position, and in step 2706, the call algorithm 557' is used to place the optical capture unit (qpu) 1〇3 on the optical medium 1〇2. It depends on the area. In some embodiments, prior to the call lookup algorithm 557, the motion algorithm 2700 can turn focus and tracking on (if focus and seek are currently off). If the search algorithm initiated by this algorithm 2706 fails, then the algorithm 2700 transitions from state 2705 to state 2710. In state 2710, a cleanup algorithm is executed. This clearing algorithm can, for example, place the optical pickup unit (OPU) 103 in a parked position and can turn focus and tracking on. An error flag is set by state 2710' This Actuator 2700 and jumps out. If the algorithm 2700 (in state 2705) detects a relinquish command, 215 1277079 then the algorithm 2700 transitions to state 2712. In the state coffee, this performance has confirmed that the abandonment command and transferred to state 271 to perform this clearing ^ right this search (in state 27〇5) is successful, then this calculation = move to State 2707. In state 27〇7, this algorithm lets the call through a region correction algorithm 2711 to perform such corrections. Area ^ 3 Method 1 performs individual calibration routines to correct the current area

It is ginseng. In state 2707, if the condition is as small as abandonment, then the action is transferred to the shape helper 12. If the error condition is made (for example, if in state 2709, the algorithm 27 is incremented by a retry counting device and the wire is greater than the specific value, the numbness system is transferred to the shape, 2710 Jumping out. If the retry counting device is still at the acceptable level algorithm = 00 is transferred to state 27 〇 5, another attempt is made while correcting the current region. In some embodiments, execution is performed in state 271 〇 Before a loss, this algorithm 27_ can taste Xia Zheng - specific area plural: owe (for example, three times) 〇μ, in state 27G7, if these corrections are performed without errors, then this algorithm 2700 Transfer position 2708. In state 27〇8, the correction result is stored in one or more arrays 2715. In addition, 'the current region is incremented to the next region, and the algorithm 27 嶋 球 峨 峨Correction of the new current region. Figure 27B shows an embodiment of the region correction algorithm 2711, i is called by the state 27〇7 of the algorithm 2700. This algorithm 2711 is called at step 2730. In step 2731, 'set a command initiation flag In step 2732, the 'disc drive 1 〇〇 is brought to full power, if the optical drive 1 〇〇 was previously sleeping (or in low jail). At the tip of the 2733 towel, the side starts to the top of the correction loop. In 2734 (and the entire algorithm 2711), if a 216 1277079 f is detected, the method 27m is transferred to state 275 and the sister confirms the abandonment condition. - This algorithm 2700 then moves to state 275〇, and Any clearing routines are performed here (for example, parking the optical pickup unit (〇pU) 戋 to turn off the focus and tracking). From state 2750, this algorithm 27_ shifts to state 275j and sets the error here. And the flag is discarded. This algorithm 27 then transfers ^ state 2753, where the algorithm 27 jumps out of the loop starting at step 2733. Finally, this algorithm 2711 sets any abandonment or error flag. 2756 bounces out. / ^ From step 2734, if no abandon condition is detected, then the algorithm 2711 transitions to state 2735. In state 2735, the tracking and focusing systems are simultaneously in the step

Closed in 2736 (if it is on). Furthermore, the current operating parameters of the region (2) optical pickup unit (〇PU) offset, optical pickup unit (〇pu), benefit, focus error signal (FES) offset, focus error signal (FES) increase Surplus: Focus error signal (FES) loop gain, notch filter device parameters, fortunately ^^^ signal (TES) offset, tracking error signal (TES) gain, tracking error ^, number (TES) loop gain, seek The error signal (TES) to focus error # j (FES) φ tone gain) is loaded. If an error condition is detected in state 2735, then the algorithm 2711 transitions to state 2737. In state 2J37, this algorithm π is performed if only an acceptable number of retries are performed.

The system moves back to state 2735 to retry the initialization operation parameters and closes the tracking and focus. If an unacceptable number of retries have been made, then the algorithm ^, shifts the f state 2750 to set the error flag, and finally jumps out at step 2-6. f The error is not detected in the grievance 2735, then the algorithm 2711 is transferred to state 2739. In state 2739, this algorithm 2711 begins to rotate the motor 1〇1. As disclosed in the invention of the rotary motor, this state 2739 can call the algorithm to stop the motor, start the motor, and set the rotational speed in block 2738. 'If a 1 flag is detected, this algorithm 2711 can be transferred to state 2751. If an error is detected, then the algorithm 2711 transitions to state 2740. In state 2740, 217 1277079 = the first retry action. If too many retry actions are taken, then the algorithm 2711 moves the state 2750 to set the error flag and eventually jumps out at step 2756. If too many retries are performed, then this algorithm 2711 transitions back to state 2739 to re-attempt to start the rotary motor 1〇1. If the motor 101 is successfully activated in step 2739, then the algorithm 2711 transitions to state 2741. In state 2741, this algorithm 2711 is laser 218 turned on and performs a focus gain correction algorithm. The focus gain correction algorithm is shown in Fig. 15 and Fig. B, which have been previously discussed. If an error is detected, then the algorithm 2711 transitions to state 271, which (if not too many retry actions) transitions to state 2739 to retry the 2J39 and 2741. Again, if too many retry attempts are made, then the algorithm Spring 2711 transitions from state 2740 to state 2750. If an abandon condition is detected in state 2741, then this algorithm 2711 transitions to state 2751. If the algorithm 2711 in state 2741 successfully turns on the laser 218 and performs a focus gain correction algorithm in step 2742, then the algorithm 2711 transitions to state 2743. In state 2743, this algorithm 2711 closes the focus. In step 2744, state 2743 can activate and deactivate motor 10 to set the motor speed of motor 101 to the current correction zone, and can call algorithm 535 to turn focus on. An embodiment of this algorithm 535 is shown in Figure 7A. If an error is detected in state 2743, then the algorithm 2711 transitions to state 2747 to perform a retry action. If too many retry attempts have been made, then this algorithm 2711 transitions back to state 2743, in which it attempts to turn off the focus again. If too many retry actions have been taken, then the algorithm 2711 transfers to the algorithm 2750 to set the error flag in state 2754 and sets the error flag to jump out before step 2756, turning off the laser 218, stopping the motor i (H, and parking optical pickup unit (OFLJ) 103. If a discard condition is detected, the algorithm 2711 is transferred to state 2751. If state 2743 successfully turns off the focus, then the algorithm 2711 is transferred to 218 1277079 State 2745. In state 2745, a correction algorithm can be executed to operate in focus closure. These algorithms, in step 2746, include a focus loop gain correction algorithm 522 (the embodiments of which are shown in In the twenty-first figure, the seek & divergent signal (FES) offset correction algorithm 508 (the embodiment is shown in the sixteenth and seventeenth figures), the tracking error signal (TES) offset Correction algorithm 542 (the embodiments of which are shown in Figs. 18 and 19) and tracking error signal (TES) gain correction algorithm 544 (the embodiments of which are shown in the twentieth diagram). If a error is detected in state 2745 Poor, then the algorithm 2711 is transferred to Sorrow 2747 to retry these calculations. If too many retry attempts have been made, then the algorithm 2711 is transferred to state 2750 to set the error flag and step in Before jumping out of the 2756, turning off the tracking and focusing, turning off the laser 218, and turning off the motor 1 若 If the attempt has not been attempted too many times, the algorithm 2711 is transferred back to the state 2743, in an attempt to turn off the focus, and The correction algorithm of step 2746 is performed again. If state 2745 successfully performs the correction of step 2746, then the algorithm 2711 transitions to state 2748. In state 2748, the algorithm 2711 turns off focus and tracking. The tracking is closed on a particular track indicated by a target physical sector address (PSA) value. The target physical sector address (PSA) track is located within the current region. State 2748 is OK, in step 2749, Execution of the algorithm to start and end the motor 1, perform a focus closure algorithm 535, perform a critical tracking algorithm 555, and perform a search algorithm 557 and a single track beat algorithm 559 The optical capture unit (〇PU) 1〇3 is then placed in the target physical sector address (PSA) (location address). If the state 2748 detects an error, then the algorithm 2711 transitions to state 2752. In state 2752, this algorithm 2711 checks to see if it has been g, allowing a number of retry actions. If not, then this algorithm 2711 is transferred to the shape ^2748 to be at the target physical segment address (psa) Try again to turn off focus and tracking on the indicated track. If the number of retry actions is exhausted, then the algorithm 219 1277079 2711 transitions to state 2750 to turn off the laser 218, turn on the seek and focus, turn off the motor 101, and finally set the error flag and jump out at step 2756. If a discard condition is detected, then the algorithm 2711 transitions to state 2751.

If state 2748 successfully closes focus and seek at the target physical segment address (PSA), then this algorithm 2711 transitions to state 2755. In state 2755^ the correction algorithm can be performed at the same time to close the focus and seek the seek. These algorithms, examples of which are represented in step 2757, include: tracking loop gain correction algorithm 562 (an embodiment of which is shown in the twenty-first diagram), a poly loop, and a benefit correction algorithm 522 ( The embodiment is shown in the twenty-first figure, the second to the seek error signal (TES) to the focus error signal (FES) crosstalk correction algorithm 579 (the embodiment is shown in the twenty-fourth figure ). If an error is detected in state 2755, then this algorithm 27 transitions to state 2752 for a -4 trial action, such as a previous ship. If no error is detected, then the nasal method 2711 is transferred to state 2754. In state 2754, no error flag is set and this algorithm 2711 is ready-normal bounce action. In state 2753, this algorithm 2711 indicates that the loop started in step 2733 is complete and the algorithm 2711 jumps out in step 2756. As shown in FIG. 17A, the algorithm 2711 calls through each of the virtual zeros on the optical medium 1〇2. Therefore, the number of corrections is stored along with the operational parameters suitable for the various areas of the optical medium 102. The twenty-eighth figure shows the inverse nonlinear correction algorithm in the focus feeding algorithm 501 and the inverse nonlinear correction in the singular ship algorithm 5〇2; positive 7^ embodiment. Non-missing correction method 512 and 51 cans of mosquitoes U" difference signal (TES) offset or focus error signal (FES> ^ shift ^, which is the tracking error signal near the offset value (T = digitization. Linear correction calculation and 5H system twelfth figure of the secret method 13G1 class seven again, miscellaneous and 154, in some embodiments, 禆 can be left poor, 篡 Υ Υ Γ 区域 in the area of the twenty-seventh map correction Performing the different method 27_f surgery. The second + / \ _ table _ algorithm fine one implementation

220 1277079 example, which establishes focus error signal (FES) gain, seek error signal gain, tracking error signal (TES) offset, tracking loop gain, ^, t (TES) to focus error signal (FES) Crosstalk-table

In the twenty-eighth figure, you will find a list of one of the combinations. This algorithm 2800 is initiated at step 2801. In step 2802, the algorithm 2_ sets a command start flag cmd-INIT. In step 2803, the algorithm 28 turns the power on, whereby the optical disk drive can perform the function (rather than sleeping). Step 28〇4 begins at the top of the Spring Road. If a decision is made to abandon the condition, then the algorithm 28 transfers to state 2822 and confirms the abandonment command here. The second side of the algorithm is then transferred to the shape g 2823 for example, by turning on the seek and turning on the focus, turning off the laser 218 and turning off, up to ιοί, thereby turning off the optical disk drive 100. This algorithm 2823 then moves to Sorrow 2820 and sets the abandonment flag here. This algorithm 28 then moves to state 2821, thereby indicating that the loop starting at step 2804 is completed before setting a discard flag and jumping out at step 2825. If a discard condition is detected in step 2805, then the algorithm 28 transitions to state 2806. In state 2806, the operating parameters of the optical disk drive and the non-linear look-up table start parameters are loaded. Further, in step 28〇6, an initial bias is set. If an error is detected in state 2806, for example, a mailbox communication error, then algorithm 2800 transitions to state 2823. This algorithm 2800 turns off the optical disk drive 100 (i.e., tracking off, focus off, laser 218 off, motor 101 off) and transitions to state 2820. In state 2820, an error flag is set. As indicated by block 2824, the normal correction value can be recovered by memory 32 或 or 330 (third map). This algorithm 2_ then moves to state 282, which ends the loop starting in step 2804. This algorithm 2800 then jumps out at step 221 1277079 2825. ^ If no error is detected in state 2806, then algorithm 2800 transitions to state 2807. In state 2806, this algorithm 2800 initiates a set of optical manipulation unit (OPU) offset values, which are indicated by array 2826. These are the specific offsets used throughout algorithm 2800. In state 2807, this algorithm 2800 sets a focus error signal (FES) offset. This algorithm 28〇〇 then corrects the focus error signal (FES) gain in algorithm 51〇. Furthermore, the algorithm 2800 sets a focus error signal in the state 2807 (the FES^ flag is true, and a tracking error signal (TES) flag is false. This algorithm 2800 is immediately transferred to the state. 2808. In state 2808, the algorithm 2800, in step 2809, confirms that the sense and focus are simultaneously turned on. If an error is detected in state 2808, then the algorithm 2800 transitions to the reply state 2818. If too many replies are made in the reply state 2818, then the algorithm 2800 transitions to state 2823 and finally sets an error flag and jumps out in step 2825. If no error is detected in state 28 〇 8, Then the algorithm 2800 continues to state 2809. ^ If the focus error signal (FES) flag is true, then the algorithm 2800 is transferred to state 2809. In state 2809, the algorithm 2800 is measured. The frequency of the focus loop gain. This crossover frequency can be, for example, 1·5ΚΗζ. This algorithm 2800 can, for example, call the twenty-second map to obtain Bode in step 281〇 ( GetBode) algorithm 2200. The crossover frequency spring loop gain is close to 壹, then the algorithm 2800 sets this to make the tracking error signal (TES) flag true and shift back to state 28〇8. If the loop gain is not 壹, then This algorithm 2800 is transitioned to state 2811. - In state 2811, the focus error signal (FES) gain is adjusted. In some embodiments, the focus error signal (FES) gain is adjusted along a first direction and The focus error signal (FES) gain is adjusted in the opposite direction when the loop gain is further than the last adjusted focus error signal (FES) gain distance 。. Once the focus error signal (FES) is adjusted in state 2811 Thereafter, 222 1277079 Thus, algorithm 2800 then transitions to state 28〇9 to re-measure the loop gain with a new focus error signal (FES) gain, if an error is detected in state 28〇9, This algorithm 2800 transitions to state 2818 for a retry operation. - State 2808, if the tracking error signal (TES) is true, then the extension 2800 transitions to state 2812. In state 2812 The algorithm 2800, the line tracking error signal (TES) gain correction algorithm 544 and the seek error signal (TES) offset correction algorithm 542. If an error is detected in state 2812, then the calculation Method 2800 transitions to state 2813. In state 2813, the algorithm 2800 performs the seek loop gain correction algorithm 562 in step 2815. If an error is detected in state 2813, then the algorithm 2800 The system moves to state 2818. If no error is detected, then the calculus 2800 sets the focus error signal (FES) flag to false and the flag (TES) flag is false and transitions to state 2816. In state 2816, this algorithm 2800 performs a tracking error signal (TES) to a focus error signal (FES) crosstalk correction algorithm 579. In some embodiments, as represented by block 2817, the algorithm 2800 can move the optical pickup unit (OPU) 103 to a particular location (e.g., the outer edge) on the optical medium 1〇2. This algorithm 2800 then transitions to state 2819. The linear correction result of the selected focus error signal (FES) offset in state 2819 is stored in array 2826. This algorithm 2800 can, for example, store the results in flash memory 330. If the algorithm 2800 determines that the algorithm 28 is unfinished (ie, the focus error signal (FES) offset value has not been determined), then the algorithm 2800 is transferred back to state 2897 for retrieval. The next focus error signal (FES) offset value. If this algorithm 2800 determines that all focus error signal (FES) offset values have been considered, then this algorithm 28 transitions to state 2820. In state 2820, the optical drive 1 is turned off and the normal bounce flag is set. This algorithm 2800 then transitions to state 2821, which ends at step 2804 with a loop of 223 !277〇79. The algorithm 2_ then jumps out normally during the step. (4) ί f algorithm belongs to each focus error signal (FES) offset number ΐ ϊ ί ί ί ί ί ί ! 戦 戦 寻 寻 寻 寻 寻 寻 寻 寻 寻 寻 寻 寻 寻 寻 寻 寻 寻 寻 寻 寻 寻 寻 寻 寻 寻 寻 寻 寻 寻 寻 寻 寻 寻 寻 寻 寻 寻 寻And the search error = (TES), to the focus error number (FES) crosstalk gain - table.

^Most is immediately in the operating examples of the reverse nonlinear algorithms 511 and 546, the focus error signal (FES) and the seek error signal) are different from the current focus position (focus error signal (FES) offset Value) is very sensitive. These algorithms 512 and 547 establish a gain table by which the non-linear effects of the difference check signal (FES) and the seek error signal (TES) are combined. Blocks 511 and 546, respectively, can be used to change the focus error signal (FES) and the seek tracking error signal (TES) gain to maintain a linear response.

The twenty-ninth diagram represents an embodiment of a readhead loading algorithm 2900. When the optical disk drive 100 starts, the position of the optical pickup unit (opu) above the optical medium 1〇2 is unknown. The read head loading algorithm 29 allows the optical disk drive 100 to start and the focus and tracking is turned off over the correct portion of one of the optical media 1 (i.e., one of the portions). The tracking control workload (bias signal) required to place the optical pickup unit (OPU) 103 in the open loop mode above the optical medium 1〇2 can be changed due to mechanical and electronic parameters and the optical disk drive 100 Physically oriented and quite varied. The read head loading algorithm 2900 begins at step 2901 where the optical media 1〇2 begins to rotate via the start of the rotary motor 1〇1. In step 2902, the optical pickup unit (〇pu) 1〇3 is biased to lean against the internal stop. In other words, the tracking control workload is set to a value to determine that the optical pickup unit (OPU) 103 is placed to rest on the inner stop. This algorithm 2900 moves to step 2903 as the migration moves. In step 2903, the algorithm 2900 is, for example, utilizing a focus closure algorithm 535 to turn off focus. In step 2904, the bias signal is incremented to slightly move the optical pickup unit (OPU) 103 away from the internal stop. In step 2905, the seek 224 1277079, the error signal (TES) peak to peak value is calculated. In some embodiments, in step 2902, the optical pickup unit (0PU) 1〇3 is placed at any extreme position (e.g., at the inner diameter of the optical medium 1〇2 or the outer diameter of the optical medium (1) 2). In some embodiments, the optical medium 102 has an interior 153 (the first image includes a computer bar code pattern above about one-half of the circumference. This tracking error signal (TES) amplitude, when located above the computer bar code pattern, It is similar to the seek error signal (TES) amplitude when it is above the first master portion 150, but the tracking error signal (TES) waveform is different. The thirty-first graph A and the third graph B indicate β. An example of the amplitude of the seek error signal (TES), wherein the light, the capture unit (0PU) 1〇3 is located above the bar code area φ of the optical media 1〇2: for convenience, the thirty-first figure C indicates - An example of a seek error signal (TES) during a search for a different ^. In step 29〇5, the algorithm 2900 collects a tracking error signal (TES) data of the optical medium 1 〇 2 about one rotation. In step 29〇6, the algorithm 29 calculates the average of the tracking error signal (TES) data collected in step 29〇5. In step 2907, the algorithm 2900 is calculated according to step 2905. The average value is calculated by calculating a limit range and comparing steps 29〇5 Each sample of the error signal (TES) and this limit. This algorithm 29 is the number of samples within the limit. > In step 2908, this algorithm 29 compares the count of steps 29〇7 and a spring critical limit. If the count is greater than the critical limit, the optical pickup unit (OPU) 103 is then located above one of the readable portions of the optical medium 1〇2 (ie, having one of the tracks), and This algorithm 29 proceeds to step 29〇 9. Otherwise, this algorithm 2900 returns to step 29〇4 to move the optical pickup unit (OPU) 103 out of another amount. This algorithm 2900 continuously moves optics The capture unit (OPU) 103 exits the inner diameter of the optical medium 102 until algorithm 29 determines: the optical capture unit (OPU0103 is located above one of the optical media 1〇2 with tracks. At 225 1277079, step 2910 In this embodiment, the algorithm 2900 closes the tracking. In some embodiments, the track crossing detection device 454 can be applied to determine whether the optical pickup unit (OPU) 103 is moving too fast. In some embodiments, use One of the fixed time delays after incrementing the input of the bias signal of the actuator arm 104.

When a newly inserted optical medium 102 is inserted and the optical drive 1 is started, the track below the optical pickup unit (OPU) 103 is of an unknown type (eg, it may be writable in one of the optical media 102) Part or a pre-master part). As mentioned previously, there are many operating parameters that are media dependent (e.g., tracking error 彳"5 Tiger (TES) gain and offset, focus error signal (fes) gain and offset). This media type can be determined by starting with a parameter suitable for the optical media 1 - a pre-master portion and monitoring the focus-off error signal (TES) peak-to-peak value of the focus off. The peak-to-peak signal range of the traceable error signal (TES) in the writable track is much larger than the pre-master track. In some embodiments, the algorithm 2900 includes the step 2909 performed prior to turning off the tracking in step 2910. In step 2903, the operational parameters suitable for the writable portion of the optical medium 1〇2 are loaded. In step 2909, if the seek error signal (TE^), the peak-to-peak value is less than a critical value, then the algorithm 2900 loads the operational parameters suitable for a pre-master portion. a In the α卩分 embodiment, the critical value can be set to 5〇% of the value of the pre-mum and the peak value of the signal (tes) on the writable medium; /:=, if the brain is set To contribute too much, it may be two? The media (two) shape - older, its age is a miscellaneous parameter

Loading 3 Chuan Department means that there is one device of the CD player. The device and the 3103 22's are a video display 3101 and a speaker 3102 for wireless g. And an antenna 3107 J including infrared transmission port or other data communication transmission port. Alternatively, the 226 1277079 set 3100 can include a camera 3108. The video display 3101 and the speakers 3102 and 3103 can be of any type and a multimedia display can be provided. The user input 塾 3105 can also be any type of input device, for example, a keyboard, a touch pad, an indicator device, or any combination of input devices. The light 1 machine 100 is coupled to the device 3100. The device 3100 can communicate with the optical drive 100$: Figure A) by reading the data from the optical media 102 mounted in the optical drive 1 or writing the data to the optical media 1〇2. In some embodiments, optical media 102 is removable. This device 31 communicates with the optical disk drive 1GG (Fig. A) via the output interface 13〇. Any number of communication protocols (known to those skilled in the art) can rely on the device 3 to access the CD-ROM communication data and commands. The device 3100 can be a number of assistant (pDA) device, a sound system, a game device, a digital camera system, a personal computer, a digital book, an electric age system, or any other device that can be used with the optical disc 1GG. Using a disc with a combination of pre-master and writable areas, digital books and gaming devices can allow producers to provide and store notes or other interactive functions, such as interactive storybooks. Device 3100, which in turn, can be a personal digital assistant PDA), a multimedia display (television or stereo), a gaming device, a telephone, or any other combination of functions. . The above detailed description is intended to be illustrative of the embodiments of the invention and Those skilled in the art will be aware of the scope and spirit of the present. As such, the invention is limited only by the scope of the following claims. BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS Fig. A is a view showing an embodiment of an optical disk drive according to the present invention. Fig. B shows an example of an optical medium which can be applied to an optical disk drive. Money Figure 2A shows the optical material - an embodiment of the invention - the drive is placed on the arm. 227 1277079 Figure 2B is a diagram showing an embodiment of an optical pickup unit in accordance with some embodiments of the present invention. Figure 2C shows the optical path of the optical pickup unit through the second Figure B. The second figure D shows an embodiment of the optical detecting device positioning of the optical capturing unit of the second drawing B.苐^一图E and 弟^一图F are the simplified optical paths that are not in the second picture C. The second graph G, the second graph H, the second graph I, the second graph J, the second graph κ and the second graph B introduce the development of a focus error signal (FES), which is in some embodiments of the present invention. a function of the distance between the optical pickup unit and the surface of the optical medium.

The second diagram, the second diagram, the second diagram, the second diagram ρ, the second diagram q, and the second diagram R introduce a development of a tracking error signal (TES), which is part of the embodiment of the present invention. The optical pickup unit functions as one of the positions above the surface of the optical medium. Figure 3 is a block diagram showing a servo system control system of one of the optical disk drives according to some embodiments of the present invention. The third figure 3 shows the block diagram of the third private-listening amplification device. The fourth drawing (including the fourth drawing A to the fourth drawing D) is a block diagram showing an embodiment of the control wafer shown in the block diagram of the third drawing block in accordance with some embodiments of the present invention.

The fifth to fifth diagrams A to 3) and the fifth diagram 6 (including the first β # fifth diagram B·3) are diagrams showing a functional block diagram of a fifth example according to some embodiments of the present invention. One example shifts one of the low-frequency integrals shown in the figure. The fourth embodiment of the present invention is a tracking slide 228 1277079. The ugly figure shows a part of the implementation according to some embodiments of the present invention. example. The sixth diagram shows an embodiment of the seek acquisition algorithm, which performs the algorithms shown in the fifth graph A and the fifth graph B. The seventh figure A (including the seventh picture A_1 and the seventh picture Α 2), the seventh picture B, the seventh picture C and the seventh picture D represent an embodiment of a focus acquisition algorithm, and the direct execution is performed according to the present embodiment. The fifth and fifth diagrams of some of the embodiments of the invention are shown in the figures. The eighth diagram and the eighth diagram 3 show an embodiment of a multi-track search algorithm according to one of the embodiments of the present invention.

The ninth map A (including the ninth map a) and the ninth age _2) and the ninth post (including the ninth map B-1 and the ninth map private 2) represent a multi-executive search algorithm, For example, the algorithm is implemented according to the functional block diagram shown in the eighth diagram a and the eighth diagram B of some embodiments of the present invention, and the ninth diagram C is the ninth diagram a and the The hysteresis and amplitude hysteresis of the zero-crossing detection of the tracking zero point in Figure 8. The tenth diagram A and the tenth diagram B are block diagrams showing exemplary control signals and a single lane-jumping algorithm in the fifth diagram A and the fifth diagram B of the partial embodiment of the present invention. ^

11 is a diagram showing a digital signal processor (DSP) firmware architecture for controlling and monitoring focus and tracking in accordance with some embodiments of the present invention. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a portion according to the present invention. A block diagram of one of the embodiments of one of the life cycles of an optical disk drive. FIG. 12B is a diagram showing parameters of a graph, and the parameters are represented by a time period according to an example of an embodiment of the present invention. A block diagram of an embodiment of a correction algorithm used to obtain calibration parameters for various media and different bars 229 1277079. Figure 12B is a block diagram showing an embodiment of a correction algorithm in accordance with some embodiments of the present invention. Fig. 14A is a diagram showing the correction side of the embodiment of the present invention - the square side of the embodiment for correcting the side device offset and gain values. Figure 14B is a block diagram showing an embodiment of a correction algorithm in accordance with some embodiments of the present invention for correcting such input offsets with light scattering. 15 and 15 represent a block diagram of one embodiment of a focus error signal (FES) gain correction algorithm in accordance with some embodiments of the present invention, and measured or generated during the correction period. input signal. Figure 16 is a diagram showing an embodiment of a focus error signal (FES) offset correction algorithm in accordance with some embodiments of the present invention. Tenth/11B (including the tenth mile to the sixteenth _3) is another embodiment of the Focus Error Correction (FES) offset correction algorithm according to the present part. ,

Figure 16 c shows a representation of the peak-to-peak value of this tracking error signal (TES) as a function of the focus error signal (FES) offset:

It is used to introduce one of the tracking errors (TES) corrections in accordance with some embodiments of the present invention. Figure 17 is a diagram showing another embodiment of a focus error signal (FES) offset correction algorithm in accordance with some embodiments of the present invention. Eighteen is an embodiment of a tracking error signal (TES) offset correction algorithm in accordance with some embodiments of the present invention. Nineteen is another embodiment of a tracking error signal (TES) offset correction algorithm in accordance with some embodiments of the present invention. A tenth embodiment is an embodiment of a tracking error signal (TES) gain correction algorithm in accordance with some embodiments of the present invention. 230 1277079 The tenth house is not a circuit gain correction according to one of the embodiments of the present invention. Twentyth embodiment is an embodiment of a Bode (melt) derivative according to some embodiments of the present invention. Twentyth ί, Table j is an embodiment of a Fourier transform according to some embodiments of the present invention. A tenth example of a tracking error signal according to one of the embodiments of the present invention. One of the error signal (FES) crosstalk algorithms is implemented. Secondly, according to the present invention, an embodiment of the positive and negative shoulders is applied. Section (4) Partially Compensated - _ Correction Calculations The first seventeenth figure B (including the twenty-seventh figure B-1 and the twenty-seventh according to some embodiments of the present invention, the area correction performance first H Ming H = eight Figure A and Figure 28B) show one of the inverse nonlinear correction algorithms in one of the examples according to the example of the example, the tenth (fourth) part of the real--reading head loading performance " ^::5 series table not - search error signal in this computer bar ants 30th figure ^ indicates - tracking error miscellaneous number during the - off tracking operation ★ ten 81 series table not - device, which has One of the inventions is a disc player. 231 1277079 [Description of main component symbols] 100: CD player 101 · Axis motor 102: Optical media 103: Optical pickup unit (OPU) 104: Transmission arm 105: Laser drive device 106: Controller 110 ··Read The fetch/write process 120: servo system 130: interface 150: pre-master portion 151: writable portion 152: proximity rotation access 153: inner region 154: outer region 200 · axis 102: transmission 203: shaft 204: flexible shaft 206 energizing transmission coil 210: periscope 210, 231: side wall 2U, 212, 213: reflective surface 214: transparent optical block 215 · 矽 pedestal 217: laser pedestal 218: thunder Shot 1277079 219: High Frequency Oscillator (HFO) 222: Orthogonal Wave Plate (QWP) 223: Objective 224: Light Beams 225, 226, 231, 232, 233, 250, 428: Detection Device 226: Reverse Mirror 232, 235: element 231, 233, 234, 236: external element 252: annular reflecting means 260: plane, track 261 · · groove 308, 310: pre-amplifying means 311, 312, 313, 314, 315, 316, 317: Amplifying device 320: data buffer memory 330: program memory 340: work Driving device 350: control wafer 360: cassette ejection motor 370: latching solenoid 380: power monitoring device 390: voltage rectifying device 402-1 to 402-6: offset block 404-1 to 404-6: Variable gain amplifying means 406-1 to 406-3: anti-aliasing filtering means 408-1, 408-2 output signals to multiplexers 410-1 and 410-2: input to such ratio converter 412: focus completion means (FOK) 414-1 to 414-6: Equal sampling filter device 416 · Digital signal processor (DSP) 418: Equalization device 1277079 420: Amplification device 422: Input to slicing device 424: Digital Phase Locked Loop (DPLL) 426: Synchronization Marking device 430, 436, 441 ~ 443, 531, 558, 814, 1116, 2608, 2609: multiplex device 432: microprocessor 438, 444, 446, 448, 507, 513, 52, 534, 54 807 810, 813, 2610, 2611, 2612, 2613, 2616: summing device 450: bandpass filtering device 452: low pass filtering device 454: obsolete crossover detecting device 456: rotation control device 458: sequence interface 460: Laser Control Digital Analog Converter 466: Diagnostic Digital Analog Converter 468 : R & D digital analog converter 470: analog test bus 472: digital test bus 474: diagnostic pulse width modulation (pwm) 478, 478-1 to 478-8: temporary storage device 502: turn off the tracking servo algorithm 5〇8: Focus error signal (FES) offset correction algorithm 5〇9 · Focus error signal (FES) gain amplification 510: Focus error signal (FES) 511: Corrected inverse nonlinear algorithm 512 · Reverse nonlinear correction algorithm Method for correcting (four) difference signal (TES) wire focus error signal (4)) crosstalk 1277079 515: sampling integrity test device 516: enabling integration device 517: working system seek error signal (TES) completion detection device 519 Filter device gain correction algorithm 520, 552 · Notch correction algorithm 524: Loop gain device 530: Latch sample and hold circuit 535: Focus close algorithm 542 · · Search error signal (TES) offset correction algorithm Method 543: Set Gain Algorithm 546: Correct Reverse Nonlinear Algorithm #547 · Reverse Nonlinear Correction Algorithm 548: Integrity Test Device 549: Integral Device 550: Tracking Servo Phase Lead Compensation Device 551, 553: Notch filter Devices 554, 801: Obey Zero Crossing (TZC) Detection Device 555: Turn off the seek algorithm 556: Turn off the switching device 557: Multiple Track Search Algorithm φ 561: Zero Return Sliding Detection Device 579: Crosstalk Compensation Device 583: Detection device gain correction algorithm 585: seek loop gain correction 591: defect detection device 592: direction detection algorithm 802: track zero crossing (TZC) counting device 803: track zero crossing (TZC) cycle Device 805: Reference Speed Calculation Device 235 1277079 806: EB Speed Calculation Device 815: Loop Gain Device 816: Search Complete Detection Algorithm 817: Boundary Detection Device 818: Symbol Block 822: Start Search Period 823 • Cycle 825: Acceleration Lookup Control Workload 826: Clamp Tracking Control Workload 827: Deceleration Rake Control Workload 830: Enable Reverse Rocket Gain Device 901: Search Initiation 902: Search Command 1001 Tracking Mode 1002 Acceleration Period 1003 Slide Cycle 1004 Deceleration cycle 1005 Focus on signal 1006 Tracking integration device On signal 1007 Tracking and focusing cycle 1008 Settling cycle 1010 Track bounce state machine 1011 Tracking Compensation Device 1012 Filtering Device 1013, 1014: Pulse Amplifying Device 1017: Sample and Hold Circuit 1100: Digital Signal Processor (DSP) Firmware Architecture 1350: Correction Sequence 2100 · · Loop Gain Algorithm 2200: Get Bode ( GetBode) Algorithm 1277079 2300: Discrete Fourier Transform Algorithm (DFT) 2500: Notch Filter Device Correction Algorithm 2600 · Feedforward Algorithm 2602, 2603: Multiplying Device 2605, 2617: Countdown Device 2711: Region Correction Algorithm 3100: device 3101: video display 3102, 3103: speaker 3104: microphone 3105 · user input pad 3106: external input 3107: antenna 3108: camera

Claims (1)

1277079 X. Patent application scope: L A servo system, including: an optical pickup unit; an analog-to-digital converter, a signal of the detector, and a version of the signal provided by the self-correction and early _ (four) digital signal And from the connection of Yue, 丨伫哚 ^ the difference k 唬, the digital signal processor has a 'money reduction machine calculation (four) the error signal; and the position of the clothes, _ off should control the signal Control optical operation unit 2. A method of controlling an optical disk drive, comprising: receiving a digital optical pickup unit signal; #in a digital signal processor, extracting a tracking error signal or a focus error signal from the digital optical pickup And σ)b ° σσ drive the consistent motion in the disc drive in response to the calculated error signal, so as to circumscribe the tracking or focus associated with an optical medium coupled to the disc drive. 238 1277079 VII. Designated representative map: (1) The representative representative of the case is: Figure A. (2) A brief description of the components of the representative figure: 100: CD player 102: Optical media 104: Transmission arm 106: Controller 110: Read/write process 130: Interface 101 · Axis motor 103: Optical port Take unit (OPU) 105: Laser drive unit 107 · Mechanical part 120: Servo system 8. If there is a chemical formula in this case, please disclose the chemical formula that best shows the characteristics of the invention: